JP7440958B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means.

Some of these gaming machines execute variable display of special symbols according to the judgment result of judgment information, and also execute variable effects using effect symbols during the execution of variable display of special symbols ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-118109

However, the gaming machines described in the above-mentioned patent documents have the problem that there is room for improvement in game performance and that the games are not very interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determining means that determines determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display that executes a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. and a storage means for storing judgment information on which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory, and the fluctuation display means performs cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops the special symbol. and the performance control means can display a number of pending displays according to the suspended memory, and can execute a variable performance using performance symbols in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and It is possible to perform an operation display in which the hold display is periodically operated during execution , and the hold display is a hold display in which the operation is displayed in a first cycle, and an operation display in a second cycle different from the first cycle. a hold display, and the effect control means displays a hold display that displays an action in the first cycle while the variable effect is being executed, and a hold display that displays an action in the second cycle. During execution of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific reach effect that is executed with the hold display hidden, and when the hold display is redisplayed in accordance with the end of the specific reach effect, It is possible to display the operation from a predetermined operation state, and it is possible to display the pending display that has been made to display the operation from the predetermined operation state up to the predetermined operation state by the time the fluctuating effect ends. By displaying the pending display in a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the special game will be executed; After the first cycle variation in the symbol variation display is started, the decrease display of the pending display is started, and the decrease display of the pending display is ended at a timing later than the end timing of the first cycle variation. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram explaining details of a low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing display information on an information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for a pending icon, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous performance determination process of a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead effect production scenario determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing of the performance control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an accessory notice pattern determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a blackout performance pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in performance pattern determination table. FIG. 3(d) is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing of the overall control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initialization process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where there is a recovery error in the sub display device after power is turned on. It is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 1 after the power is turned on. It is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a recovery abnormality in the movable presentation device 2 after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the sub display device after the power is restored. It is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 1 after the power is restored. It is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a recovery abnormality in the movable performance device 2 after the power is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power failure recovery is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a pending memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example when there is a recovery abnormality in the sub display device after power is turned on. It is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of the movable performance device 1. It is a diagram showing a specific example of the performance operation mode and required time of the movable performance device 1. It is a diagram showing a specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and the production operation mode of the movable performance device 2. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode of a sub-display apparatus, and a performance operation mode. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation. It is a diagram showing a specific example of the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display. It is a figure showing an example of display production for each production mode. It is a figure showing an example of display production for each production mode. It is a figure which shows the display performance example of the number of reservations. It is a timing chart when a variable production starts from a customer waiting state. 74 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 73. FIG. It is a timing chart when starting a winning prize during a variable performance. 77 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 76. FIG. It is a timing chart when performing a fluctuating effect continuously. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78; FIG. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started without being able to normally receive a command at the time of stop. 83 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 82; FIG. This is a timing chart when the normal variable performance is finished and the game enters a customer waiting state. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84; FIG. 85 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84; FIG. It is a timing chart when the end of the normal variation performance is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 87; It is a timing chart when the losing normal reach variation performance ends and the customer is in a waiting state. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89; FIG. 89 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89; It is a timing chart when the variable performance is executed after the loss SPSP reach performance is completed. 93 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the said icon disappearance production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the said icon disappearance production. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; FIG. 98 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97; 99 is a diagram showing a modification of FIGS. 97 and 99. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the said icon and a starting gate lamp. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in the case of recovering from the power outage which occurred during the fluctuating performance. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 102. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the start time command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect. 107 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 106. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 106. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 109; It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends. 112 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 111. FIG. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after a variable performance accompanied by a symbol promotion performance or a resurrection performance is completed. 114 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 113. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 113. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when the variation performance is performed after the loss SPSP reach variation performance ends. It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends. 118 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 117. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of normal background image data (mode A). It is a diagram showing a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends. 121 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 120. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 120. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a diagram showing a timing chart (1/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. It is a diagram showing a timing chart (2/2) when a vibration effect occurs in each scene of a variable effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. 131 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart in a specific variable production pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview occurs in a variable performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when a dialogue preview and a fixed performance occur in a variable performance. It is a figure which shows the timing chart when operation of an operation means is performed. 136 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 135. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after the power outage is restored is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after the power outage is restored is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. It is a timing chart when a variable performance starts during a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer. 140 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; 140 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; 140 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 139; It is a timing chart when recovering from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance. 144 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 143. FIG. It is a figure showing a specific example concerning command exchange of normal fluctuation production. It is a figure showing a specific example concerning command exchange of loss SPSP reach variation effect. It is a diagram showing a specific example related to command transmission and reception of jackpot SPSP reach variation performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of command exchange during a look-ahead zone performance. It is a timing chart when an icon is redisplayed after being hidden. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 149; FIG. 149 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 149; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the operating state of a pending icon before and after an icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the operating state of the said icon before and after icon change production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the operating state of an icon before and after icon change production.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a dispensing device 95 (to be described later) dispensing an audio signal based on the establishment of dispensing conditions. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls; A firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, audio) effects. It looks like this. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 1 or 2 ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the presentation button 17 to a protruding state located above the button and a button vibration motor for changing the production button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; A performance button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 17 is vibrated by the button drive device 17b, but for example, if another operating means (for example, effect lever) is provided in addition to the effect button 17, the effect lever also vibrates. It may also be made to vibrate.
Further, the cross key 19 may vibrate.
In addition to the operation means, a decorative member (eg, a character imitation) provided at a position that can be touched by the player may vibrate.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided to enable a player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a tray full error in which the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While the full state is detected, the payout of game balls by a payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5), and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 5) for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, so that the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting part, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 are exposed to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. .

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the firing member, and a firing member that slopes upward from the firing member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper are provided for stopping the game ball at a shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail. Then, the game ball sent out to the shooting position by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting conditions are met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are The balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded with prize value).

Below the stage part 42, there is a first starting hole 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can always win (entering). When a game ball played (ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are delivered to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, there is a mark indicating whether or not it is impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the hit determination described later). A variable starting section 46 is provided which can convert from a difficult closed state to an open state where it is possible or easy to win a game ball.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-back direction, and a second A second starting port 47 (starting winning area with a second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting port opening/closing member 48, and a second starting port that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. By moving the starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is changed to the closed state, and the second starting port is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning-permitting position).

Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 which is in the open state during the auxiliary game to be described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is met), A predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

In the right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, there is provided a normal game gate 44 (normal game starting area) through which game balls can pass at all times, and the game ball that has passed through the general game gate 44 is detected by a gate detection switch 44a. If it is detected, the prize ball will not be awarded, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a winning game will be granted (general figure determination information to be described later will be stored).

Below the general figure gate 44, there is a gate that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination) to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize or to be opened easily. A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for game balls by having an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). a first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a first grand prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first great winning opening opening/closing member 51; By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a that detects the game ball that has won (entered the ball) into the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning permissible position). A first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a jackpot game to be described later and the first big winning hole 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 When a game ball that has been flowing down or a game ball that has reached the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50 and is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of balls are detected. Game balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

Below the first variable prize winning section 49, a prize is possible or easy to win from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning part 55 (second variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). a second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a second grand prize opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second major winning opening opening/closing member 57. Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a that detects the game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning regulation position). By doing so, the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the open state. A second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57 flows down. When a game ball that has been played or a game ball that has reached the second large winning hole 56 enters the second large winning hole 56 and is detected by the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 ) game balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, the game ball launched into the left side game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42, and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, it is possible to win ( pass).

In addition, the game balls fired into the right side game area pass through the upstream flow path 91a, the center flow path 91b (general gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first downstream flow path 91e. Flowing down the second downstream channel 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right side gaming area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), The prize will be won in any of the second variable winning parts 55 (second big winning opening 56), or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes are won in the general winning hole 43 or the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the game balls that have been won in the out hole 39. An out ball flow path is provided which accepts and collects out balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol reservation. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 59 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and dynamic lighting is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44.

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special pattern determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination) This corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LED changes at a predetermined period (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol (moving lighting). do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on → 224 ms off). When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED is turned on in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times ( For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls by playing the game over four or ten times.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The auxiliary game judgment is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.). This corresponds to acquiring the information and determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. Note that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol to notify the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The term "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. Although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. Although up to four second reservations are stored, there may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of two LEDs, and indicates the number of normal drawing determination information (normal drawing holding) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the normal drawing gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of ordinary drawings on hold. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a static manner, and if it is determined to be a loss, a "-" will be displayed in a static manner, and a variable display will be displayed. It is a good idea to repeat turning off and "-" inside.

The round number display 66 is composed of six LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-hand hit display that encourages firing the game ball toward the right side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-saving game state. This is for display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. The LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. . Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it is difficult to recognize which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit in the setting change mode, and blinking in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed indicator 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

Inside the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, a sub-regular figure fluctuation display 85, and a sub-regular fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display 80 consisting of a figure pending display 86 and a sub-right hit display 87 is provided. This sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and dynamic lighting is performed. Note that the sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, like the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the second special symbol in a fluctuating manner. This is for displaying (notifying) whether the vehicle is inside or not, and is each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined period (1 second) (lights on for 0.5 seconds → goes off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol stops being displayed. do.

In addition, the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol may be notified by the sub-first fluctuation display 81 or the sub-second fluctuation display 82. In this case, it is preferable that the LED is turned on in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of pieces of first reservation information (the number of first reservations) to be described later, and the sub-second reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of pieces of second reservation information (the number of second reservations to be described later) This is for displaying the second pending number), and is composed of two LEDs each. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols starts, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal figure reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary figures pending memory (the number of ordinary figures pending), and is constituted by two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-right hitting display 87 is for prompting the user to fire the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and turns off during the other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a main display device 70 (first image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. A sub-display device 71 (second image display device) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the main display device 70 is provided in front of the main display device 70. A first movable performance device 73 for performing a performance is provided, and a second movable performance device 75 for performing a movement performance is provided on the left side of the performance space 40a.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, and a fluctuation display (pre-fluctuation operation, update fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed. There is a variable display, a variable display (update variation) of a special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed during the execution of a variable display of a special symbol, a jackpot performance performed during a jackpot game, and the like.

Further, the sub-display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. while a variable effect is being performed on the main display device 70. .

Specifically, it moves vertically (raises) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , descend) to create a movement effect. Note that it may be made to swing up and down at the standby position (lower position) or the production position (upper position), or it may be made to swing up and down at an intermediate position between the standby position and the production position. . Furthermore, it may be arranged to stay (stay) at the presentation position (upper position) for a predetermined period of time, or to perform a predetermined presentation operation (for example, rotation) at the presentation position (upper position). Furthermore, the moving direction of the sub display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17. Note that the sub-display device 71 does not necessarily need to be provided, and a movable performance device (movable accessory) that moves up and down may be provided at the position where the sub-display device 71 is provided.

The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) includes a variable display area for displaying the three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and a variable display area for displaying the three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). A mode display area and the like indicating the performance mode related to execution are formed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" or "555", and the losing mode is any other mode.

The manner in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination. This increases the player's expectations for the jackpot game (special game) to be executed.

The main display device 70 includes a first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to a first pending number (U1) in a normal gaming state, which will be described later. In the time-saving gaming state, a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2), and a display area 70D for displaying a variable effect that is in progress. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) shown in FIG. A second reservation number display area SB etc. for displaying is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area). , a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area), and a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first reservation icon indicating first reservation information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays a first reservation icon indicating the first reservation information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is performed. A first pending icon indicating first pending information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 70B3. A first pending icon indicating pending information is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 ( The number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. A second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the third display section 70D3, and a second pending icon in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed thirdly is displayed. A second pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and is arranged so that it does not rest on or float on the pedestal image. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol (production symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (erases) when the process ends. In other words, a disappearing effect (erasing effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (production symbol 70a), the second pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. ), the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the main display device 70 displays the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner, but either or both of the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71 display the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner. You may do so.

The first movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable during execution of the variable display of the performance symbol 70a executed on the main display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion effects. Furthermore, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (a first position, "A" in FIG. A first presentation position (second position, "B" in FIG. 59, etc. to be described later) located closer to the center (lower side), and a second presentation position located further toward the center (lower side) of the main display device 70 than the first presentation position. It is designed to move (ascend, descend) between two performance positions (third position, "C" in FIG. 59, etc. to be described later). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. . Note that the first movable member 73a may be vertically swung at a standby position (first position), a first presentation position (second position), or a second presentation position (third position). Moreover, instead of swinging the first movable member 73a, by swinging the second movable member 73b left and right while the first movable member 73a is in the standby position or each production position, the first movable member 73a It may also be made to appear as if it is oscillating. Furthermore, it may be possible to position (stay) at the first presentation position (second position) or the second presentation position (third position) for a predetermined period of time, or to stay at the first presentation position (second position) or the second presentation position (third position). A predetermined performance operation (for example, rotation) may be performed at the position (third position).

The second movable performance device 75 is capable of performing an action performance while the main display device 70 is performing a variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Further, the second movable performance device 75 is provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and is capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance.

Specifically, the second movable presentation device 75 has a standby position (first position, “D” in FIG. 61 etc. to be described later) located near the end (to the left) of the main display device 70, and a standby position (first position, “D” in FIG. 70 (to the left) and a production position (second position, "E" in FIG. 61, etc., which will be described later). The second movable performance device 75 is movable by a second movable performance device drive solenoid (not shown), and like the sub-display device 71 and the first movable performance device 73 described above, can perform performance operations at the performance position. Instead of moving from the standby position to the production position, and then moving (returning) from the production position to the standby position, it now only performs a single action. ing.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and a game ball supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage part 96 that stores balls and supplies them to a payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control board 120, and a production control board 130. A production control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc. are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, display devices (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting device). 10, a changeover switch 22 is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the panel illumination device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are provided with a main control unit 110m for clearing the contents of the main RAM 110c or at the stage of the advantageous level of the game. RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal to update the setting value (of the probability of being judged), and a setting key switch that inputs a signal to shift to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operation using a setting key. 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating a value or a numerical value of performance information (see FIG. 63). Note that static lighting is performed when setting values are displayed, and dynamic lighting is performed when performance information is displayed.

(Game board configuration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a back unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 includes a game board 500a made of transparent resin, on which a game area 5a is formed by the above-mentioned inner rail 35 and outer rail 36, and a window portion that makes the rear visible. .

And, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general prize opening 43, regular gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable Starting part 46 (second starting opening 47, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st grand prize opening opening/closing member 51, 1st grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b), and 2nd variable winning part 55 (2nd grand prize opening 56, 2nd grand prize opening detection switch 56a, 2nd grand prize opening opening/closing A member 57, a second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b), and a sub-information display 80 are provided, and a main information display 59 is provided outside the gaming area 5a.

Further, at the lower right part of the game board 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is affixed is provided so as to be rotatable in the left and right directions with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are provided at four corners of the board 500a, respectively.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated toward the left.

The fixture 503a includes an operation section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operation section to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft section provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. The engaging piece is provided with an engaging piece located on the side, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position) by operating the operating section. There is.

The back unit 501 has a unit base 501a that is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front side and a window portion that makes the rear view visible. A first movable presentation device 73 (a first movable member 73a, a second movable member 73b), a second movable presentation device 75, etc. are provided, and a main display device 70 is provided behind the window. Further, a production control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the main display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the production control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving parts 503b are provided, respectively, for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixture 503a described above.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are placed in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, a male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. Thereafter, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engagement piece of the fixture 503a enters into the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging pieces are put into the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A and the certification stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. Thereafter, when the engaging pieces are placed in the first state by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixed receiving part 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portions 503b. Thereafter, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of making the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, we have explained how to attach and detach the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3, but the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the panel unit 500.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the locking mechanism. By preventing the panel unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the panel unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when replacing only the panel unit 500, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control board 110. A board 120, a production control board 130 that controls production related to the game based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the production control board 130. It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is controlled by the production control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted only in one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports. It has a length of 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a second starting opening opening/closing switch. Solenoid 48b, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main Information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display) 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and production control A substrate 130 is connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

In the "gaming information", the starting hole winning signal, which is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A symbol confirmation signal that is output every time, a jackpot signal that is output during a jackpot game, an open signal that is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot), and a time-saving game state that will be described later. A security signal that is output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threaten) to the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs, and the like.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a gaming ROM area where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area where programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and access is prohibited. Also, an unused area of 16 bytes or more where "0" is stored, a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table where the start address of the timer interrupt processing described later is set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access-prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area where programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game are stored. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area where programs related to performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. Information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a gaming RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a gaming program and an information RWM area used as a work (working area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The gaming RWM area includes a gaming work area used by gaming programs as work, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a temporary area where data being processed by gaming programs is stored. A gaming stack area for saving data and a second unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data currently being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Stack areas for information are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program will be explained below. Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a gaming program, it basically refers to the gaming data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the gaming RWM area while using the gaming RWM area as work. ing. Additionally, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

When performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will go away.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a putout ball detection switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage section 96 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing to send a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, etc. (not shown).
The ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control section 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized, and fires the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is activated so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to fire game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m that collectively controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control unit 130m that controls image display and other operations based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. It is equipped with

The production control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b in which a production control program is stored, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the production control unit 130m and controls the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to display predetermined images, and outputs predetermined sounds and sounds to the audio output device 9. control.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 and sub display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 in which image data etc. are stored, and an audio output device based on reception of audio control commands from the overall control unit 141. The audio controller 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio controller 9 and the audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like are provided.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating and transmitting a display control command (display list) that instructs the effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 to the display control unit 140, and outputting it from the audio output device 9. It performs control processing and the like for generating and transmitting audio control commands to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for instructing performance sounds.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b (effect button drive motor, effect button vibration motor), the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the first movable effect device 73, and the second movable effect device. 75, panel illumination device 74, starting port lamp 76, sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84 , a sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal pattern pending display 86, and a sub-right hit display 87) are connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, the frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, production button light emitting LED 17c, starting port lamp 76, first movable production device 73, second movable production device 75, and board lighting device 74 are controlled.

The starting port lamp 76 is capable of emitting light in accordance with the icon final display mode and change scenario determined in the icon final display mode determination table (FIG. 28) and change scenario determination table (FIG. 29), which will be described later. For example, when "Scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, the light is emitted in "white" when winning a prize, the light is emitted in "white" before one change, and the light is emitted in "blue" after the change. That is, the starting gate lamp 76 can emit light in a color linked to an icon (for example, the icon, the pending icon), and together with the icon, can indicate the degree of jackpot expectation.

Further, the icon or the pending icon may be hidden during execution of a variable performance (for example, during execution of SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance) (see FIGS. 96 and 100). As a result, for example, if the icon is changing color, the player may forget what color it has changed to, but the starting port lamp 76 is The icon is not displayed and becomes difficult to see during the execution of reach performance or SPSP reach performance), and the icon emits light in a color corresponding to the icon that is hidden. Therefore, by visually observing the starting port lamp 76, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting the color of the hidden icon.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 has a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). I can do it.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and the production control board 120 and the production control unit 130m are provided so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control section 130m. Further, backup power may be supplied only to either one of the payout control board 120 and the production control unit 130m.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states regarding the special game determination (jackpot determination) include a "low probability state" and the "high probability state", and the states regarding the second starting port opening/closing member 48 of the second starting port 47 include "non-time saving". state" and "time saving state".

Therefore, in this embodiment, a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" is a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is a low-probability state and a time-saving state. , a "high-probability time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state)" is provided, which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state.

Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "normal gaming state." Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the game is not placed in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. A game state in which the jackpot probability is set as low as about 1/300 in a special game judgment (jackpot judgment) that is performed on the condition that a ball enters the ball.

On the other hand, a "high probability state" means that when the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability is set as high as approximately 1/60, making the game more advantageous to the player than in a low probability state. Refers to the condition. Note that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "non-time saving state" means that in the auxiliary game judgment that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the winning probability is set as low as 1/256, and the average of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is set as low as 1/256. It refers to a gaming state in which the time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the case of a win is set to 0.180 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time saving state", the probability of winning is set as high as 255/256, the average time of the fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the second starting port 47 in case of winning. This is a gaming state advantageous to the player in which the opening time is set to 6 seconds, thereby suppressing the consumption of gaming balls compared to the non-time saving state. Note that the transition from the non-time saving state to the time saving state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning are set to be more advantageous in the "time saving state" than in the "non-time saving state", but the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol Only one of the variable time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability may be set to be advantageous.

Although the winning probability in the non-time-saving state is 1/256, the winning probability may be set to 0/256 so that no winning is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the non-time saving state and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 47 (win).

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, details of the above-mentioned "low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" will be explained.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common to shift to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" in (a) and (d) of FIG. In this embodiment, in addition to the conventional methods (a) and (d), a transition route to a "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is provided.

Specifically, as shown in (b) of FIG. 6, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the game can shift to the "low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" without going through the jackpot game. is possible.

An example of "establishment of a predetermined condition" is that a specific losing symbol has stopped. For example, as shown in FIG. 8(b), which will be described later, special symbols for losses include "special symbol 00" and "special symbol 10", but other special symbols for losses are provided. (for example, "special symbol 11"), the "special symbol 11" is determined, and the "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed, which changes the normal gaming state to the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)". )”.

Thereby, it is possible to attract the attention of the player (whether or not the above-mentioned "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed) in the scene where the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby improving the interest in the game.
In addition, while playing in the normal gaming state, the game suddenly shifts to the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)," which can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase the interest in the game. can be improved.

Note that the rate at which specific losing symbols are determined may be any rate. For example, the probability may be the same as or similar to the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine. good.

Another example of "establishment of the predetermined condition" is that the number of variable displays of the special symbol executed from the starting point has reached N times. For example, if an area is provided in the main RAM 110c to count and store the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the "low-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)", and the number of times that the number of times the number is counted and stored in this area reaches N times, A transition is made from the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)."

"N times" can be set to any number of times depending on the probability of being determined to be a jackpot for each set value. For example, if the probability of being judged as a jackpot is "1/199", you can set around "500" times as N times, and if the probability of being judged as a jackpot is "1/319", then N Approximately "900" times can be set as the number of times.

An example of the "starting point" is a state where RWM clear has been performed (for example, a state where steps S19 and S24 in FIG. 13, which will be described later) have been performed.
Further, for example, when the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" ends, that is, the state (e) in FIG. 6 is exemplified.
Further, for example, although not shown in FIG. 6, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the end of the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state)" may be set as the "starting point."

In this embodiment, the upper limit number of times in the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is "50" or "100" when transitioning in (d) of FIG. 6.
On the other hand, in the case of transition in (b) of FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the number of times is "1000".
In other words, the upper limit for the number of times in the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is higher when moving through the establishment of a predetermined condition without going through a jackpot game than the upper limit when moving through a jackpot game. There are many relationships.

Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who play the game blindly. Further, for example, when N times is about 900 times, it is possible to provide relief measures to players who have not been able to get a jackpot for a long time, which leads to prevention of abandonment of the game, etc. Note that the number of N times may be easily understood by the player through magazines or the Internet.

In addition, when transitioning to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" when a predetermined condition is met, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is more Since the upper limit of the number of times in the "time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" increases, it is possible to encourage people to actively play the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)", which reduces the operation of the gaming machine. can be improved.

Note that "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the conditions listed in FIG. 6, all of the conditions, or any conditions other than those listed in FIG. Conditions may be provided.

Further, the number of revolutions up to "N times" may be actively notified. For example, the main display device 70 or the sub-display device 71 may provide a notification (display) such as "Another ○○ rotation and the vehicle will enter the △△ state!". On the other hand, it may be possible to limit the information to a suggestion without actively informing the user. For example, when the number of rotations is close to "N times", a special presentation mode (background, mode) may be used to suggest that the number of revolutions is approaching "N times".

In addition, when the "special symbol 11" in the example described above is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" in FIG. 6 is being controlled, the "time saving game state 2" is May be controlled. That is, the "special symbol 11" may be determined based on the ball entering the first starting port 45 or may be determined based on the ball entering the second starting port 47.

For example, if "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed when the remaining number of games possible in "time saving game state 1" is "2", "1000" is set as the number of possible games remaining in "time saving game state 2". After setting, in the next game, the remaining number of possible games in "time-saving game state 1" may be "1" and the number of possible games in "time-saving game state 2" may be "999". Then, in the next game, the remaining number of possible games in "Time-saving game state 1" is "0", the number of possible games in "Time-saving game state 2" is "998", and from there, "Time-saving game state 2" is set to "998". ” may be controlled.

As a result, even if the "special symbol 11" is determined in the "time-saving gaming state 1", the player will not suffer a loss (so-called drawing loss), and furthermore, the player can continue playing in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" is being controlled, the "time saving game state 2" may not be controlled. For example, if "special symbol 11" is stopped and displayed when the remaining number of games possible in "time saving game state 1" is "1", the number of possible games remaining in "time saving game state 2" is not set, In the next game, the time-saving game state ("time-saving game state 1") may be ended and the normal game state may be controlled.
This can prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage.

In addition, in the above example, it was explained that the "special symbol 11" in the above example is stopped and displayed while the "time saving game state 1" is being controlled, but the "time saving game state 2" is being controlled. Even if the "special symbol 11" in the above-mentioned example is stopped and displayed in a state where the special symbol 11 is stopped, it may be handled in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

Next, details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 7(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 7(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7(b), and determines the current setting value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 8(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 8(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a special jackpot symbol for executing the first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is a jackpot symbol for executing the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "11" is a special jackpot symbol for executing the first jackpot game. This is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game," a round game in which the first jackpot 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for two seconds is played up to six times. ing. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first grand prize opening 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the low-probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the first jackpot 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to four times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 8(a) to 8(b), and determines the type of special symbol based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving states for determining the variation pattern of special symbols in non-time saving states, and FIG. 9(b) is a special symbol variation pattern in non-time saving states. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination result. Random value, first reservation number (U1) or second reservation number (U2), random number for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, special symbol fluctuation pattern as a determination result, special symbol fluctuation time, special symbol A special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the fluctuation pattern is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The special pattern variation pattern is determined based on the number (U2) and the random value for special pattern variation pattern determination, and a special pattern variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern is sent to the production control board 130. There is.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are described for reference.

As for the performance contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, "normal fluctuation", "shortened fluctuation", "ultra shortened fluctuation", and "long fluctuation" are three performance symbols 70a that fluctuate apart at high speed. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. It means the variation mode (expected performance). For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the On the other hand, the stationary display of the effect pattern 70a refers to a completely stopped state. Note that this also refers to a mode in which the stop display of the special symbol TZ is also completely stopped.

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. It is a reach (first expected performance).

Furthermore, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach performances (second expected performances) that have a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach, and are executed after normal reach. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-reach performance.

Furthermore, "SPSP Reach" is a special reach performance (third expected performance) that has a higher expectation of jackpot than Super Reach, and is executed after Super Reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the main display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". ing.

Moreover, the "full rotation reach" is a reach performance (fourth expected performance) that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach. For example, the main display device 70 blacks out from the normal reach performance, and then changes at a low speed with all three performance symbols 70a being the same and aligned, and almost the entire display area of the main display device 70 is used to display "SPSP reach". ”, a special reach effect will be performed.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a preliminary judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 10(b) is a preliminary judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 10, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 10, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 11(a) shows a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball) in the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored. FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage section of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 11(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area. FIG. This is the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 11(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information pending storage in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored. area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and special figure determination information during execution of variable display is stored. The first special symbol determination information storage area and the second special symbol determination information storage area are each divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

In addition, the first storage part, the second storage part, the third storage part, and the fourth storage part of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display part 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4, respectively. In addition, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, and the second storage icon display area 70D. They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of pieces of special figure judgment information (first reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first special figure judgment information storage area becomes the first reservation number (U1), and these special figure judgments A number of first pending icons corresponding to the information are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of pieces of special figure determination information (second reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the second special figure determination information becomes the second reservation number (U2), and the number of pieces of special figure determination information (second reservation information) corresponding to these determination information The number of pending icons will be displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage section is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, and a random number storage area for special symbol determination for storing a random number value for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the special figure judgment information is acquired, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area is the one in which the special figure judgment information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smaller number. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest numbered one in which no special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, stores the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44 is stored, and a The ordinary figure determination information storage area is divided into the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information that is being displayed is stored, and the ordinary figure determination information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, respectively. Note that the number of pieces of ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the ordinary figure determination information reservation storage area becomes the ordinary figure reservation number.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing random number values for hit determination, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, it is acquired in the lowest numbered storage section in which normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the normal pattern judgment information storage area. The normal figure determination information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern judgment information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted. and will be referenced to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, processing for preparing to start controlling the game, processing for initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc. are performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and saves it in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the gaming RWM area is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c is backed up (power restoration) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is restored and the process moves to step S17; if the backup flag is not saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time or that the power is restored irregularly and the process moves to step S17. The process moves to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (gaming program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to change (update) the set value (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in jackpot determination), which is a stage of the advantage of the game. Note that details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S25.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that it is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that it is not the appropriate range, the process moves to step S22.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (gaming program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the gaming information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" means to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the main display device 70 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. The frame illumination device 10 and panel illumination device 74 are illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, and the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting a possible error sound (``Unrecoverable error'' + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the set value area). Note that details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S31. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial production pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, The frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are fully lit up in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71, a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared is displayed on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71. You can do it like this.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (gaming program) in step S27. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 113. Note that details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or displaying a frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 74 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white), or the audio output device 9 to indicate that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command to be described later) to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the main display device 70.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S31. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S32, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S33, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, for setting change operations, RWM clear operations, and setting confirmation operations, multiple conditions (operations) are set, so it is not possible to easily change settings, clear RWM, or confirm settings. , it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including when the backup flag has not been saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the problem of inconveniencing game parlors and players, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

In addition, while changing settings (in setting change mode) or checking settings (in setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, the status confirmation display 68, main display device 70, sub display device 71, frame It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 74 for the panel, and it can be recognized that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back side). It is possible. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Note that the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent with information indicating the current gaming state, but after sending the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the gaming RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting change in progress signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. Note that the setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then stops outputting.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game store clerk to check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the production control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed.

“Setting change notification” means displaying a setting change screen on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 that indicates that the setting value is being changed, or setting the frame lighting device 10 or panel lighting device 74. This is a notification in which all lights are lit in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the change. Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed. This makes it possible for game store staff to understand that settings are being changed by checking the main display device 70, sub-display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and audio output device 9. Become.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a setting value from the setting value area, and in step S19-5, determines whether the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range (1 to 4). If it is determined that it is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S19-7, and if it is determined that it is not within the appropriate range, the acquisition setting value is updated to "1" in step S19-6.

The main CPU 110a displays the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-7. Specifically, the acquired setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the information display 113 to understand the setting value before the change.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting value update operation, the process moves to step S19-9, and if there is no setting value update operation, the process moves to step S19-12.

The main CPU 110a updates the acquired setting value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs a setting value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, when the acquisition setting value is "5", a process of correcting the acquisition setting value to "1" is performed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-11. Specifically, the updated acquisition setting values (1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 113 to understand the setting value before it is finalized.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S19-12. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, Processing is performed to initially operate the two major prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources during the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting value confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, it is assumed that the setting value has been confirmed (setting change mode is ended) and the process moves to step S19-14; if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process moves to step S19-8, assuming that there is a possibility that this will occur.

The main CPU 110a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area in step S19-14, finishes displaying the setting value on the information display 113 in step S19-15, and in step S19-16, The display on the status confirmation display 68 ends.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S19-18. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed. Note that if another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the currently output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the setting change mode is ended by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

In this way, even if the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the setting value, which prevents the gaming machine from unexpectedly It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game machine from causing trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the operation.

In addition, while changing the settings (during setting change mode), the gaming store clerk should check the status confirmation display 68, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the lighting device 74, and it is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back side). In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the setting value confirmation operation is performed when the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, but it may also be performed when the RWM clear switch 111a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, or when the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The touch sensor 15a may change from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be set from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be set from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be assumed that it is in the ON state.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the production control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for notifying RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the main display device 70 to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or notifying the voice output device 9 of "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This is a notification that outputs audio over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, Processing is performed to initially operate the two major prize opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed and the process moves to step S24-4; if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24-2. Transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode is ended by the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

Note that the RWM clear preparation designation command is sent at the start of RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is sent after the RWM clear processing is finished, but instead of the power-on designation command, the RWM clear designation command is sent. You may also do so. In this case, the RWM clear designation command may be sent at the end of the RWM clearing process, or may be sent after the RWM clearing process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S27-1. Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting confirmation is in progress. Note that the settings confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output while the settings are being confirmed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the settings confirmation is completed, and then stops outputting.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the settings are being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. Thereby, the game store clerk can check the status confirmation display 68 to know that the settings are being confirmed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130 in step S27-3. Thereby, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 will be performed.

"Settings confirmation notification" means displaying a settings confirmation screen on the main display device 70 or sub display device 71 indicating that the settings are being confirmed, or checking the settings of the frame lighting device 10 or panel lighting device 74. This is a notification in which all lights are turned on in a predetermined color (for example, white) over a period of time. Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed. This makes it possible for game store staff to understand that settings are being confirmed by checking the main display device 70, sub-display device 71, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and audio output device 9. Become.

The main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113 in step S27-4. Specifically, with reference to the setting value in the setting value (playing) area, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating the setting value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the game store clerk to check the information display 113 to understand the current set value.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, Processing is performed to initially operate the two major winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the setting confirmation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

In step S27-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends displaying the setting value on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends displaying the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and performs a confirmation end operation in step S27-9. When the setting confirmation mode ends, processing is performed to stop the initial operations of the various drive sources, and the current setting confirmation process is ended.

Note that the settings confirmation command is sent at the start of the settings confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the settings confirmation process ends, but instead of the settings confirmation specification command, the settings confirmation start specification command is sent. However, instead of the power recovery designation command, a setting confirmation end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and the convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the time when the game progress is controlled (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) and the game becomes possible (in the pre-start state), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a is required. Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening The presence or absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, magnetic detection sensor 57a, and radio wave detection sensor 58a is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control starts, even if a game ball enters any winning opening (including the starting opening), the winning will be invalidated and the game ball will not be paid out. It looks like this. In addition, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning is invalidated and the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 change. No display is made and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated, the normal pattern is not displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display 62, and the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a player will play a game before game progress control is started, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing and reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in the pre-start state before game progress control is started, no error notification is made even if a situation in which various errors occur. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a fraudulent act will occur before the game progress control is started, unnecessary processing can be avoided, and the processing load can be reduced.

Note that the setting changing signal, RWM clear signal, setting checking signal, and irreversible error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from a common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (gaming program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing (game program) in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process (gaming program) in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing (gaming program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It determines whether there is input to various switches such as , etc., and performs processing to set predetermined data if there is input. Note that details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing (gaming program). Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. It performs processing such as opening/closing (the first grand prize opening 50 and the second grand prize opening 56), setting the gaming state, etc. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs general figure general electric power control processing (gaming program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (gaming program) in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big prize opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (gaming program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which abnormal magnetism is detected over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the game progress is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (gaming program) in step S700. Specifically, external output data (gaming information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, starting port opening/closing data output to the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, and second grand prize. Big winning opening/closing data output to the mouth opening/closing solenoid 57b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the first special symbol pending display 63 and second special symbol pending display 64, and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (gaming program) in step S750. Specifically, port output processing that outputs signals such as the external information data created in step S700, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol Display output processing that outputs signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, sending a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and awarding as described below. Refers to the ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. . Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole starting hole) during normal gaming state, and the number of outs during normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is initially updated when the total number of outs during the normal gaming state reaches 300, and thereafter it is updated every time the total number of outs during the normal gaming state reaches 60,000. , the base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value in the current gaming section, a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, and a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section. A third area for storing the normal base value and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the three previous gaming sections are provided, and the normal base value for the four gaming sections including the current one is provided. will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data. Note that details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before the start of game progress control, so the payout Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, whether a detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the ball has been played, and processing for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do. When this process is finished, the current input control process is finished.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first pending number (U1) is updated. A corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a non-time saving state (normal gaming state). If it is in a non-time-saving state, the process moves to step S230-9 as a pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is not in a non-time-saving state. In this case, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. A process of generating a first prefetch designation command for notifying the production control board 130 of the scheduled fluctuation pattern is performed.

This "first pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol, etc. The type can also be specified.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-read designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the jackpot game is started over one or more variable displays even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-read designation command starts. A look-ahead notice (a look-ahead continuous performance, an icon change performance) that makes people expect that it will be executed will be executed.

Note that the second starting hole detection switch input process is also performed in the same way as the first starting hole detection switch input process, so the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, and the first pending number (U1 ), the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area, the non-time-saving state, the first pre-reading process, and the first pre-reading designation command are stored in the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the two prize ball counter, and the second pending number (U2). ), 2nd special figure determination information reservation storage area, time saving state, 2nd prefetching process, and 2nd prefetching designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reservation number (U1) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reservation number. Furthermore, the first reservation information may not be stored by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first reservation number. Furthermore, the second reserved storage may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage part of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the start command (special figure judgment information) is started. Performs processing for transmitting (symbol memory designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "1", etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol will be stopped as the variation time elapses, a stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) will be set, and a stop command (design confirmation command) will be sent to the production control board. 130, special symbol variation processing (step S320) for performing processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game is started based on the processing for starting the round game as the opening time of the jackpot game passes and transmitting the round designation command to the performance control board 130, and the end of the final round game. The jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to set the ending time and send the ending designation command to the production control board 130, to change the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. .

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, specifies the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second pending number (U2) after the subtraction. The command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second reservation number is changed to the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first number of reservations may be subtracted). It may be preferentially subtracted from the second reservation number.

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 7, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the special symbol to be stopped is determined. Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. It's okay.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether the switching time counter is the display switching value "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched and the process moves to step 850-2; if the display switching value is not "0", the process moves to step 850-2. , the process moves to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not to be changed. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmed flag for determining whether lighting of the information display 113 has been confirmed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113 and the process moves to step S850-4; if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the information display is performed. The process moves to step S850-3 to confirm that the device 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) that make up the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained. Get the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", get the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of outs during the normal period indicated by the number of outs during the normal period counter, and the obtained normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

In step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be done. Note that the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above in step S850-7, and determines in step S850-8 whether the display switching time counter is larger than an upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process moves to step S850-15; if it is larger than the upper limit, the display on the information display 113 is Assuming that the time for switching the performance information to be displayed has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-described lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process moves to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above in step S850-12, and determines in step S85-13 whether the data selection counter is larger than an upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process moves to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the game ball counting process described above, and in step S850-16, in the game ball counting process described above, the main CPU 110a restores the register for information in the main RAM 110c. The gaming stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is completed.

In this way, all segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (the lighting is confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning or which segment is malfunctioning.

In addition, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare performance information (normal base value) in two gaming sections, and it becomes possible to check the actual performance of the gaming machine and to understand the possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

(Display information on the information display in each game section)
Next, the display information on the information display 113 in each game section will be explained using FIG. 23. In the display information table of FIG. 23, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the current gaming section, and "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the previous gaming section. ``b1.'', ``b2.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section two times before, and ``b3.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section three times ago.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of outs during normal play is "0". “00” indicates that the number of outs during normal play is “1” or more and the normal base value is “1” to “99”, and “01” to “99” indicate that the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that the number is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and will be displayed in two digits.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment does not change its display form (it is lit up) regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play, but the identification information displayed on the identification segment does not change regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal play, etc. (the presence or absence of a calculated normal base value and the credibility of the calculated normal base value).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed blinking. In addition, in the game sections after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during the normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is displayed by lighting.

Here, to give an example of the display on the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of outs during normal play is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". If the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical value segment. ' will be displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is ``99'' or less, performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display, ``00'' to ``99'', is displayed in the numeric segment, while the normal base value If the value is ``100'' or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed as ``99.'' in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

Also, if the normal base value is less than 10, "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment, and it is displayed as two digits (for example, "01", etc.). It becomes possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

Also, when displaying the normal base value of the current gaming section, if the number of outs during normal play in the current gaming section is 0 to 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." displayed on the identification segment is displayed blinking, it becomes easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, "--", which is not a numerical value, will be displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value will not be calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand what is not being done.

Note that the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, game ball counting The processing may be executed within an input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is a game program.

In addition, the out ball detection switch 39a detects the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting out balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the out hole, the out ball detection switch 39a may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch It is preferable to add one to the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the production control section 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process is performed to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state where special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner or special games (jackpot games) are not being executed, and the customer waiting time is elapsed. Based on this, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting performance to stimulate the player's desire to play.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, it suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the jackpot preview performance set in the sub-RAM 130c in the jackpot preview performance determination process that will be described later (makes expectations that the jackpot game will be executed) ) Perform processing to execute the jackpot preview performance.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emitting effect execution process. Specifically, it suggests the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed based on the execution information of the winning light emitting effect set in the sub-RAM 130c in the winning light emitting effect determination process to be described later. Execute processing to execute a lighting effect when winning a prize (to make people look forward to it).

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E700. Specifically, the update conditions (game state) of the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are defined. change, winning the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is satisfied, the effect mode is set to one of multiple effect modes. Perform processing to update.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state), production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state), and production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state). A performance mode F is provided which is set in the gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. is always in production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the overall control section 141 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for executing a power-on notification or a power restoration notification, and the first movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, first 2 movable member 73b), the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub-display device 71 in a predetermined manner, and initial light emission to cause the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined manner. You will be killed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, fraudulent winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification commands, operation error specification commands, plate full error specification commands, dispensing error specification commands, etc. The priority order of each error is as follows: payout abnormality = plate full error < operation error < door opening error < radio wave error = magnetic error < abnormal winning error = unauthorized winning error < unrecoverable error.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) , dish full error notification, dispensing abnormality notification, etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. Note that various error notifications are performed using at least one of the output of an error sound, the error light emission of a lamp, and the display of an error image. Specifically, in the tray full error notification, the lamp does not emit an error light, and in the dispensing abnormality notification, there is no error sound output, but in other error notifications, the error sound is output, the lamp error light is emitted, and the error sound is output. All image display is now performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of setting in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c a production instruction command for updating the number of reserved special symbols stored in the sub RAM 130c and increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons displayed on the main display device 70. I do. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed on the main display device 70 is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetch designation command, the received prefetch designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern) is set in the prefetch storage area described later in the sub-RAM 130c, and then the process moves to step E315; if it is not a prefetch designation command, The process moves to step E318.

The "pre-read storage area" is a first pre-read storage section for sequentially storing pre-read information (special figure schedule fluctuation patterns, etc.) based on the first pre-read designation command, and sequentially stores reservation information based on the second pre-read designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing data, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) being executed. The two look-ahead storage units are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area described above, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetching storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second prefetching designation command is received, 2 Prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage section (0th storage section) corresponds to the above-mentioned special symbol determination information execution storage area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage section of the first prefetch storage section When the pre-read information that moves (shifts) from is stored and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-read information that moves (shifts) from the first storage section of the second pre-read section is stored. Ru.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing in step E315. Specifically, by displaying the pending icon displayed on the main display device 70 and the icon in a special display mode (special icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon), the expectation level ( Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that suggests the possibility of the icon change effect, and the mode of effect of the icon change effect to be executed. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316-A, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect determination process. Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode, thereby creating a special game. Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the prize winning light emitting effect will be executed, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed.

In step E316-B, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning vibration effect determination process. Specifically, by driving the button drive device 17b for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1 second) when a game ball enters the starting slot and wins a prize, a winning vibration effect that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed is executed. Perform processing to determine whether or not.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, expectations are made that a jackpot game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed). It determines whether or not to execute a prefetch continuous performance and the type of prefetch continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute the prefetch continuous performance. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed. Note that details of the prefetch continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display device 70 as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, a variable production pattern that is a production mode of a variation production executed by the production device including the main display device 70 is determined, and the variation production pattern is indicated. Processing is performed to set the production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step E322. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, whether or not to execute a jackpot preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Also, a performance mode (pattern) of the jackpot preview performance to be executed is determined, and execution information of the jackpot preview performance is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. The details of the jackpot preview performance determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing is performed to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or to change the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon.

The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for starting the prefetch continuous performance determined in the prefetch continuous performance determination process of step E317 or for changing the performance mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command (stop command). If it is a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (stop command), the process moves to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include opening designation commands, round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of the jackpot game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of a round designation command. In this step, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining the round performance of the round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, determining the ending performance of the jackpot game. Then, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The "executable period of icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that when the first look-ahead designation command based on winning the first start opening 45 is received, it is in a non-time saving state (normal game state). For example, if the second pre-read designation command based on winning to the second start opening 47 is received, it is in a time saving state (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is a change scenario in the pre-pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received pre-read designation command), that is, whether a change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. Determine whether If there is a change scenario, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E315-7; if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and in step E315-5. In , the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, with reference to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the final display modes. In this process, when the icon final display mode is determined, the light emitting color (final light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 76 is determined in accordance with the determined icon final display mode. For example, if the icon final display mode is "red", the emission color (final emission color) of the starting port lamp 76 is also "red".

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) for performing an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for which an icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon until the icon finally disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 29, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, One change scenario is determined from among a plurality of change scenarios. In this process, once the change scenario is determined, the manner in which the light emitted from the starting port lamp 76 changes in color is determined in accordance with the determined change scenario. For example, when "Scenario 01" in FIG. 29 is determined, the light is emitted in "white" when winning a prize, the light is emitted in "white" before one change, and the light is emitted in "blue" after the change.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon initially displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), from the determined change scenario, and displays this winning icon. The icon display command (and the starting port lamp light emission command) is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is completed.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), The starting port lamp 76 emits light in a display mode (for example, blue, red) corresponding to the lamp light-up command, or a predetermined sound effect (the first prize sound when displayed as a normal icon, or a special icon) In this case, the second winning sound) will be output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), The starting port lamp 76 emits light in a display mode (for example, white) corresponding to the lamp light-up command, and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not to be performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is to be performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold includes something that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than in the case where the icon change effect is included. In addition, the icon changes when the advance hold does not include a specific reach effect (SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) than when it includes one that performs a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, etc.). The effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate), or vice versa.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 28 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The icon final display mode determination table includes the type of special symbol corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the final icon selected. The display formats are associated with each other, and for reference, the performance contents of the scheduled fluctuation pattern corresponding to the prefetch designation command are described.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (a white icon whose shape is set for each production mode) that does not suggest the expectation of a jackpot, and a special icon (common to multiple production modes) that suggests the expectation of a jackpot. Shape blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) are set. Furthermore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot regarding special icons increases in the order of blue icon < red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed) < rainbow icon (jackpot confirmed).

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 29 is a change scenario determination table for determining an icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

Note that the change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is a normal game state (first special symbol icon) or a specific game state (second special symbol icon). state (second special symbol icon), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80 or 0:100, etc.). It's okay. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the fluctuation will be higher in the specific gaming state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal gaming state (first special symbol icon). It's okay.

(Change pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the pending/relevant icon in the icon display mode update process of step E323 described above.

FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a pending icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern of a pending icon, and FIGS. 30(b) to 30(c) are diagrams showing change patterns of the icon. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the icon.

The change pattern determination table corresponds to the mode of hold/the icon change in the current change effect, the change effect pattern, the selection rate of each hold/the icon change pattern, and the type of the hold/the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing and change stage of each hold/hold/change effect of the icon in the icon change pattern are described.

The hold/relevant icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect, and a hold/relevant icon change pattern that is triggered by character A displayed on the main display device 70. A character A action change pattern in which a trigger effect is performed and the display mode of the icon is held/changed, and a trigger effect is performed which is a trigger for the character B displayed on the main display device 70 to change the hold/relevant icon. Hold/Character B effect change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon and character C displayed on the main display device 70 performs a trigger effect that triggers the icon to change, and the display mode of the icon changes. A character C effect change pattern and a character D effect change pattern in which a trigger effect is performed that causes the icon to change due to the character D displayed on the main display device 70 and the display mode of the icon changes. .

The change timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable performance, and is classified into the pre-reach production period that is executed at the beginning of the variation production, at the start of variation, during normal variation, and the pre-reach production period. There are during normal reach and after normal reach, which are classified as reach performance periods that may be executed after.

As for the change mode of the pending icon, "1UP" is a display mode in which the jackpot expectation level changes to one level higher, such as a white icon changing to a blue icon or a blue icon changing to a red icon. It means that. "2UP" means that the jackpot expectation level changes to a display mode that is two levels higher, such as a white icon changing to a red icon or a blue icon changing to a rainbow icon. Moreover, "SP suggestion" means that a suggestion performance that suggests that an SP reach performance will be performed is performed by the character who performed the trigger performance.

The first feature related to the production using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that in the normal reach variation production, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the SP reach variation production, an icon change production that targets this normal reach variation production is executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when the icon change effect that targets this normal reach variation effect is executed than when it is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the pre-read effect (in this case, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when a jackpot game is executed, the proportion of normal reach variation effects that are executed without icon change effects (pending notice) is Also, the percentage of normal reach variation effects being executed after the icon change effect is higher, and the percentage of normal reach variation effects being executed after the icon change effect is higher than the proportion of normal reach variation effects being executed after the icon change effect is executed. The rate at which SP reach effects are executed is higher than the rate at which SP reach variation effects are executed after icon change effects are executed, and the proportion at which SP SP reach effects are executed after icon change effects is higher than the rate at which SP reach variation effects are executed after icon change effects are executed. is higher, and if a jackpot game is not executed, the rate at which the SP reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the normal reach variation effect is executed after the icon change effect is executed. is lower, and the percentage of SP SP reach effects executed after icon change effects is lower than the percentage of SP reach effects executed after icon change effects are executed. It will be done. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the pre-read effect (in this case, the icon change effect) will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when a normal reach variation effect, SP reach variation effect, or SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is longer than the reach effect period. In this case, the icon change effect is executed (more likely to occur) at a higher rate. By doing this, the reach effect and the icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect). However, the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

A fourth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when a normal reach variation effect, SP reach variation effect, or SPSP reach effect is executed, the pre-reach effect period is shorter than the reach effect period. In this case, the pending icon change effect is executed (more likely to occur) at a higher rate. By doing this, the reach effect and the hold icon change effect are less likely to interfere with each other, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when SP reach variation effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the icon change effect is executed at a higher rate during normal reach than after normal reach (during SP reach effect, during SPSP reach effect). However, the icon change effect may not be executed after the normal reach.

The fifth feature related to the presentation using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that the type of suggestion presentation (character as a trigger for changing the pending icon) that suggests that the pending icon changes is different from that of the pending icon. There are points that differ depending on the content of the change (character A in the case of white → blue, character B in the case of blue → red). By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion presentation will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. The points are different depending on the content of the change (character A for white → blue, character B for blue → red, character C for white → red, character D for blue → rainbow). It will be done. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in which suggestion presentation will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 is that when the icon changes to a red icon, an SP reach effect with higher jackpot expectations than the normal reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (SP suggestion) that suggests , but if the icon is a red icon, it is possible to execute an SP reach effect regardless of whether the suggestion effect (SP suggestion) is executed or not. There are several points. By doing this, it is possible to arouse the player's joy at the execution of the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-read continuous performance determination processing by the performance control unit)
The prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E317-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prefetch continuous effect determination process is ended.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the process moves to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the prefetch zone effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Pre-reading zone production" means performing zone production (display of pre-reading zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) over one or more variable productions. This is a performance that continuously suggests the level of expectation for a special game to be executed using a background image, text information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of pre-read continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes the fact that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone effect in advance pending, that there is no jackpot game in progress, and so on. In addition, it may be possible to make the look-ahead zone effect executable in the normal gaming state and disable the look-ahead zone effect outside the normal gaming state, or make the look-ahead zone effect impossible in the normal game state, and disable the look-ahead zone effect outside the normal game state. It may also be possible to perform zone effects.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 31) for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario. Note that details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate of each preview scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read zone performance scenario is determined from among the plurality of pre-read zone performance scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch zone effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch zone effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current time is a period in which the prefetch effect performance can be executed. If it is the executable period of the prefetch effect production, the process moves to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch effect production, the prefetch effect production based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead effect production" refers to effect production (display of light emitting effect images and effect sound around the three production symbols 70a that start the variation display) over one or more variation productions (including variation production that results in a jackpot). This is a performance that intermittently suggests the expectation level for a special game to be executed by performing the output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) using a light emitting effect image and sound information (a light emitting display display at the start of fluctuation). , it is a type of pre-reading continuous production.

The "period during which the pre-reading effect performance can be executed" includes the fact that there is no pre-reading effect performance to be executed in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the like. In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead effect performance executable in the normal gaming state and disable it in other than the normal game state, or to make the look-ahead effect performance impossible in the normal game state, and to disable the look-ahead effect performance in other than the normal game state. It may also be possible to perform effect production.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch effect production scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a prefetch effect production scenario. Note that the details of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch effect production scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, with reference to the lookahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the lookahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the lookahead designation command, and the selection rate of each performance scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read effect production scenario is determined from among the plurality of pre-read effect production scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch effect production as a production scenario in which the prefetch effect production is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch effect production scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch effect production scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous production execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch effect production is performed. When this process is finished, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is finished.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch continuous effect determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for zone performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of look-ahead zone performance in the relevant fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effects (display of prefetched zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed, and "heat zone" means that normal zone effects are executed. A heat zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance is executed.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed, and scenarios in which the zone performance is not executed during the preliminary fluctuation and the zone performance is performed during the fluctuation ( For example, scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of a special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the performance mode of the performance in the zone will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance may be made to progress (develop) more easily in the advance variation than in the above variation.

(Look-ahead effect production scenario determination table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a prefetch effect production scenario determination table for determining a prefetch effect production scenario in the prefetch continuous production determination process of step E317 described above.

The look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table includes the number of pending special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead effect performance, and the selected look-ahead effect. The production scenarios of the effect production are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance variation in each production scenario and the production mode of the look-ahead effect production in the variation are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The "blue effect" means that a blue light emitting effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a and a blue effect sound effect is output, and the "red effect" means that a blue light emitting effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a. A red light emitting effect image, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect image, is displayed and a red effect sound effect is output.

The prefetch effect production scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the prefetch effect production is not executed, and scenarios in which the effect production is not executed during the pre-variation and the effect production is executed during the fluctuation (for example, Scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which effect production is performed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead effect production scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a performance scenario is set that progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the production mode of the effect production will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead effect performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead effect performance progresses (changes) more easily with this variation than with advance variation. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect presentation may be made to progress (develop) more easily with the advance change than with the above-mentioned change.

In addition, as a production mode of the look-ahead effect production, an effect image of a type that confirms the execution of a jackpot game (for example, a rainbow effect) may be provided, or an effect image of a type that has a lower jackpot expectation than a blue effect image (for example, , white effect) may be provided.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect performance can be executed, but in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state) in which the right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed. You may also do so.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed, while in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state) in which a right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Good too.

In addition, in the look-ahead effect performance, instead of displaying the light emitting effect image around the three performance symbols 70a, the light emitting effect image is displayed only around the performance symbol 70a in one of the left middle right rows (for example, the center row). may be displayed.

Further, when displaying the light emitting effect image in the look-ahead effect production, the frame illumination device 10 is configured to emit light in an effect light emitting mode (for example, in the same color as the display color of the light emitting effect image displayed around the production pattern 70a). You may also do so.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E322-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern to be executed in the current variable effect, and in step E322-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview pattern of the line preview effect to be executed during the pre-reach effect period (normally during variation). A dialogue preview pattern is determined using a dialogue preview effect determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining the dialogue preview effect. Specifically, with reference to the dialogue announcement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 35, the dialogue announcement pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern.

“Speech preview performance” indicates the expected jackpot on the main display device 70 in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) that occurs during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, regarding the dialogue preview performance, it is a button operation performance in which a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is executed during the valid period, and even if the performance button 17 is not operated, it will be executed when the valid period passes. It is now possible to do so.

In step E322-3, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for a dialogue preview performance according to the dialogue preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. The execution information of this line preview performance is referred to in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the line preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing. Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-4, the sub CPU 130a creates an accessory preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) for determining the preview pattern of the accessory preview performance to be executed during the pre-reach performance period (usually during fluctuation). This is used to determine the accessory notice pattern. Specifically, with reference to the accessory notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

"Accessory notice performance" means that the first movable member 73a performs a predetermined operation (a small downward movement or a large downward movement described later) at a specified timing during the pre-reach performance period (normal fluctuation) to increase the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview.

In step E322-5, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information for the accessory preview performance according to the accessory preview pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. This execution information of the accessory preview performance is referred to in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the accessory preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing. Note that details of the accessory preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that allows execution of a blackout effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable performance pattern in which a reach performance greater than the normal reach is executed. If the variable effect pattern is such that a blackout effect can be executed, the process moves to step E322-7, and if the variable effect pattern is not a variable effect pattern that allows a blackout effect to be executed, it is determined that the blackout effect is not executed and the process is moved to step E322-7. -9.

In step E322-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the blackout effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) for determining the effect pattern of the blackout effect to be executed during the reach effect period (normal reach). Determine the out production pattern. Specifically, with reference to the blackout effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(b), the blackout effect is created based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each blackout effect pattern. Decide on a pattern.

"Blackout effect" means that the main display device 70 is darkened during the reach effect period (normal reach), and in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period (for example, 2 seconds) that occurs during the blackout period. , is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a development performance indicating whether or not it will develop into an SP reach performance is executed. The blackout effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period is executed, and even if the effect button 17 is not operated, it will be executed when the valid period passes. It is now possible to do so.

In step E322-8, the sub CPU 130a sets blackout effect execution information according to the blackout effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. This blackout effect execution information is referred to in the jackpot preview effect execution process of step E500, and the blackout effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The details of the blackout effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that allows cut-in effects to be executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable performance pattern in which SP reach performance is executed. If it is a variable effect pattern that allows a cut-in effect to be executed, the process moves to step E322-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that allows a cut-in effect to be executed, it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed and the process moves to step E322-10. Processing moves to -12.

In step E322-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the cut-in performance pattern using the cut-in performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(c)) for determining the performance pattern of the cut-in performance to be executed during the SP reach performance. Determine. Specifically, with reference to the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

"Cut-in performance" is a development suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it will develop into SPSP reach performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (for example, 1 second) that occurs during SP reach performance. This is a type of jackpot preview performance that is performed. Note that the cut-in effect is a button operation effect in which a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period is executed, and even if the effect button 17 is not operated, the cut-in effect is executed when the valid period passes. It is supposed to be done.

In step E322-11, the sub CPU 130a sets cut-in effect execution information according to the cut-in effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c. This cut-in performance execution information is referred to in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the cut-in performance is executed. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

Furthermore, although it was stated that the "dialogue preview production", "blackout production", and "cut-in production" will be executed after the validity period has elapsed even if the production button 17 is not operated, there is a special provision to prevent them from being executed. No problem.

In step E322-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a fixed performance. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a variable performance pattern in which SPSP reach performance is executed. If the variable performance pattern is such that the final performance can be executed, the process moves to step E322-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows the final performance to be executed, the process proceeds to step E322-15 as not to execute the final performance. Transfer processing.

In step E322-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the final performance pattern using the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(d)) for determining the performance pattern of the final performance executed during the SPSP reach performance. . Specifically, with reference to the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(d), the fixed effect pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each fixed effect pattern. do.

“Decision performance” is a result that suggests (notifies) whether or not a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (for example, 4 seconds) that occurs during the SPSP reach performance. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a suggestive performance is executed. In addition, regarding the decisive performance, it is a button operation performance in which a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 is executed during the valid period, and even if the performance button 17 is not operated, it will be executed when the valid period passes. It has become so. In addition, the deciding performance is not performed only during the SPSP reach performance, but may be performed during the normal reach performance, SP reach performance, etc. In that case, the order of normal reach performance < SP reach performance < SPSP reach performance, etc. It is preferable to increase the execution rate of the final performance.

In addition, for the final performance, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend to the performance position (large descent described later), and the second movable member 73b moves in the left and right direction, and the frame illumination device 10 and The board lighting device 74, the performance button light emitting LED, etc. emit rainbow colors, and a success image (image including rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70, indicating that a jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot game is executed when a successful performance and a failure image (an image that does not include rainbow colors) is displayed on the main display device 70 without the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descending to the performance position. There is a determined failure performance that suggests that it will not be done.

In step E322-14, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information of the final performance according to the final performance pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. This deciding performance execution information is referred to in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the deciding performance is executed. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E322-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that allows the confirmed performance to be executed, the process moves to step E322-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows the confirmed performance to be executed, the confirmed performance is not executed and the current jackpot preview performance is performed. End the determination process.

In step E322-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the final performance pattern using the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 37) for determining the performance pattern of the final performance to be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable performance. . Specifically, with reference to the confirmed pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, a confirmed performance pattern is determined based on the jackpot determination result, the current variable performance pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern.

"Confirmed performance" means a jackpot preview performance in which a confirmation sound (kyuinkyuin) that definitively announces a jackpot is output during the execution of a variable performance that results in a jackpot, and the firing handle 15 lights up in rainbow colors. It is a type of

In step E322-17, the sub CPU 130a sets execution information of the confirmed effect according to the confirmed effect pattern in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. This confirmed performance execution information is referred to in the jackpot preview performance execution process of step E500, and the confirmed performance is executed at various timings. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 35 is a line preview pattern determination table for determining a line preview pattern in the jackpot preview effect determination process of step E322 described above.

The line announcement pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each line announcement pattern, and the performance content (validity period, line announcement performance content) of each line announcement pattern. Note that the line preview pattern 01 is a line preview pattern in which no line preview performance is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light is displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that during the valid period, the operation promoting light emission in which the production button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) is performed.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue content column indicates that one of the multiple normal dialogues for which it is unclear whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters. .
"Chance (black)" indicates that one of a plurality of chance lines indicating that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in black letters.
"Reach (black)" indicates that one reach line that confirms that the reach effect will be executed is displayed in black letters.
"Reach (red)" indicates that one reach line for which it is confirmed that the reach effect will be executed is displayed in red letters.
"Hot (red)" indicates that one hot line indicating that there is a high possibility that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in red letters.
"Very hot (gold)" indicates that one extremely hot line indicating that there is a strong possibility that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in gold letters.
"Confirmed (Rainbow)" indicates that one confirmed line that confirms that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed in gold letters.

The expected jackpot for each line is in the following order: Normal line < Chance line < Reach line (black text) < Reach line (red text) < Hot line (red text) < Super hot line (gold text) < Confirmed line (rainbow text) It is set to increase in size.

"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the production button 17 does not vibrate when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the production button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
"Weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the performance button 17 vibrates at a weak intensity for one second when lines are displayed due to the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
"Medium vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates with medium intensity for 1 second when the dialogue is displayed due to the operation of the production button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that the production button 17 vibrates at a strong intensity for 1 second when lines are displayed due to the operation of the production button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each vibration is set to increase in the order of weak vibration < medium vibration < strong vibration.

(Accessory notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(a) is an accessory preview pattern determination table for determining an accessory preview pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The jackpot judgment result, variable performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each accessory notification pattern, and accessory notification contents (execution timing, operation mode) of each accessory notification pattern are associated with the accessory notification pattern determination table. ing. Note that the accessory preview pattern 01 is an accessory preview pattern in which the accessory preview performance is not executed.

"Small descent" in the operation mode column indicates that the movable presentation device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and then returns to the standby position.
"Great descent" indicates that the movable presentation device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to a presentation position below the intermediate position, and then returns to the standby position.

The jackpot expectation for each operation mode is set to increase in the order of small drop < large drop. Note that although the execution timing of the accessory preview performance is only at the start of the fluctuation, the accessory preview performance may be executed at other timings as well.

"None" in the column of button vibration indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
"Yes (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that the production button 17 vibrates for 1 second along with the operation of the movable production device 73 at the start of the variation.

(Blackout effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(b) is a blackout performance pattern determination table for determining a blackout performance pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The blackout performance pattern determination table is associated with jackpot determination results, variable performance patterns, selection rate (%) of each blackout performance pattern, and performance content (validity period, blackout performance content) of each blackout performance pattern. ing. Note that blackout effect pattern 01 is a blackout effect pattern in which no blackout effect is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light is displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that during the valid period, the operation promoting light emission in which the production button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) is performed.

"Development failure" in the performance image column indicates that a development failure performance that suggests that the development to the SP reach performance fails and ends with a normal reach performance is executed.
The "weak development effect" indicates that a weak development effect indicating that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed.
The "strong development effect" indicates that a weak development effect is executed, which suggests that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed.
"None" in the button vibration column indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
"Yes (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration indicates that the performance button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds when the performance image is displayed due to the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation level of each performance image is set to increase in the order of development failure < weak development performance < strong development performance.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(c) is a cut-in performance pattern determination table for determining a cut-in performance pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The cut-in performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the performance content (validity period, cut-in performance content) of each cut-in performance pattern. ing.

"None" in the button image column indicates that the operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 is not displayed during the valid period.
"Non-protruding (dark)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 remains in a non-protruding state (normal mode) and does not emit light during the valid period.

"Weak cut-in" in the effect image column indicates that a weak cut-in image that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
"Strong cut-in" indicates that a strong cut-in image that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed.
"None" in the column of button vibration indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.

The jackpot expectation of each performance image is set to increase in the order of weak cut-in < strong cut-in.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(d) is a fixed performance pattern determination table for determining a fixed performance pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The fixed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each fixed performance pattern, and the performance content (validity period, fixed performance content) of each fixed performance pattern. The determined performance patterns 01 to 02 are determined performance patterns in which a determined failed performance is executed, and the determined performance patterns 11 to 12 are determined performance patterns in which a determined successful performance is executed.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button image column indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a non-protruding state (normal mode) that emits white light is displayed during the valid period.
"Protruding (white)" indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits white light is displayed during the valid period.
"Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that an operation promotion image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state (specific mode) that emits rainbow light is displayed during the valid period.

"Non-protruding (white)" in the button state column indicates that during the valid period, the operation promoting light emission in which the production button 17 emits white light while remaining in the non-protruding state (normal mode) is performed.
"Protruding (white)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) and an operation promoting light emission of white light is performed.
"Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that during the valid period, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state (specific state) and an operation promoting light emission that emits rainbow light is performed.

The jackpot expectation of each button image and button state is set to increase in the order of non-protruding (white) < protruding (white) < protruding (rainbow).

The "failure image" in the performance image column indicates that a failure image is displayed that suggests that the jackpot game will not be executed (≒ a loss).
The "success image" indicates that a determined success image is displayed to notify that a jackpot game will be executed.
"None" in the column of button vibration indicates that the effect button 17 does not vibrate when the effect image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the valid period.
“Yes (5 seconds)” indicates that the effect button 17 vibrates at a strong intensity for 5 seconds when a successful image is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the validity period.

In addition, even if a failure image is displayed, a revival effect may be executed afterwards and it may be announced that a jackpot game will be executed, so displaying a failure image does not mean a loss. It has become.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 37 is a confirmed performance pattern determination table for determining a confirmed performance pattern in the jackpot preview performance determination process of step E322 described above.

The confirmed performance pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and the execution timing of the confirmed performance in each confirmed performance pattern. Note that the confirmed performance pattern 01 is a confirmed performance pattern in which the confirmed performance is not executed. In addition, the hatched areas in the execution timing column of confirmed effects (for example, the hatched areas in the columns of (super) shortening variation row during normal reach, during production, effective 2, advanced effects, etc.) are applicable. The performance content is not executed (does not exist) in the variable performance pattern.

Furthermore, “valid 1” in the execution timing column of the confirmed performance indicates the validity period of the dialogue preview performance that may be executed during the normal variation (pre-reach performance).
"Validity 2" indicates the validity period in a blackout performance that may be executed during a normal reach performance.
"Validity 3" indicates the validity period in a cut-in performance that may be executed during the SP reach performance.
"Validity 4" indicates the validity period in the decisive performance executed during the SPSP reach performance.
“○” indicates that it is the timing at which the confirmed performance is executed.

The first feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable effect, after the confirmation effect is executed (after the confirmation sound is output), the success effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button 17. (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b operate), and the case where the successful performance is determined based on the operation of the performance button 17 without being executed (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b). There are cases in which the movable member 73b moves. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and excitement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature related to the performances using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is the SP reach variation performance in which the SP reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance, and the SP reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance, and then the SP SP reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance. The execution mode (execution ratio, execution timing) of the confirmed effect differs between the SPSP reach variation effect in which the effect is executed, and the confirmed effect can be executed at multiple timings during the variable effect, but the operation of the effect button 17 The problem is that the confirmed performance is not executed during the validity period of the accompanying jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, blackout performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance). By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that when an attempt is made to operate the performance button 17, a fixed performance is executed and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A third feature related to the performances using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in the variable performances, the operation of the performance button 17 is determined depending on whether the first movable member 73a moves according to the accessory preview performance or when it does not operate. The execution mode of the jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, blackout performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance) and the execution rate of the confirmed performance are different, and the confirmed performance can be executed at multiple timings during the variable performance, The problem is that the confirmed performance is not executed during the validity period of the jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, blackout performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance). By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that when an attempt is made to operate the performance button 17, a fixed performance is executed and the desire to operate the performance button 17 is reduced, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Furthermore, among the above-mentioned jackpot preview performances (line preview performance, blackout performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance), the confirmed performance will be executed during the valid period of the cut-in performance when the operation promotion performance is not executed. Good too.

The fourth feature of the performances using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that in variable performances, a fixed performance can be executed before the final performance is executed, and a line preview performance with low expectations for a jackpot is possible. An example of this is that the accessory preview performance that moves the first movable member 73a is more likely to be executed when a dialogue preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed than when this is performed. By doing so, it becomes easier to raise the expectations of the players, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the accessory preview performance may be executed not only at the start of the variable performance, but also at the start of the ready-to-win performance, or at a timing between the start of the variable performance and the start of the ready-to-reach performance. In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the accessory preview performance is to be executed is determined by lottery (accessory preview pattern).

The fifth feature related to the production using the tables shown in Figures 35 to 37 is that in variable production that results in a jackpot, the validity period (validity period of the dialogue notice) occurs before the reach production, rather than the case where the validity period (validity period of the dialogue notice) occurs during the reach production. The effect is that the effect button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (second state) when the valid period (the valid period of the fixed effect) occurs. By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's sense of expectation during the ready-to-win performance than before the ready-to-win performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the production button 17 is designed not to be in the protruding state during the validity period of the line preview production that is executed before the reach production, the production button 17 is in the protrusion state at a lower rate than the validity period of the final production. You can do it like this. In this case, the production button 17 may be set to protrude at a predetermined rate only when there is a jackpot, or the production button 17 may be set to the protrusion state at a lower rate when there is a loss than when there is a jackpot. You may also do so.

The sixth feature related to the effects using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that the blackout effect is performed during the first period of the reach effect (during the normal reach effect), and the blackout effect is performed after the first period of the reach effect. One point is that the decision performance executed during the second period (during the SPSP reach performance) has a higher percentage of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state during the valid period. By doing this, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations during the second period after the first period of the ready-to-win effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that during the effective period of the blackout effect executed during the first period of the reach effect, the effect button 17 does not protrude, but the effect button 17 protrudes at a lower rate than during the effective period of the decisive effect. The state may be changed. In this case, the production button 17 may be made to protrude only when there is a jackpot, or the production button 17 may be made to protrude at a lower rate when there is a loss than when there is a jackpot. good.

A seventh feature related to the performances using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that the jackpot preview performance that can be executed at multiple timings during the variable performance includes a specific performance that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17. (Speech preview performance, blackout performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance), and the specific performance includes a first performance that can be executed at multiple timings during the variable performance and is executed by operating the performance button 17 ( During execution of a specific reach variation production (SP reach variation production), including a cut-in production) and a second production (line preview production, blackout production, final production) that is executed without operating the production button 17. One point is that the execution of the first performance is regulated at another timing (from the start of fluctuation to the start of the SP reach performance) before the execution timing of the specific performance in . By doing this, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the specific reach performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that, as the above-mentioned specific performances, in addition to non-operation-required performances that are executed without any operation of the production button 17, such as dialogue preview performances and decisive performances, there are also productions that require no operation of the production button 17, such as cut-in performances. In addition, we provide an operation request performance that is not executed if the normal reach performance is developed, such as an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance, at a different timing before the execution timing of a specific performance during the execution of a development performance such as an SP reach performance that develops from a normal reach performance (for example, a decision performance is performed even though the development performance is in progress. (before the execution of), the execution of the operation request performance is restricted, and if the variable performance is a jackpot (a variable performance pattern designation command that is a jackpot is received), the execution of the specific performance during the execution of the advanced performance is regulated. The specific performance as the operation request performance may be made executable at another timing before the execution timing. Further, execution of the operation request performance may be regulated by a predetermined lottery at another timing before the execution timing of the specific performance during the execution of the advanced performance.

The eighth feature related to the performances using the tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is that there are multiple dialogue preview performances with different performance modes (content of dialogue, button vibration mode), and the second jackpot game is most advantageous to the player. (Full-rotation reach effect) is executed, there are times when a special mode (Speech Notice Pattern 7 - Extreme Heat (Friday)) is executed, and the second jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player. When a one-hit jackpot game (SPSP reach performance) is executed, there is a point that the special form of dialogue preview performance is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect when the second jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (main display device 70, sub display device 71 ) adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight, and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5), and the light intensity value Processing is performed to switch the initial value (any one of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light amount value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5).

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (main display device 70 , performs processing for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the sub-display device 71).

In addition, regarding the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19, there are restrictions (regulations/restrictions) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a). It has become. In addition, during the period from when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the start of game progress control (specifically, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, various (during the initial operation of the drive source, etc. until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power supply Restrictions also occur (restrictions/restrictions) during notification (output of notification sound) of input, power restoration, unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the light intensity of the backlight of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display device (main display device 70, sub display device 71). do. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame of effect images is completed) to the general control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervising CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervising RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the main display device 70 and sub display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start timing and end timing of various performances (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable performance, jackpot preview performance, look-ahead performance, etc.) performed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. It looks like this. Note that for performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (pending display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and second sub-pending display 84, performance operation of the movable performance device 73), the frame is updated. Sometimes it matches the timing, but sometimes it doesn't match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable presentation and at the end of the variable presentation (stopping of the presentation pattern 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be restricted (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 150 will be explained using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process of the lamp control unit 150, and this process is executed within the timer interrupt process executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number of the accessory (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1" to execute the origin return process.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the action of returning the accessories (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, sub display device 71, presentation button 17) to the original position is executed. , or set the initial processing number to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 39, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines that the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessory (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, sub display device 71) is “0”. Determine whether or not. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable effect device 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The sub display device 71 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "2". If the board accessory processing number is not "2", the process moves to step R105-14, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", in step R105-6, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set. It is set in the second movable presentation device 75, and the process moves to step R105-7.

In step R105-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-8, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-13.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-9, the board accessory to be driven returns to the original position. A board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-10, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory object to be driven, and the process moves to step R105-11, and if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, , the process moves to step R105-14.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a generates return abnormality information (first movable performance device return abnormality information, second movable performance device return abnormality information, sub display device Return abnormality information) is set in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-13. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the sub display device 71 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". 1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to make the second movable production device 75 the drive target, and if the board accessory processing number is "2", the board accessory processing number is The board accessory processing number is updated to "3" to complete the process of returning the objects (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, sub display device 71) to the origin.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-15, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-22.

In step R105-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-16, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-21.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a drives the production button drive motor for moving the production button 17 so that the production button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-17, the production button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-18, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-19. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-20, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-21. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "3" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-23, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-23, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-24, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, when the power is turned on, the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71 whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap are returned to the origin. If they are not in the position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable presentation device 73→sub display device 71→second movable presentation device 75). (in this order) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. In addition, when the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub-display device 71 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to suppress the burdens placed on each other by the accessories on both sides. It becomes possible to suppress inconveniences such as accessories being damaged at the same time.

Moreover, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. It is possible to perform the operation of returning the production button 17) to the origin position at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 40, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Moreover, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. When both operations of returning the production button 17) to the origin position are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71 are placed at the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable presentation device 73 → sub display device 71 → second movable presentation device 75). However, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73, the sub-display device 71, and the second movable presentation device 75 can be shortened, and the initial operations of various accessories to be executed next can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible to migrate.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the board accessory (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, sub display device 71) is set in the lamp RAM 150c. . If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessories (movable presentation device 73, sub-display device 71) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-9, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 17) can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. The initial operations of the production device 73, the second movable production device 75, and the sub display device 71 are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred to its initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) and the frame accessory (direction button 17) The initial operation processing ends when both of the initial operations are completed. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, sub display device 71). In addition, in FIG. 42, for convenience, the first movable performance device 73 is described as the movable performance device 1, and the second movable performance device 75 is described as the movable performance device 2.

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 04 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 04 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 05 to 08, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 09 to 12 are set.

"Moving the movable production device 2" is an operation in which the second movable production device 75 tilts from the standby position to the production position, and "returning the movable production device 2 to the origin" is an operation in which the second movable production device 75 is in the standby position. The action is to return to the position.

"Movable performance device 1 small descent" is an operation in which the first movable performance device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and "movable performance device 1 large descent" ” is an operation in which the first movable presentation device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to a presentation position below the halfway position, and “movable presentation device 1 return to origin” is an operation in which the first movable presentation device 73 moves (descends) from the standby position to a presentation position below the intermediate position. 73 returns to the standby position.

"Sub display device movement" is an operation in which the sub display device 71 moves up from the standby position to the presentation position, and "sub display device return to origin" is an operation in which the sub display device 71 returns to the standby position. It has become.

“Movable presentation device 1 LED” refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the first movable presentation device 73, and “movable presentation device 2 LED” refers to a plurality of LEDs provided on the second movable presentation device 75. That is, "sub display device LED" refers to a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub display device 71.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 10, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73a. This is because the 1 LED flashes red to notify an abnormality.

Furthermore, in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 07, and initial operation pattern 11, the lighting color of the sub-display device LED is not described, but this is because the sub-display device LED is This is because the light flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 04, the initial operation pattern 08, and the initial operation pattern 12, the lighting color of the movable production device 2 LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable production device 75. This is because the 2 LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory One point is that the initial operation modes (number of steps, operation of each step) of (first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, and sub display device 71) are the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of any of the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. Alternatively, the operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of all the initial operations of the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and/or the second movable presentation device 75 and/or the sub-display device 71 is determined when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. If you want to make the settings different, you may want to make the initial action at power-on perform an action that is not in the initial action at power-on, or perform an action that is not in the initial action at power-on when the power is restored. You may also do so. In this way, it becomes easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory (first movable production device 73, The difference is that the light emission mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of the two movable presentation devices 75 and sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. are the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

It should be noted that while the light emitting mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation devices 1 and 2 LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, the light emitting mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation devices 1 and 2 LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the sub display device LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable presentation devices 1 and 2 LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emitting mode of initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed as a variable or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore to a customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore during a special symbol fluctuation display, or during a jackpot game.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, both the movable presentation device 1 and 2 LEDs and the sub display device LED are turned off, but the movable presentation device LED and The sub-display device LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. If there is no recovery abnormality in the second movable presentation device 75 and the sub-display device 71, the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the sub-display device 71 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73, If there is a return abnormality in the second movable presentation device 75 and there is no return abnormality in the first movable presentation device 73 and the sub-display device 71, the first movable presentation is performed without performing the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75. The initial operation of the device 73 and the sub-display device 71 is performed, and if there is a recovery error in the sub-display device 71 and there is no recovery error in the first movable presentation device 73 and the second movable presentation device 75, the sub-display device 71 One point is that the initial operations of the first movable presentation device 73 and the second movable presentation device 75 are performed without performing the initial operations. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Production button large rise" is an operation in which the production button 17 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the production position (upper position), and "production button return to origin" is an operation in which the production button 17 is raised to the standby position. The operation is to return to .

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an operation that is not present in the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the frame accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the (effect button 17) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is the number of colors of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the color of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 44 shows a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) after power is turned on with initialization of main RAM 110c. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 44 to 62, for convenience, the first movable presentation device 73 is referred to as the movable presentation device 1, and the second movable presentation device 75 is referred to as the movable presentation device 2.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the presentation symbol “135” which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. 70a and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Output.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, and sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission (light emission )do.

Note that when the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 starts.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is finished and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission ends in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the lights turn on while waiting for customers (white). When the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T9, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, and production button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display The display mode of the container 83 becomes "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the sub display device after power is turned on)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the sub display device 71 after power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays a presentation pattern 70a of “135” which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the origin return process ends with a return error occurring in the sub-display device 71, the sub-display device LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return error, and the initial operation process is completed. is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

Note that when the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 is completed, the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 starts.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is finished and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, and the initial light emission of the movable presentation device 1 LED and the movable presentation device 2 LED is completed and becomes lit (white lighting) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub-display device LED ends, and a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable presentation device 1 LED, movable presentation device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, presentation button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the first movable presentation device 73 after power is turned on)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific example when the first movable performance device 73 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays a presentation pattern 70a of “135” which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable performance device 73, the movable performance device 1 LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable presentation device 2 LED and the sub-display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the presentation button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is finished and it turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process is completed without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED is completed and turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable presentation device 1 LED ends, and the variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the second movable presentation device 75 after power is turned on)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable performance device 75 has a recovery abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays a presentation pattern 70a of “135” which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on. , and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". be done. In addition, since FIG. 47 assumes that there is a return abnormality in the second movable presentation device 75, the movable presentation device 2 LED blinks red (abnormality notification) after turning off to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. mode).

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

Although the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable presentation device 75, the operation of returning the first movable presentation device 73 to the original position starts.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification). mode), and the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the sub-display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is finished and it turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed. The initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable presentation device 1 LED and the sub-display device LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (white lighting).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable production device 2 LED ends, and the variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and , the first standby screen with the special design TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". .

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the first movable performance device 73 and the return operation of the performance button 17 are completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is The operation will not start. At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

Note that not starting the initial operation of the production button 17 corresponds to not performing the "large rise" of the initial actions shown in FIG. 43, and "continuous vibration (2 seconds )" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are not included. That is, even if the production button 17 has a return abnormality, "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" will be executed. In other words, the above-mentioned "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are predetermined regardless of the position of the production button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the high rise position). When the timing is reached, it can be said to be executed for a predetermined period of time.
For example, if "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the production button 17 (large rise position, origin position returned from the large rise position), Although the production button 17 can be vibrated without any problem, the production button 17 cannot be vibrated without any problem due to the fact that the production button 17 cannot be moved to the large raised position and the origin position returned from the large raised position. There are concerns that it cannot be confirmed that it is even possible to do so.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, even if there is a recovery error in the production button 17, only "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" among the initial operations are predetermined. By executing the process for a predetermined time when the timing is reached, the above-mentioned concerns can be resolved.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends. , the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED end their initial light emission and turn on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) ), the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub display device LED, production button LED lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 49 shows a specific case where there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c. It is a figure which shows an example.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol “753” which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED and the movable presentation device 2 LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the sub display device LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission. Light.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is finished and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission ends in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and they turn on while waiting for customers ( (lit white).

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, and production button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display The display mode of the container 83 becomes "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the sub display device after power is restored)
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the sub display device 71 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol “753” which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the origin return process ends with a return error occurring in the sub-display device 71, the sub-display device LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return error, and the initial operation process is completed. is started, and the initial operation of the second movable performance device 75 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is finished and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the sub-display device 71, and the initial light emission of the movable presentation device 1 LED and the movable presentation device 2 LED is completed and becomes lit (white lighting) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the sub-display device LED ends, and a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable presentation device 1 LED, movable presentation device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, presentation button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the first movable performance device after power is restored)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable performance device 73 after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol “753” which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable performance device 73, the movable performance device 1 LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub-display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 2 LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is finished and it turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed. , the initial operation process is completed without the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable performance device 2 LED and the sub display device LED is completed and turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting).

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable presentation device 1 LED ends, and the variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the second movable performance device after power is restored)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the second movable performance device 75 after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol “753” which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence. In addition, since FIG. 52 assumes that there is a recovery abnormality in the second movable presentation device 75, the movable presentation device 2 LED blinks red (abnormality notification) after turning off to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality. mode).

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

Although the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable presentation device 75, the operation of returning the first movable presentation device 73 to the original position starts.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable performance device 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the second movable performance device 75, the movable performance device 2 LED continues to flash red (abnormality notification). mode), and the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub display device LED and the performance button LED light up (lights up) in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is finished and it turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at the timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is completed. The initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 being executed, and the initial light emission of the movable presentation device 1 LED and the sub-display device LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (white lighting).

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable production device 2 LED ends, and the variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button The LED lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the production symbol “753” which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and a second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the first movable presentation device 73 and the return operation of the presentation button 17 are completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the presentation button 17, the presentation button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), and the recovery operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is The operation will not start. At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED and the movable presentation device 2 LED are lit alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the sub display device LED is lit in blue as initial light emission.
Note that the point that the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not started is the same as that described in the explanation of FIG. 48, so the explanation here will be omitted.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 ends, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 starts, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the sub display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends. , the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white lighting) while waiting for customers.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub display device LED, production button LED lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the second power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and, The operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the text "Please resume the game" during recovery. The screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the main display device 70 displays the returning screen, so the first pending The state in which pending numbers are not displayed in the number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started. When the initial operation of the display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain in the off state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 stops displaying the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, and production button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display The display mode of the container 83 becomes "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally are cases in which power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, or when power is not supplied to the production control board 110 from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Cases where the command communication line is disconnected, cases where the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), etc.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When receiving the pending number = 0), the main display device 70 maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub display device LED, and production button LED remain off. .

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the main display device 70 displays the initial screen. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T4, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the main display device 70 displays the performance symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (still display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable performance (variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or (change to icon, output of BGM) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, sub-display device LED, and production button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first pending display The display mode of the container 83 becomes "0".

Note that the specific example of the case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is also the same as the specific example of the case where the power-on designation command described above cannot be received normally.

(Specific example of restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 56 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, and the main display device 70 is in a state of waiting for the customer. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen with the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display), a movable production device 1 LED, a movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable performance executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the main display device 70 , a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the losing performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, Sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first reservation indicator 83, sub second reservation indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure reserve The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen may be displayed (regardless of whether or not after the variable performance has been completed, if a customer waiting state designation command is received) If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, The sub-first reservation display 83, the second sub-retention display 84, the sub-routine fluctuation display 85, and the sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen. Instead, a first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of “135”, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs the following: An initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. (luminous).

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (lit white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission ends in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and they turn on while waiting for customers ( When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already being executed, the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are being executed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) ), even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the main display will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received as the power-on command at timing T4. Except for the screen displayed on the device 70 being a variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), the device 70 is in a waiting state for customers. This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Furthermore, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each accessory, the initial operations of the various accessories will be performed in the same way as the specific examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 48.

Next, a case will be described in which the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the main power supply is restarted while the backup power supply continues.

If the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already completed and the customer is waiting, the main display device 70 will display “753”, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen with the performance pattern 70a and the special design TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display The device LED and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the main display device 70 is in the waiting state for a customer after the completion of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories, the main display device 70 displays A standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the performance pattern 70a indicating , and the special design TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, and the sub information display 80 (Sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general fluctuation indicator 85, sub general hold indicator 86) Maintain display content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the main display device 70 maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed, and the sub information displays 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, The sub-first reservation display 83, the second sub-retention display 84, the sub-routine fluctuation display 85, and the sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17 return to the origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the main display device 70 displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen. , a second standby screen is displayed in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

Then, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. (luminous).

Thereafter, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (lit white), and when the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed, the sub-display device 71 is turned on. Initial operation is started.

When the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the LEDs turn on while waiting for customers (light on in white). becomes.

It should be noted that while the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are already being executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have been completed, that is, the main display device 70 displays the variable effect. If the power recovery designation command is received while the screen is being displayed, the process will be the same as after timing T2 in the specific example shown in FIG.

In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, that is, the opening effect screen is displayed on the main display device 70. , the round effect screen, or the ending effect screen when the power recovery designation command is received, the timing of T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. 54 except for the display contents of the main display device 70. The same applies hereafter.

Specifically, on the main display device 70, a special jackpot effect screen is displayed in place of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the special jackpot effect screen is displayed until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. maintain. Note that the display of a special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each accessory, the initial operations of the various accessories will be performed in the same way as the specific examples shown in FIGS. 45 to 48.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the main display device 70. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 after returning to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the display mode of the special symbol during variable display and without pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display displayed on the main display device 70 after recovery (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) is made to be different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the main display device 70 is making a specific display suggesting the restart of power supply, the hold icon display area does not execute the hold display, but the sub hold display can perform the hold display. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, if the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, and the display control when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply was resumed. It becomes possible to reduce such processing load.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the sub-variation display (sub-first variation display 81, sub-second variation display 82) displays special symbols after the control state of the game is restored. Even if the variable display is being executed (the returning screen is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, for the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84), a returning screen is displayed on the main display device 70. The display mode is such that the number of reservations is shown from when the sub-variable display is displayed (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received). By doing this, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the main display device 70 is displaying the returning screen, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (the first sub-hold indicator 83, the second sub-hold indicator 84) may be changed to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of the various accessories is performed at the same timing as when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when various accessories (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) are in the process of returning , the light emitting parts of various accessories (the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED) are turned off. By doing this, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. By doing this, it becomes possible to know which accessory has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. By doing this, it becomes possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. Various accessories (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71 , the initial operation of the production button 17) is performed, but if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the production symbol 70a is displayed on the main display device 70. The initial movements of various accessories are performed from the previous timing (while the return screen is displayed). By doing this, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, the main display device 70 displays the board accessories (the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, the sub display device 71, and the performance button 17). When the returning screen is displayed (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-pending display (sub-first pending display 83, sub-second pending display 84) indicates the pending number. The initial operation is performed after the display mode becomes as shown in FIG. By doing this, it is possible to perform the initial movements of the board objects after the player has grasped the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the frame accessory (production button 17) is displayed on the main display device 70 (while the special symbol is changing and the production The initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (first sub-holding display 83, second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode showing the number of holdings (before the symbol 70a is displayed). By doing this, the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed after the player understands the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The various accessories are displayed at the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the main display device 70 (if the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed). It is designed to perform initial operations. By doing this, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When receiving a special symbol storage designation command based on winning of a game ball to the starting hole from the control board 110, a winning sound is output. By doing this, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, a variation effect is executed without displaying a standby screen. By doing this, the start of the variable presentation is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to execute the variable presentation from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main When a fluctuation start command is received from the control board 110, a fluctuation effect is executed without performing the return operation or initial operation of various accessories. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or initial action during execution of the variable performance.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the main control board If the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. (including initial light emission). By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, during the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission), during variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or during jackpot games (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). However, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command or power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the various accessories are restarted. The return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, even if the customer is in a waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped. When restarting, for example, and receiving a power-on designation command from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 56, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 stops, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When a recovery designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are out of sync, the difference will be corrected. It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, even if the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished (loss fluctuation performance, jackpot fluctuation performance) or jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the main control board 110 If the power supply is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power recovery designation command is received again from the controller, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

(Modified example where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 57 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

At the timing of T1, the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, and the main display device 70 is in a state of waiting for the customer. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen with the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display), a movable production device 1 LED, a movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

Note that if the timing of T1 is a waiting state for a customer after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the fluctuating effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound has finished, the main display device 70 , a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the losing performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, Sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first reservation indicator 83, sub second reservation indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure reserve The display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen may be displayed (regardless of whether or not after the variable performance has been completed, if a customer waiting state designation command is received) If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, and displays the movable production device 1 LED, movable production device 2 LED, Then, the sub-display device LED and the performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 shows the initial symbol when the power is turned on instead of the initial screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared." An initialization notification sound will be output.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. (luminous).

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (lit white), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed. Upon completion, the initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission ends in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and they turn on while waiting for customers ( When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already being executed, the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are being executed, or the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) ), even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the main display device 70 will be restarted by the time the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at timing T3. Except for the fact that the screens displayed are variable effect screens (loss variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) and jackpot effect screens (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen), This is similar to the case where only the power supply to the control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Next, a case will be described in which the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the main power supply is restarted while the backup power supply continues.

If the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are already completed and the customer is waiting, the main display device 70 will display “753”, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen with the performance pattern 70a and the special design TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, and the sub display The device LED and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the main display device 70 is in the waiting state for a customer after the completion of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories, the main display device 70 displays A standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed in which the performance pattern 70a indicating , and the special design TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

Thereafter, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the main display device 70 maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, and the sub information display 80 (Sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general fluctuation indicator 85, sub general hold indicator 86) Maintain display content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17 return to the origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the production button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 shows the initial design when the power is restored, instead of the initial screen. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

Then, when the return operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation button 17 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission. (luminous).

Thereafter, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (lighting white), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable production device 73 is completed, The initial operation of the sub display device 71 is started.

When the initial operation of the sub-display device 71 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED, and the LEDs turn on while waiting for customers (light on in white). becomes.

It should be noted that while the variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) are already being executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have been completed, that is, the main display device 70 displays the variable effect. Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped while the screen is being displayed, and the power supply to the main control board 110 is then restarted, the main display device 70 will display the following information: An initial screen containing the words "Loading" is displayed, and then, when the production control board 130 receives a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the restoration operation of various accessories, Then, initial operations are performed. At this time, the main display device 70 displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game" instead of the initial screen, and the returning screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. maintain.

In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have already been completed, that is, the opening effect screen is displayed on the main display device 70. , the round effect screen, or the ending effect screen, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted. Even in this case, the main display device 70 displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading", and then the main control board 110 displays a power recovery designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. 130, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are executed. At this time, on the main display device 70, a special jackpot effect screen is displayed in place of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the display of the special jackpot effect screen is maintained until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. do. Note that the display of a special jackpot effect screen may be maintained until the jackpot game ends.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed changes to an initial screen different from the standby screen. It is designed to be switched. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub display are The device LED and performance button LED are turned off. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when the power-on designation command is received. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (receiving a power-on designation command), the initial screen is displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. You may also do so. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a recovery error in the sub display device after power is turned on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a modification in a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the sub display device 71 after power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the main display device 70.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started, and the second movable production device 75 and the production button 17, the return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the presentation button LED remain off, and the main display device 70 displays the presentation symbol “135” which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. 70a and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 emits an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Output.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70E of the main display device 70 are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the number display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

In addition, when the return operation of the second movable presentation device 75 to the origin position is completed, the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 to the origin position is started.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable presentation device 73 and the presentation button 17 is completed, the return operation of the sub display device 71 is started. At this time, the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, the sub-display device LED, and the production button LED remain off.

At timing T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the sub-display device 71, the movable presentation device 1 LED, the movable presentation device 2 LED, and the sub-display device LED are activated to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. It flashes red (abnormality notification mode), initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the production button 17 is started. At this time, the production button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission in the production button LED is finished and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and the first movable production device 73, second movable production device 75, and sub The initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the display device 71 being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production device 2 LED, and the sub display device LED ends, and the variable display starts on the sub first variable display 81, and the movable production device 1 LED, the movable production The LED of the device 2, the LED of the sub-display device, and the LED of the production button are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Furthermore, even if there is a recovery error in the first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, or sub display device 71 when the power is turned on, the movable presentation device 1 LED, movable presentation device 2 LED, and sub display device LED will be restored. It flashes red to notify the occurrence of an abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, and sub display device 71. It looks like this.

In addition, even when the power is restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, or sub display device 71, the movable presentation device 1 LED, movable presentation device 2 LED, and sub display device The LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operations of the first movable presentation device 73, second movable presentation device 75, and sub display device 71. is set to end.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, if there is a return abnormality in any of the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71, only the movable member with the return abnormality is In addition, the initial operation is not performed even for movable members that have no return abnormality. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that a movable member that does not have a return error collides with a movable member that has a return error and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable performance device 73, the second movable performance device 75, and the sub display device 71, the movable performance device 1 LED and the movable performance device 2 LED , and the sub-display device LED flashes red to notify the recovery abnormality. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to a case where only the movable member LED provided on the movable member with the return abnormality blinks red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable production device 73, the second movable production device 75, and the sub display device 71, the first movable production device 73, the second movable presentation device 75 and the presentation buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the sub-display device 71 are designed to perform initial operations. By doing this, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17, and it becomes possible to understand an abnormality in the performance button 17.

Moreover, according to the modification shown in FIG. The effect button LED that is displayed does not blink red to notify of a recovery abnormality, but instead emits initial light. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the first movable presentation device 73, the second movable presentation device 75, and the sub display device 71, the initial operation process is completed without performing the initial operation for the presentation button 17 as well. You may also do so. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable production device 73, the second movable production device 75, and the sub display device 71. good. In this case, the movable performance device 1 LED, the movable performance device 2 LED, the sub display device LED, and the performance button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Next, using FIGS. 59 to 62, the initial operations of the various accessories (first movable performance device 73, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) described in FIGS. 42 to 58 will be explained. The following describes the aspects of the performance and the aspects of the presentation operation.

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of first movable member)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode and required time of the first movable performance device 73 (movable performance device 1).
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable production device 73, "B" indicates the first initial operating position of the first movable production device 73, and "C" indicates the first initial operating position of the first movable production device 73. indicates the second initial operating position of the first movable presentation device 73. The first initial operation position of "B" is the same as the first production position in FIG. 78, which will be described later, and the second initial operation position of "C" is the same as the second production position in FIG. 60, which will be described later. It's the location. In addition, below, it is simply described as "A,""B," and "C."
In addition, FIG. 59 will be described using as an example the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 (movable presentation device 1) when a variable display is being performed at the time of power restoration.

(a) shows the mode of "moveable production device 1 small descent" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable presentation device 1 small descent", the first movable presentation device 73 moves from "A" to "B" over a period of approximately "0.25S (second)" (=approximately 1 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, the robot moves from "A" to "B" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.
Note that in (a) to (f), the movable presentation device 1 LED of the first movable presentation device 73 is off (see FIG. 42).
In addition, the "cycle fluctuation" described in FIGS. 59 to 62 refers to the "cycle fluctuation" that is performed on the special symbol display during "0.25S (seconds)" when the first movable presentation device 73 moves from "A" to "B". The details are explained with reference to FIG. 69.

(b) shows a state in which the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for about "1S" (=about 4 cycle fluctuation).

(c) shows a mode of "movable presentation device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable performance device 1 return to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "B" to "A" over a period of approximately "0.5S" (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, it is assumed that the object moves from "B" to "A" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.

In this way, when the first movable presentation device 73 performs a small descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than from "A" to "B". The relationship is such that the amount of time spent doing so is longer. Also, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "B" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "B". are in a relationship.
In particular, the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "A" than from "A" to "B," the initial operation can be performed without placing a load on the drive source of the first movable presentation device 73. can be executed.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "B", the time spent stopping at "B" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "B".
As a result, for example, the time during which the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "B" can be used to inform workers (factory workers, game store clerks) whether there is any malfunction or the like in the first movable presentation device 73. You can confirm it.

(d) shows a mode of "lowering the movable presentation device 1" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable performance device 1 large descent", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" over a period of approximately "0.8S" (=approximately 3 cycle fluctuation).

(e) shows a state in which the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "2S" (=about 8 cycle fluctuation).

(f) shows a mode of "movable presentation device 1 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable performance device 1 return to origin", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over a period of approximately "1.6S" (=approximately 6 cycles of fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable presentation device 73 performs a large descent related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "C" to "A" than from "A" to "C". The relationship is such that the amount of time spent doing so is longer. Also, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "C" to "A" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "A" to "C". are in a relationship.
In particular, the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "A" than from "A" to "C," the initial operation can be performed without placing a load on the drive source of the first movable presentation device 73. can be executed.
Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "C", the time spent stopping at "C" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, the time during which the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "C" can be used to inform workers (factory workers, game store clerks) whether there is any malfunction or the like in the first movable presentation device 73. You can confirm it.

Note that although FIG. 59 is explained using power restoration as an example, the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned instantaneous power outage occurs during variable display, the recovery operation and initialization operation are not executed. In this way, the event shown in FIG. 59 does not occur in all "power outages", but instantaneous power outages are excluded.

(Specific example of performance operation mode and required time of first movable performance device)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode and required time of the performance operation of the first movable performance device 73.
First, "A" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the first movable production device 73, "B" indicates the first production position of the first movable production device 73, and "C" indicates the first production position of the first movable production device 73. , shows the second performance position of the first movable performance device 73. The first effect position of "B" is the same as the first initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above, and the second effect position of "C" is the same as the second initial operation position in FIG. 59 described above. It's the location. In addition, below, it is simply described as "A,""B," and "C." Further, it is assumed that the operation in the movement process is the same as the initial operation mode shown in FIG.

(a) shows the performance mode of the above-mentioned "accessory notice". In other words, it indicates that "the movable performance device 1 is slightly lowered" while the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being displayed in a variable manner.
In this "accessories notice", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "B" in about "0.5S (second)" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation).
In addition, in (a) to (c), the movable presentation device 1 LED of the first movable presentation device 73 is lit (lights up) alternately in red and white.

(b) shows that the first movable presentation device 73 has moved to "B". When the first movable performance device 73 moves to "B", it stays at "B" for about "3S" (=about 12 cycles of fluctuation).
Such performance operation mode is designed to improve expectations for the awarding of a jackpot game.

(c) shows the mode of "movable performance device 1 return to origin" in "accessories notice". That is, when the first movable presentation device 73 is located at "B" for about "3S", it moves from "B" to "A" for about "0.8S" (=about 3 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a small descent related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than from "A" to "B". The relationship is such that the amount of time spent doing so is longer.
In particular, the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "A" than from "A" to "B," the production operation can be performed without placing a load on the drive source of the first movable production device 73. can be executed.

Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "B", the time spent stopping at "B" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "B" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "B".
Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the first movable presentation device 73 located at "B", and it is possible to improve the player's expectation of being awarded a jackpot game.

Moreover, when compared with the initial operation in FIG. The performance movement takes longer.
The reason for such a time relationship is that the situation in each operation scene is considered.
For example, when an initial movement is performed, it is only necessary for the worker (worker, game store clerk) to pay attention to the initial movement, so even if the operation takes a shorter time than the performance movement, the worker (worker, game store clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial behavior.
On the other hand, when a presentation operation is performed, for example, in addition to the accessory notice, various jackpot notice presentations may be performed in combination at the same time, and the range that the player pays attention to on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed for the same time as the initial operation or for a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it will be delayed in noticing that the jackpot preview performance using the first movable performance device 73 is being executed.
Therefore, the first movable performance device can be operated for a shorter time than the production action in the initial action to shorten the time related to the initial action, and at the same time be operated for a longer time than the initial action in the production action. This solves the concern that there would be a delay in noticing that a jackpot preview effect using 73 is being executed.

Moreover, when compared with the initial operation in FIG. In both cases, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "A" to "A" is higher in the performance operation than in the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, if the first movable presentation device 73 performs an initial operation while displaying a variable display, there is a risk that the player may mistake this for a presentation operation, but due to the difference in cycle variation as described above, the special symbol By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial action has been performed or a performance action has been performed. This can eliminate the misunderstandings mentioned above.

Furthermore, from the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the number of cycle fluctuations executed is greater in the production action than in the initial action; It is also possible to say that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable that each movement time and stop time be longer for the initial operation than for the presentation operation.

(d) shows the performance mode of jackpot notification in the above-mentioned "decision performance". In other words, it indicates that "one large descent of the movable performance device" has been performed.
In the jackpot notification in this "decisive performance", the first movable performance device 73 moves from "A" to "C" in about "1S (second)" (=about 4 cycle fluctuation).
In addition, the effect image EF, which was not displayed during the initial operation (FIG. 59), is displayed at a position (main display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable effect device 73 that has moved to “C”. The company emphasizes that it was a big hit.
Further, at the start of the movement of the first movable presentation device 73 from “A” to “C”, the LED of the movable presentation device 1 lights up (lights up) in a rainbow. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable presentation device 1 drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75, to move the first movable presentation device 73 from “A” to “C”, and also moves the first movable presentation device 73 from “A” to “C”. The movable performance device 1 LED (full color), which is a part of the , lights up (lights up) in a rainbow. The lighting (light-emitting) mode of the rainbow is a lighting (light-emitting) mode that definitively notifies that a jackpot has been won.

(e) shows a state in which the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "C". That is, when the first movable performance device 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for about "5S" (=about 20 cycle fluctuations).
In addition, even when the "stop" is performed, the movable production device 1 LED of the first movable production device 73 lights up (lights up) in a rainbow, and the position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable production device 73 (main An effect image EF is displayed on the display device 70).

(f) shows the mode of "movable performance device 1 return to origin" in jackpot notification of "decision performance". That is, after stopping for "5S" at "C", the first movable presentation device 73 moves from "C" to "A" over a period of about "2S" (=about 8 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the first movable performance device 73 performs a large descent related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, it takes longer to move from "C" to "A" than from "A" to "C". The relationship is such that the amount of time spent doing so is longer.
In particular, the first movable performance device 73 has a predetermined weight and is an accessory that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A". By taking a longer time to move from "A" to "C" than from "A" to "C," the production operation can be performed without placing a load on the drive source of the first movable production device 73. can be executed.

Also, when compared including the time spent stopping at "C", the time spent stopping at "C" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "C" to "A", and then "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from to "C".
As a result, for example, when the first movable presentation device 73 is stopped at "C", it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction at having won the jackpot, and the first movable presentation device 73 moves from "C" to "A". By taking more time to move from "A" to "C" than when moving from "A" to "C", the player can be immersed in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot, giving the player an even greater sense of satisfaction. I can do it.

Also, when compared with the initial motion in FIG. 59, the time taken to move from "A" to "C", the time to stop at "C", and the time to move from "C" to "A" are all longer than the initial motion. The performance movement takes longer.
The reasons for this time relationship are generally the same as those stated in sections (a) to (c) above, but since (d) to (f) are jackpot announcements, especially By making the stop time at ``C'' and the time to move from ``C'' to ``A'' longer than the initial movement, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction from hitting the jackpot. It also allows you to soak in the afterglow of hitting the jackpot.
In FIGS. 60(d) to 60(f), the explanation is given using the jackpot notification scene of the "determined performance" as an example, but the scene is not limited to this and may be applied to other scenes. For example, the present invention may be applied to a scene where a high-probability gaming state is to be awarded, or a time-saving gaming state is to be given.

Also, when compared with the initial operation in FIG. 59, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "A" to "C", the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the stop time at "C", In both cases, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "A" to "A" is higher in the performance operation than in the initial motion.
Therefore, for example, if the first movable presentation device 73 performs an initial operation while displaying a variable display, there is a risk that the player may mistake this for a presentation operation, but due to the difference in cycle variation as described above, the special symbol By visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations performed on the display, it becomes easier to distinguish whether an initial action has been performed or a performance action has been performed. This can eliminate the misunderstandings mentioned above.

Furthermore, from the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the number of cycle fluctuations executed is greater in the production action than in the initial action; It is also possible to say that the number of times is large. In this case, it is preferable that each movement time and stop time be longer for the initial operation than for the presentation operation.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationships described in FIGS. 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" and the travel time from "B" to "A" may be the same, or the travel time from "A" to "A" is longer than the travel time from "B" to "A". The travel time of "B" may be longer.
Further, although the stop (residence) time was the longest at "B" and "C", it may be the shortest, or it is not necessary to stop (stay) at "B" and "C".

(Specific example of the initial operation mode of the second movable production device and the time required for the production operation mode)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of the initial operation mode of the second movable presentation device 75 and the time required for the presentation operation mode.
First, "D" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the second movable production device 75, "E" indicates the initial operating position (= production position) of the second movable production device 75, In the following, they will be simply written as "D" and "E".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 61 are examples of the initial operation of the second movable presentation device 75 (movable presentation device 2) when a fluctuating display is performed when the power is restored. Explain.

(First a) shows the mode of "moving the movable presentation device 2" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "movement of movable performance device 2", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" over a period of approximately "0.5S (second)" (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, the robot moves from "D" to "E" all at once without stopping or the like in the middle.
Note that in (first a) to (first c), the movable presentation device 2 LED of the second movable presentation device 75 is off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows a state in which the second movable presentation device 75 is positioned (stopped) at "E" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it remains in position (stops) at "E" for about "0.25S" (=about one cycle fluctuation).

(First c) shows the mode of "movable presentation device 2 return to origin" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "movable performance device 2 return to origin", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "E" to "D" over a period of approximately "0.5S" (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, the robot moves from "E" to "D" all at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the second movable production device 75 performs the movement related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time to move from "D" to "E" and the time to move from "E" to "D" are The relationship is the same time (both approximately 0.5S). In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same number of times ( Both have a relationship of about 2 cycle fluctuation).

(Performance a) shows a production mode of the "weak development production" of the above-mentioned "blackout production". That is, it shows that "movement of the movable performance device 2" has been performed while the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being displayed in a variable manner.
In this "weak development performance", the second movable performance device 75 moves from "D" to "E" over a period of approximately "0.5S (second)" (=approximately 2 cycle fluctuation).
In addition, in (performance a) to (performance c), the movable presentation device 2 LED of the second movable presentation device 75 lights up (lights up) in green.

(Performance b) shows that the second movable presentation device 75 has moved to "E". When the second movable performance device 75 moves to "E", it stays at "E" for about "0.25S" (=about one cycle fluctuation).

(Exhibit c) shows the mode of "movable performance device 2 return to origin" in "weak development performance". That is, when the second movable effect device 75 is located at "E" for about "0.25S", it moves from "E" to "D" for about "0.5S" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the second movable performance device 75 moves related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time required to move from "D" to "E" and the time required to move from "E" to "D" are The relationship is the same time (both approximately 0.5S). In addition, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "D" to "E" and the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "E" to "D" are the same number of times ( Both have a relationship of about 2 cycle fluctuation).

Also, when comparing (first a) to (first c) and (performance a) to (performance c), the travel time from "D" to "E" is the same for both the initial movement and the production movement, The time to be located at "E" (stop time) is the same, and the time to move from "E" to "D" is the same. Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "D" to "E" will be the same number of times for the initial action and the production action (both approximately 2 cycle fluctuations), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "D" to "E" will be the same number of times (approximately 2 cycle fluctuations for both), The number of cycle fluctuations performed during the initial action and the presentation action is the same (both change by approximately one cycle), and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "E" to "D" is the same between the initial action and the presentation action. The same number of times (both changes about 2 cycles).

In this way, the second movable performance device 75 differs from the first movable performance device 73 in that the movement time and stop time (and the number of cycle fluctuations executed during these times) are different between the initial operation and the performance operation. It will be the same.
In particular, the second movable presentation device 75 is smaller in size and has a narrower movable range than the first movable presentation device 73, and like the first movable presentation device 73, it is a presentation device that can be operated with a “determined presentation”. isn't it.
Therefore, compared to the first movable presentation device 73, it can be said that this presentation device attracts less attention from players. As a result, it can be said that the first movable performance device 73 is less susceptible to misunderstandings (whether it is an initial action or a performance action) to the player. In such a movable performance device, by sharing the initial operation and the performance operation, data for driving the second movable performance device 75 can be shared.

Note that although the initial operation in FIG. 61 is explained using power restoration as an example, the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned instantaneous power outage occurs during variable display, the recovery operation and initialization operation are not executed. In this way, the event shown in FIG. 61 does not occur in all "power outages", but instantaneous power outages are excluded.

(Specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode and presentation operation mode of the sub display device)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a specific example of the time required for the initial operation mode of the sub-display device 71 and the presentation operation mode.
First, "F" indicates the origin position (standby position) of the sub display device 71, "G" indicates the initial operating position (= production position) of the sub display device 71, and in the following, They are simply written as "F" and "G".
Note that (first a), (first b), and (first c) in FIG. 62 will be described by taking as an example the initial operation of the sub display device 71 when a variable display is performed at the time of power restoration.

(First a) shows the mode of "sub-display device movement" (see FIG. 42). That is, in "sub display device movement", the sub display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.6 S (seconds)" (=about 2.5 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, the robot moves from "F" to "G" all at once without stopping in the middle.
Note that during (first a) to (first c), the sub display device LED of the sub display device 71 is off (see FIG. 42).

(First b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 71 is positioned at "G" (stopped) (the "stopped" position is omitted in FIG. 42). That is, when the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", it remains in position (stops) at "G" for about "3S" (=about 12 cycles of fluctuation).

(First c) shows the mode of "sub-display device origin return" (see FIG. 42). That is, in the "sub display device origin return", the sub display device 71 moves from "G" to "F" over a period of about "0.3 S" (=about 1.25 cycle fluctuation). In this movement, the robot moves from "G" to "F" all at once without stopping in the middle.

In this way, when the sub display device 71 performs a movement related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time taken to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time taken to move from "G" to "F". The relationship is such that it is longer. Also, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , and so on.
In particular, since the sub-display device 71 has a predetermined amount of weight and is an accessory that moves upward from "F" (in a direction opposed to the vertical direction), the movement is particularly opposed to the vertical direction. By setting the time required to move from "F" to "G" longer than the time required to move from "G" to "F", the initial operation can be performed without placing a load on the drive source of the sub display device 71. can be executed.
Also, when compared including the time spent at "G", the time spent stopping at "G" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "F" to "G", and then from "G" to " The relationship is such that the time it takes to move to "F".
As a result, for example, it is possible to use the time when the sub-display device 71 is stopped at "G" to have a worker (worker, game store clerk) check whether there is any problem with the sub-display device 71. can.

(Performance a) shows the performance mode of the "strong development performance" of the above-mentioned "blackout performance". In other words, it indicates that the "sub display device movement" has been performed while the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being displayed in a variable manner.
In this "strong development effect", the sub-display device 71 moves from "F" to "G" in about "0.8 S (seconds)" (=about 3 cycle fluctuation).
Note that in (a) to (c), the sub-display device LED of the sub-display device 71 lights up (lights up) in green.

(Exhibit b) shows that the sub display device 71 has moved to "G". When the sub-display device 71 moves to "G", it stays at that "G" for about "4S" (=about 16 cycles of fluctuation).

(Exhibit c) shows the mode of "sub-display device origin return" in "strong development effect". That is, when the sub-display device 71 is located at "G" for about "4S", it moves from "G" to "F" over about "0.5S" (=about 2 cycle fluctuation).

In this way, when the sub-display device 71 moves related to the performance operation and returns to the origin position, the time taken to move from "F" to "G" is longer than the time taken to move from "G" to "F". The relationship is such that it is longer. Also, along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "F" to "G" is greater than the number of cycle fluctuations performed while moving from "G" to "F". , and so on.

Also, when comparing (first a) to (first c) and (performance a) to (performance c), the moving time from "F" to "G", the stopping time at "G", and the "G" In any of the travel times from "F" to "F", the performance motion is longer than the initial motion.
The reason for such a time relationship is that the situation in each operation scene is considered.
For example, when an initial movement is performed, it is only necessary for the worker (worker, game store clerk) to pay attention to the initial movement, so even if the operation takes a shorter time than the performance movement, the worker (worker, game store clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial behavior.
On the other hand, when a performance operation is performed, for example, in addition to the blackout performance, various jackpot preview performances may be performed in combination at the same time, and the range that the player pays attention to on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed for the same time as the initial operation or for a shorter time than the initial operation, there is a concern that it will be delayed in noticing that the jackpot preview performance using the sub-display device 71 is being executed.
Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened by operating the initial operation for a shorter time than the presentation operation, while the sub-display device 71 can be operated for a longer period of time during the presentation operation than the initial operation. This eliminates the concern that there may be a delay in noticing that the jackpot preview effect used is being executed.

Also, when comparing (first a) to (first c) and (act a) to (act c), we can see that the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "F" to "G" and "G" In both the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the stop time at , and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the movement time from "G" to "F", the production operation is executed more than the initial operation. The relationship is such that the number of cycle fluctuations is large.
Therefore, for example, if the sub-display device 71 performs an initial operation while displaying fluctuations, there is a risk that the player may mistake this for a performance operation, but due to the difference in cycle fluctuations as described above, the special symbol display If you visually observe the number of cycle fluctuations performed, it will be easier to distinguish whether an initial action or a performance action has been performed. This can eliminate the misunderstandings mentioned above.

Furthermore, from the above-mentioned effects, it is not limited to the fact that the number of cycle fluctuations executed is greater in the production action than in the initial action; It is also possible to specify a large number of times. In this case, it is preferable that each movement time and stop time be longer for the initial operation than for the presentation operation.

Note that the required time shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is only an example, and may be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time relationship described in FIG. 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "F" to "G" may be the same as the travel time from "G" to "F", or the travel time from "G" to "G" is longer than the travel time from "F" to "G". The travel time of "F" may be longer.
Further, although the stop (residence) time is the longest at "G", it may be the shortest, or the stop (residence) time does not have to be at "G".

Note that although the initial operation in FIG. 62 is explained using power restoration as an example, the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned instantaneous power outage occurs during variable display, the recovery operation and initialization operation are not executed. In this way, the event shown in FIG. 62 does not occur in all "power outages", but instantaneous power outages are excluded.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated during setting change will be described using FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting changes.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting change mode. This is a pre-start state before game progress control is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, settings change notifications are provided to notify you that settings are being changed and to prompt you to check the operation of various drive sources (settings change screen display, settings change sound "Settings are being changed" and initial operation confirmation sound "Solenoid operation is also confirmed.") "Please confirm" is output alternately). In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of the various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the various drives continue from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source repeatedly turns on and off.

At timing T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are activated. At the same time, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started. At the same time, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started. At the same time, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on (the setting key switch 112a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. The state is before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, setting confirmation notifications are displayed to indicate that the settings are being checked and to encourage operation confirmation of various drive sources (setting confirmation screen display, setting confirmation voice ``Settings are being checked'' and initial operation confirmation voice ``Solenoid operation is also confirmed.'') "Please confirm" is output alternately). In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a game ready state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started. At the same time, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the first movable presentation device 73 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 48, Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first opening/closing solenoid 51b, second opening/closing opening/closing opening solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51, second winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store (including replacing only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) ), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main Information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display) 65, the number of rounds display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that unnecessary processing load is not applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources This makes it possible to concentrate on checking the operation of the system.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the user is prompted to confirm that the settings are being changed and to confirm the operation of the various drive sources. Setting change notification (RWM clear preparation notification to indicate that RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification to indicate that setting confirmation is in progress and to urge operation confirmation of various drive sources) As a result, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and to check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible to make it happen.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated. , it is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the pre-start state ends due to a setting value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation is performed immediately even before the operating time of each drive source has elapsed. Since the operation of the various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources will not be performed in a state where the game is ready, and the operation of the various drive sources will not be confused with the operation of the various drive sources as the game progresses. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences.

Further, according to the present embodiment, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the state in which the game can be played, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the grand prize opening LED, and to check the operation properly. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning hole 50 and Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big prize opening is open, it is possible to avoid giving an unnecessary processing load to the main control board 110, and also to prevent the gaming machine 1 This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is permitted), so that the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By doing so, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience for the game parlor can be ensured.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, "drive source initial operation in progress" or "please check solenoid operation" prompts visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources. Although characters such as , etc. were not displayed, such characters may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of initial operation of various drive sources)
Hereinafter, modifications of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that this modification differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation process is performed after the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change in the modified example will be described using FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after changing settings in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting change mode. This is a pre-start state before game progress control is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are completed, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started, and the information display At step 113, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated after RWM clear in a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM clear in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, the right-hand display 67), the main display 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, initial operation notification (display of initial operation screen, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt operation confirmation of various drive sources.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started. At the same time, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking settings)
With reference to FIG. 68, a specific example will be described in which various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation in the modified example. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation in a modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, game results such as changing whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) (difficulty level of ball entering) Various drive sources (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b, The first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 59 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), main display 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on (the setting key switch 112a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. The state is before the start. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed at the timing T2, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are finished, the initial operations of various drive sources are started, and 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is The setting value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second movable performance device 75, sub display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control board 130 are started. At the same time, all seven segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operations of the various accessories end after the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second starting opening opening/closing member 48, the first big prize opening opening/closing member 48) that influence the result of the game Initial operation of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first opening/closing solenoid 51b, second opening/closing opening/closing opening solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51, second winning opening opening/closing member 57) Therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store (including replacing only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) ), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main Information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display) 65, the number of rounds display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that unnecessary processing load is not applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources This makes it possible to concentrate on checking the operation of the system.

Furthermore, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initially operated, initial operation notification is performed to prompt the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. As a result, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and to have the operator check the operation appropriately. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the start of game progress control, the result of the game is not affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the various drive sources used to operate the movable body to be supplied are initially operated, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , it becomes possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the operation standby time has elapsed after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are activated. Since the operation is started, it is possible to have enough time between the end of setting changes (setting confirmation) and the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed after the setting change mode ends or after the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode has ended, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of time required (shorten the development period, etc.).

Moreover, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the grand prize opening LED, and to check the operation properly. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to this modification, initial operations of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are performed in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, and the game progress control is performed. Since the initial operation of the first movable performance device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the state where the game is possible, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation check can be performed appropriately. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big prize opening is open, it is possible to avoid giving an unnecessary processing load to the main control board 110, and also to prevent the gaming machine 1 This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 until the gaming progress control is started after the gaming machine is powered on (the performance information is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110.

In addition, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of performance information is allowed), so the game It is possible to confirm whether or not progress control has been started, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. By not displaying performance information, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and convenience for the game parlor can be ensured.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the setting values and performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that it is difficult to check the initial operation of the various drive sources. This allows the employees of the game parlor to concentrate on this, making it possible to accurately determine failures of various drive sources.

(Example of display on special symbol display)
A display example of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 60, second special symbol display device 61) will be explained using FIG. 69.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the special symbol display displays a losing special symbol in which the rightmost LED lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the display mode becomes such that two LEDs light up from the left end, and thereafter (after 32 ms), as shown in FIG. 69(c) to (i ), the display mode is such that the lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, and by continuing this for 8 timer interrupts, the same LED remains lit for 32 ms.

69(b) to 69(i) are repeated for one cycle (=256 ms), and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, FIGS. 69(j) to (m ) any of the special symbols (loss special symbol, first jackpot special symbol, second jackpot special symbol, third jackpot special symbol) are stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the next special symbol variable display starts after the stop time has elapsed, cycle variation is performed multiple times from the display mode of FIG. 69(b), and any of FIGS. 69(j) to (m) The special symbol is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds = 500ms).

Note that in cycle variation, two LEDs are turned on and their lighting positions are changed (moved), but it is also possible to turn on one LED and change its lighting position, or to turn on three or more LEDs. Alternatively, the LED may be turned on and its lighting position may be changed.

In addition, regarding cycle fluctuations, 8 types of display modes are considered as 1 cycle, but 2 types of display modes (for example, all lights on and all lights off) may be considered as 1 cycle, or 3 or more types of display modes may be considered as 1 cycle. Good too. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle be shorter than the stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In addition, in this embodiment, a small winning game in which the variable prize winning section is kept open for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but when executing a small winning game, after performing cycle fluctuations multiple times. It is preferable to stop displaying the small winning special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small winning special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Example of production for each production mode)
Using FIG. 70, display performance examples (pre-fluctuation operations, etc.) for each performance mode will be described.

In production mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The production pattern 70a is displayed in a first mode (a rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

The production pattern 70a of the first aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests that this scroll display starts, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is made for 0.75 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a first form (hexagonal shape). The normal icon in the first aspect displays a swinging motion (direction motion) on the main display device 70 from a first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left to a second posture tilting to the right and then returning to the first posture. During display, the display is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In production mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The production pattern 70a is displayed in a second mode (a lantern-shaped base image BG, a character image CG, a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

The production pattern 70a in the second mode performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variable production, but as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update operation), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size. This is done for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the first reserved icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a second mode (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second mode displays a swinging motion (direction motion) on the main display device 70 from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left to the second posture tilting to the right and back to the first posture. During display, the display is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In production mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The production pattern 70a is displayed in a third mode (R-beveled rectangular base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by R-beveled hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is common to all production modes. Displayed in a common manner (numeric image).

The production pattern 70a of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (updated variation), an enlarged display of the production pattern 70a is performed. This is done for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, icon display area 70C), if it is a normal icon, it is displayed in a third mode (star shape). The normal icon in the third aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the top, moves to the second posture in which the specific top moves, and then returns to the first posture (direction). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode D (probability-variable gaming state), as shown in FIG. 70(c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The production pattern 70a is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes.

The production pattern 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests the start of this scroll display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is made for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a fourth mode (round shape). The normal icon in the fourth aspect rotates from the first attitude (initial attitude) with the black dot at the top, moves to the second attitude where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first attitude (direction). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode E (probability-variable gaming state), as shown in FIG. The production pattern 70a is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image, number image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes.

The production pattern 70a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests the start of this scroll display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is made for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a fourth mode (round shape). The normal icon in the fourth aspect rotates from the first attitude (initial attitude) with the black dot at the top, moves to the second attitude where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first attitude (direction). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at one cycle of 3 seconds.

In production mode F (time-saving gaming state), as shown in FIG. 70(f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation) while being displayed on the main display device 70, The production pattern 70a is displayed in a fourth mode (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numeric image) common to all production modes.

The production pattern 70a of the fourth mode performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variable production, but as a pre-variation action that suggests that this scroll display starts, the production pattern 70a is reduced to 0. .It is designed to last for 4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a fifth form (pentagonal shape). The normal icon in the fifth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the top, moves to the second posture in which the specific top moves, and then returns to the first posture (direction). During the display on the main display device 70, the operation) is always repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds.

In addition, in production modes A to F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second reserved icon display area 70D, icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common mode common to all production modes ( displayed in a round shape). The special icon of the common mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the top, moves to the second posture in which the specific part moves, and then returns to the first posture (direction movement). ) is always repeated at a cycle of 2.5 seconds while being displayed on the main display device 70.

In addition, in production modes A to F, the special symbol TZ that is displayed in a common manner (number image) is now scrolled downward (updated variation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the variation production. The update operation of repeatedly updating the numeric images 1 to 9 is performed repeatedly at one cycle of 0.9 seconds. In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is suggested that a variation effect is being executed by performing an update variation.

In this way, the performance that changes between the first posture and the second posture in the performance motion (swing motion, rotation motion) of the hold icon is controlled by the LED on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61). It is designed to be repeatedly executed at a cycle (2 or 3 seconds) that is different from the lighting mode change cycle (32 ms) or one cycle cycle (256 ms). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing a performance operation, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

In addition, the blinking cycle of the LED on the sub-first variable display 81 (second sub-variable display 82) is adjusted to show the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the presentation operation (swinging motion, rotating motion) of the hold icon. (1 second) is repeated at a different period (2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing a performance operation, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

Further, in the variation performance, the performance pattern 70a performs any one of a plurality of types of pre-variation operations (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the time until the performance pattern 70a performs the scroll display (update fluctuation) differs depending on which of the multiple types of pre-fluctuation operations (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance pattern 70a has performed in the fluctuation performance. It seems that there are cases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 70a performs any of the multiple types of pre-fluctuation actions (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the fluctuation performance, the pre-fluctuation actions or scroll display (updated display) of the three performance symbols 70a (variation) may be started in the same order (left → center → right).

In addition, depending on which of the multiple types of pre-fluctuation actions (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) the performance symbol 70a has performed in the fluctuating performance, the pre-fluctuation motion or scroll display (update fluctuation) of the three performance symbols 70a may be changed. The starting order may be different (elevating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, reduced display: right → middle → left, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-fluctuation motions of the performance symbols 70a may be provided for each performance mode so that the jackpot expectation level is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each presentation mode so as not to create expectations for a big hit.

(Example of production for each production mode)
Examples of display effects (pre-stop operations, etc.) for each effect mode will be explained using FIG. 71. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those in FIG. 70 will be omitted.

In production mode A (normal game state), the production pattern 70a in the first mode performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-stop action that suggests that this scroll display ends. , the character image CG of the effect pattern 70a shakes its head at the pattern stop position for 0.9 seconds (see FIG. 79).

In performance mode B (normal game state), the performance symbols 70a in the second mode perform a downward scroll display (update fluctuation) in a variable performance, but before stopping before ending this scroll display (update operation). As for the operation, the production pattern 70a is reduced to normal display for 0.5 seconds at the pattern stop position.

In production mode C (normal game state), the production pattern 70a in the third mode performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in a variable production, but before stopping before ending this scroll display (update variation). As an operation, the performance symbol 70a is rotated and displayed for 0.7 seconds at the symbol stop position.

In production mode D (probability variable gaming state), the production pattern 70a in the fourth mode performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-stop action indicating that this scroll display is finished. , a bounce display in which the symbol floats upward from the symbol stop position and then descends downward is performed for 0.4 seconds. Note that the bounce display is similar in effect to the above-mentioned floating display, but the movement speed of the effect symbol 70a is faster in the bounce display, and the height of the float is also lower.

In production mode E (variable probability game state), the production pattern 70a in the fourth mode performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-stop action that suggests that this scroll display ends. , the rotation (small) display of the effect pattern 70a is performed for 0.4 seconds at the pattern stop position.

In performance mode F (time-saving game state), the performance pattern 70a in the fourth mode performs a downward scroll display (updated fluctuation) in a variable performance, but as a pre-stop action that suggests that this scroll display ends. , a bounce (small) display that floats upward from the symbol stop position is displayed for 0.4 seconds.

In this way, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a displays one of multiple types of pre-stop motions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display). It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the fluctuating performance, which of the multiple types of pre-stop motions (shaking head display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display) was executed by the production pattern 70a? Depending on the situation, the time it takes for the effect pattern 70a to stop display may vary. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a performs any of multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) in the variable production. However, the order of the pre-stop movements and temporary stops of the three performance symbols 70a may be made the same (left→right→center).

Also, in the fluctuating performance, which of the multiple types of pre-stop motions (shaking head display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display) was executed by the production pattern 70a? Depending on the situation, the order of the pre-stop motion or temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a may be made different (shaking head display: left → right → middle, rotating display: left → middle → right, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-stop motion of the performance symbol 70a may be provided for each performance mode so that the jackpot expectation level is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the pending icon may be set to one type for each presentation mode so as not to create expectations for a big hit.

(Example of display display of pending number)
An example of display effect of the number of reservations on the main display device 70 will be explained using FIG. 72.

First, when the number of reservations is "0" and the customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, as shown in FIG. “0” is displayed in each of the display area SA and the second reservation number display area SB.

After that, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the first pending number becomes "1", the normal display is displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B, as shown in FIG. The pending icon HI of the mode is additionally displayed (increased display) in one frame of non-animation, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display) in one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the production motion (swinging motion) is started from there.

Then, when the first reservation number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the reservation displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation that shifts and displays the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C (decrease display, change display) is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA becomes "0" in one frame of non-animation. Updated (decreased display). At this time, the pending icon HI changes its transparency from opaque and is displayed semi-transparently, but the presentation action (shaking action) continues.

Thereafter, when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a larger size than the hold icon HI and is opaque, and the effect movement (shaking movement) is completed. ) will continue to be carried out.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the first pending number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 72(e), the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display) in 1 frame of non-animation. be done. At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI starts its production operation (shaking operation) in synchronization with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and the semi-transparent minimal The image will be enlarged from normal size to normal size. In other words, in a state where the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the display of the pending icon HI may not start from the first attitude (initial attitude).

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in a normal size and opaque, as shown in FIG. 72(f). The performance motion (swaying motion) continues.

After that, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the first pending number becomes "2", and it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 72(g), A 20-frame animation is started in which the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) in the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the first hold icon HI is displayed in the second display area SA. The pending number is updated to "2" (increased display) with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI has a production motion (rotation motion) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the top. The display starts and is enlarged from a translucent micro size to a normal size along with an effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) is completed, as shown in FIG. 72(h), the additionally displayed hold icon HI of the first special mode (blue) is It is displayed in a normal size and opaque, and the effect movement (rotation movement) continues.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 72(i), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with its transparency gradually increasing along with the effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance operation (shaking motion) is performed.

After that, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 72(j), the two displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation that shifts and displays (decreases) the two pending icons HI toward the icon display area 70C starts, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" in one frame of non-animation. (decreased display). At this time, the two pending icons HI change their transparency from opaque and are displayed semi-transparently, but the performance operations (shaking motion, rotation motion) continue to be performed.

When the shift display of the two hold icons HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 72(k), the hold icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first display part of the first hold icon display area 70B is The icon TI is displayed in a larger size than the pending icon HI and is opaque, and the presentation action (shaking action) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode that was displayed on the second display part of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed in the first display part in a normal size and opaque, and the icon changes accordingly. The effect changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon), but the effect operation (rotation operation) continues.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and the first reservation number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 72(l), the second display section of the first reservation icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is updated to "2" (increased display) in 1 frame of non-animation. be done. At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI starts its production operation (shaking operation) in synchronization with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and the semi-transparent minimal The image will be enlarged from normal size to normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed pending icon HI in the normal display mode is displayed in a normal size and opaque, as shown in FIG. 72(m). The performance motion (swaying motion) continues.

In this state, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 72(n), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. Animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with its transparency gradually increasing along with the effect image, but even during the erased display, a performance operation (shaking motion) is performed.

After that, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 72(o), the effect displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B A 20-frame animation is started in which the two pending icons HI in operation are shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is displayed as " 1” (decreased display). At this time, the two pending icons HI change their transparency from opaque and are displayed semi-transparently, but the performance operations (shaking motion, rotation motion) continue to be performed.

At this time, if the conditions for switching from production mode A to production mode B are satisfied, as shown in FIG. etc.) are displayed, and the icons in the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are visible. Regulated.

Then, in the layer behind the occluded image, as shown in FIG. 72(q), the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, and the pending icon HI is displayed in the normal display corresponding to presentation mode B. The mode is switched to the hold icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the production motion (swinging motion) is started from there.

Then, when the shielding image is erased, as shown in FIG. 72(r), the pending icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI in the special display mode can be visually recognized.

Note that even when multiple hold icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display The presentation operation is performed so that the plurality of pending icons of the mode are synchronized.

In addition, here, we have mainly explained the hold display example in production mode A, but other production modes also differ in the display mode of the hold icon and the operation production mode, but basically the same number of pending displays (production (including display when switching modes).

The first feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of reservations increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the reservation number and the reservation icon are not animated. The point is that the increase display is performed in a period of one frame, which is the shortest. By doing this, it is possible to immediately perform a variable performance (display of a decreased number of pending numbers and a decreased display of a pending icon) without delay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of pending numbers decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animation (one frame) display of the pending number decreases; Another point is that a change display (decreasing display) of the pending icon to the icon by animation (20 frames) is executed (starts at the same frame update timing). By doing this, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of pending games has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the timing at which the display of a decrease in the pending number starts (frame update timing) is longer than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) starts (frame update timing). It is also possible to set it to the previous frame (for example, one frame earlier).

A third feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that from the timing (frame update timing) when the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) is completed. However, the timing (frame update timing) at which the reduction display of the pending number is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reservations has decreased based on the number of reservations, while presenting the effect that the number of reservations is changing, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the timing at which the display of a decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update timing) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) is completed (frame update timing). (For example, one frame before).

A fourth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations is increased by non-animation (one frame), and the reservation icon is displayed. An example of this is that an animation (20 frames) of increasing display is executed (starts at the same frame update timing). By doing this, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the timing at which the increasing display of pending icons starts (frame update timing) is preceded by the timing at which the increasing display of pending numbers starts (frame update timing) and the timing at which it ends (frame update timing) (for example, one frame earlier). ).

A fifth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the increasing display of the pending number is completed before the timing (frame update timing) at which the additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon is completed. The point is that the timing (frame update timing) is faster. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the number of reservations has increased based on the number of reservations, while presenting the effect that the number of reservations is changing, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the number of reservations increases during the variable display of special symbols (variation production), compared to the case where the number of reservations increases while waiting for a customer. Another problem is that additional display (increased display) of pending icons is performed over a long period (long number of frames). By doing this, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is the production operation mode (operating while enlarging) at the start of displaying an increasing number of pending icons (display start) and the completion of displaying an increasing number of pending icons (display). The difference (partially different) is that the performance operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start) is different (partially different). By doing this, it is possible for the player to understand that the number of pending games has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that not only a part of the operations may be different between the start of displaying an increasing number of pending icons and after the display of an increasing number of pending icons is completed, but all operations may be different.

The eighth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the display mode at the start of increasing display of pending icons (semi-transparent) and the display mode after completion of increasing display of pending icons (opaque) are as follows. There are some points that are different (partially different). By doing this, it is possible for the player to understand that the number of pending games has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that not only the transparency but also the shape or the like may be made different between the start of increasing display of pending icons and the end of increasing display.

A ninth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that during the variable display of special symbols (production symbols), a production operation in which the hold icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture ( One point is that it is possible to perform swinging motions, rotational motions, etc.). By doing this, it is possible to improve the production effect by the hold icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that in the production motion (swaying motion, rotating motion) in which the reserved icon and the icon repeatedly change between the first posture and the second posture, The point is that the time for changing to the second posture is constant every time. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the hold icon and the icon become difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, if the pending icon and the icon change from the first attitude to the second attitude, if the control load of the drawing process is large and the processing fails (one frame cannot be drawn), the icon changes from the first attitude to the second attitude. At that time, the time required to change to the second posture is not constant, but approximately constant.

The eleventh feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that during the variable display of special symbols (variable production), a plurality of icons (pending icons together, a pending icon and the relevant icon) are displayed in the normal display mode. One point is that the two perform the performance actions in synchronization. By doing this, it is possible to improve the visual appearance of the presentation motion of the icon and improve the presentation effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the timing at which the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new starting prize is synchronized with the presentation action of other pending icons may be at the start of the display, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the display. It may be the time, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

The twelfth feature of the production examples shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that when a special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased, but after the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, the next icon is One point is that the pending icon repeatedly performs the presentation operation even before the variable display (variable presentation) starts. By doing this, the player can be informed by the hold icon that the number of holds is not "0", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirteenth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, the transparency of the production symbol does not change, but the transparency of the icon increases and then disappears. There are several points that can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when erasing the icon and to naturally erase the icon, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the time (length) of one cycle of the production operation of the pending icon (the icon) is different between the first production mode and the second production mode (production mode). There are some points that are the same between mode A, production mode B, and production modes C to F. By doing this, it is possible to easily see the presentation operation of the pending icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifteenth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the cycle in which the pending icon (the icon) changes from the first posture to the second posture and then back to the first posture is different from the first production mode. There are points that are the same as the second performance mode (performance mode A, performance mode B, and performance modes C to F). By doing this, it is possible to easily see the presentation operation of the pending icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that in the pending number display area, the size (area) of the area where the pending number is displayed does not change depending on the increase or decrease in the pending number, but in the pending icon display area, The size (area) of the area where the pending icon is displayed changes depending on the increase or decrease in the pending number (if there is a single pending number, the pending icon is displayed in the first area, and if there is a plurality of pending numbers, (The hold icon is displayed in a second area that is larger than the first area.) By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of pending games and also to understand the increase/decrease in the number of pending games, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) performs a production operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture in the first cycle. The pending icon displayed in a special display mode (special icon) that can be executed repeatedly in (2 or 3 seconds) and has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal display mode changes into the first posture and the second posture. An advantage of this feature is that the performance action can be repeatedly performed in a second cycle (2.5 seconds) that is different from the first cycle. By doing this, it becomes easier to distinguish between the hold icon in the normal display mode and the hold icon in the special display mode, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the special symbol updates the number image from 1 to 9 (scroll display, switching display) in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). This is possible, and the point is that the hold icon can perform a presentation operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture in a second period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) that is different from the first period. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the update fluctuation of the special symbol and the production operation of the pending icon are linked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature of the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the number of reservations is displayed decreasing with the start of the variable display of special symbols, and in this decreasing display, the number of reservations displayed in the reservation number display area is The number does not move, but the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area does move (before the pending number decreased, the pending icon was displayed in the second area, which was larger than the first area, and the pending number decreased) After that, a hold icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of pending games and also to understand the decrease in the number of pending holds, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 20th feature related to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is the movement direction (downward) in the update operation of the production symbol (special symbol), and the movement direction (left-right direction) in the production motion (shaking motion) of the hold icon. etc.). By doing this, it becomes easier to separate and recognize the update fluctuations of the performance symbols (special symbols) and the performance motion (shaking motion) of the pending icon, thereby increasing the performance effect in the fluctuation performance and increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, if the number of pending customers increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the pending icon is displayed incremented with one frame of non-animation. In order to continue for a longer period of time, the animation may be increased and displayed using multiple frames (for example, 5 frames). In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon is designed to perform the production operation even while the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, but while the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, the reservation icon stops the production operation, and the next The presentation operation of the pending icon may be restarted after the shift display of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbol (reduction in the number of pending items). In this way, the player can understand whether or not the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner based on the presence or absence of the presentation operation of the hold icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when restarting the performance operation of the hold icon after the shift display of the hold icon, even if the hold icon resumes the performance operation from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (the hold icon display area, the icon display area). good. In this way, it is possible to give an impression to the player that the variable display of the special symbols has newly started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed and the icon is erased and displayed, the icon continues to perform the production operation, but when the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed, the production is performed. The operation may be terminated. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load related to display control.

In addition, multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (pending icons, a pending icon and the relevant icon) are designed to synchronize and perform their effects, but they do not perform their effects in complete synchronization. , the performance operations may be performed substantially synchronously. Note that the timing at which the presentation behavior of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new starting prize is approximately synchronized with the presentation behavior of other pending icons may be at the start of the display, or within a predetermined period of time from the start of the display. It may be at the elapsed time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

(Specific example of when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
With reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, a specific example of a case where a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state will be described.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart when the fluctuating effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 74 to 75 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 73. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 73, the machine is in a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols has not been executed since the power was turned on, and production mode A and volume value "3" are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 60 displays a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED is lit), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the main display 70 displays a waiting state for execution of the variable effect. The fluctuation standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolling (production operation), and the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are in a state where "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is stopped and displayed ( (See FIG. 74(a)). Note that the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 73, when the upper button or lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the main display device 70 displays a screen that partially overlaps the front side of the right performance symbol 70a. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "3" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a volume confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value "3" (see FIG. 74(b)). ).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 73, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to a volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the audio output device 9 outputs a volume confirmation sound (for 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the volume value "4". It is output (see FIG. 74(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 73, when an operation is performed to lower the volume using the changeover switch 22, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but because the volume is adjusted by the changeover switch 22, the audio output device 9 updates the volume value image OG to indicate the volume value "3". No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 74(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 73, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1", the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays "1", and the main A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first prefetch designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 74(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 73, when the first pending number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start command (special symbol A storage designation command, a gaming state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (first cycle variation) (FIG. 74(f) reference).

Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the production control board 130 received the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 display "1", and the first pending icon display area A pending icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner on the first display section of 70B, and output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 74(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T6 in FIG. 73 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the start command, the first pending number display area The SA and sub-first hold display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts (see FIG. 75(g)).

Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B starts to be shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the production symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-fluctuation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audio output device 9 starts audible output of the fluctuating BGM (FIG. 75). g)).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the fluctuation BGM at the start of the floating display as the pre-fluctuation action of the production pattern 70a, a fluctuation start sound (starting sound output every fluctuation, starting sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You can do it like this.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 73 (the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 75(h)), and at the timing of T8 in FIG. ), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), and then the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a starts (see FIG. 75(i)), and At timing T9, high-speed fluctuation of all the effect symbols 70a starts (see FIG. 75(j)). When outputting the fluctuation start sound, it is preferable that the output of the fluctuation start sound ends at this timing (later than the output of the winning sound ends).

In addition, if the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command while displaying the volume value image OG, the variable display of the special symbol will be executed, but since the variation production will not be executed, the volume value image The display period is extended without erasing the OG, and the state in which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible is maintained.

Furthermore, even when the light amount value image is displayed by operating the left or right button of the cross key 19 instead of the volume value image OG, the same is basically the case when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

In this way, when a variable effect is started while waiting for a customer (a period in which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are now regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important phase of starting the variable performance due to concentrating on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG can be visually recognized even if the display period (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) of the volume value image OG has not elapsed. are now regulated (erased). Therefore, the volume value image OG does not hinder the variation performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed. Regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22, a volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to understand the newly set volume value, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variation production, the production pattern 70a performs the pre-variation operation (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) and then starts the scroll display (updated display), but the special symbol TZ performs the update variation without performing the pre-variation operation. (scroll display, switching display). Therefore, the performance effect of the fluctuating performance can be enhanced by the pre-fluctuation movement of the performance symbol 70a, and the player can be made aware that the fluctuating display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol TZ, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, in the variation performance, the special symbol TZ starts update variation (scroll display, switching display) before the production pattern 70a starts scroll display (update variation). Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol TZ, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pending display (the pending icon and pending numbers on the main display device 70, the LED pending display on the sub-first pending display 83 and the sub-second pending display 84) is updated in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the variation production, the shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) is started before the production pattern 70a starts scroll display (update variation). Therefore, the player can quickly sense that the number of pending memories has decreased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update fluctuation) in the fluctuation performance, the shift display of the pending icon (change to the icon TI) ends. Therefore, since the number of pending memories is reduced, it becomes easier for the player to understand the flow of the game in which the variable performance (scrolling display of the performance symbols 70a) is performed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even before the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling display (update fluctuation) (during stop display of the effect pattern 70a, pre-fluctuation movement), the hold icon HI performs the effect movement (swinging movement, rotating movement). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, even at the start of the scroll display (updating fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a, the icon TI performs a performance operation (swinging motion, rotating motion). Therefore, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the icon TI and to appeal that a variable performance is to be started, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, even at the start of the pre-fluctuation operation (levitating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the effect pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image to be described later) is changed to the effect operation (horizontal scroll, (scene changes, character movements included in background images, etc.). Therefore, together with the performance symbols 70a, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even at the start of the scroll display (update fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the background image (background image corresponding to each production mode, zone background image to be described later) is included in the production operation (horizontal scroll, scene change, background image). (e.g., the character's actions). Therefore, together with the performance symbols 70a, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when a variable production is started from a customer waiting state, the audible output of variable BGM (BGM according to each production mode) starts at the start of the pre-variation operation (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the production pattern 70a. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, at the start of the scroll display (updating fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a, the fluctuation BGM (BGM corresponding to each performance mode) has already been audibly output. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced even before the scrolling display of the performance symbols 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (later than the start timing of the first cycle variation). , after the end timing of the first cycle variation), the scroll display (updated variation) of the effect pattern 70a in the variation effect is started, that is, the two are started without intentionally synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the scroll display of the performance symbol 70a is not required, making it possible to reduce the control load and the development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbol fluctuations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the timing of the second and third cycle fluctuations). After the start timing and before the start timing of the fourth cycle variation), scrolling display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a in the variation effect is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a match, the user may mistakenly think that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the scroll display of the production pattern 70a. This makes it possible to avoid such inconveniences.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) performs a variable display of special symbols, after the first cycle variation is finished, the scroll display (update variation) of the production symbol 70a is started. It looks like this. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbols and the scrolling display of the performance symbols 70a in stages, the performance effect of the game performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main symbol and the performance symbol 70a is in a subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player aware of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (later than the start timing of the first cycle variation). , before the end timing of the first cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started, that is, the two are started without intentionally synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation display with the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is no longer necessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (the end timing of the first cycle variation). (before the start timing of the second cycle variation), the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ is started. Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations with the start timing of the update fluctuations (scroll display, switching display) of the special symbol TZ, the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation display will be the same as the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ ( This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding that it is the start time of scrolling display, switching display).

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle variation when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the update variation (scroll display) of the special symbol TZ is started. , switching display), that is, the two are started without intentionally synchronizing them. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of the first display change in the cycle variation and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the special pattern TZ is no longer necessary, reducing the control load and development burden. becomes possible. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main one and the special symbol TZ is in a subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player aware of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (later than the start timing of the first cycle variation). , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the hold display (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84) In other words, the update is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the update of the pending display becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (the end timing of the first cycle variation). (before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the hold display (the hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84), The update of the LED pending display will start. Therefore, if the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations matches the update start timing of the pending display, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the special symbol variable display is the time to start updating the pending display. becomes possible.

In addition, after the first display change in the cycle variation when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), a pending display (on the main display 70) is started. The update of the hold icon, hold number, and LED hold display on the sub-first hold display 83 and sub-second hold display 84 is started, that is, it is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. . Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the update of the pending display becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development burden. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the pending display has been updated since the variable display of the special symbols has started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (later than the start timing of the first cycle variation). , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, the shift display of the hold icon HI is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI is no longer necessary, making it possible to reduce the control load and the development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (start timing of the second cycle variation). (before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI match, people may mistakenly think that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the start time of the shift display of the hold icon HI. This makes it possible to avoid such inconveniences.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbols in a variable manner, the shift display (decreasing display) of the pending icon HI ends after the first cycle variation is completed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player an impression that the pending icon HI is shifted and displayed after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (later than the start timing of the first cycle variation). , before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI is started, that is, the display is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the relevant icon TI is no longer necessary, making it possible to reduce the control load and development burden. Become.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (start timing of the second cycle variation). (before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the pending icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, since the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations matches the start timing of the shift display of the pending icon HI to the relevant icon TI, the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol will be changed from the pending icon HI to the relevant icon TI. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding that it is the start of shift display.

In addition, after the first display change in cycle variation when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the pending icon HI is shifted to the corresponding icon TI. The display is now set to end. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to give the player an impression of the flow that the pending icon HI is shifted and displayed to the relevant icon TI since the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (before the start timing of the first cycle variation). , after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the audible output of the predetermined game sound (fluctuation BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, the two start without intentionally synchronizing them. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of special symbols with the start timing of the audible output of a predetermined game sound is not required, and the control load and development burden can be reduced.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (start timing of the second cycle variation). audible output of predetermined game sounds (fluctuation BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation. Therefore, if the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound match, the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstandings.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (before the start timing of the first cycle variation). , the start timing of the first cycle variation is also later), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) starts, that is, it starts without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM is not required, and it is possible to reduce the control load and the development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle variations (start timing of the second cycle variation). (before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the production BGM (variation BGM for each production mode) is started. Therefore, if the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the audible output of the performance BGM match, it is possible to misunderstand that the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the performance BGM. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbols in a variable manner, the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle variation (the start of display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on). Before the start of the first cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance), the performance actions (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of the background image (background image for each performance mode, zone background image) start. In other words, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. Moreover, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image is not necessary, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load and the development burden.

In addition, when the first special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61) displays the special symbol fluctuations, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the start of the display, before the start of the second cycle change, at the end of the customer waiting demo performance), the performance actions (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of the background image (background image for each performance mode, zone background image) ) is now started. Therefore, if the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the background image production action match, it may be possible to misunderstand that the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation display is the start time of the background image production action. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences.

In addition, before the start of the first cycle variation (when the display of the variation standby screen after the power is turned on) when performing a variation display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), Performance operations (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) of background images (background images for each performance mode, zone background images) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored while waiting for a customer before the variable display of special symbols starts, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-fluctuation operation in the fluctuating performance (levitating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) The number of cycle fluctuations performed in the device 61) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation motion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-fluctuation operation in the fluctuating performance (levitating display, enlarged display, reduced display), the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display) The number of display changes in the cycle variation executed by the device 61) may be different. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game presentation according to the type of pre-variation motion, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect pattern 70a is changed from the state where it is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the effect pattern 70a, instead of hiding the volume value image OG. By changing the state to be displayed (set) in a lower layer, the visibility of the volume value image OG may be restricted by displaying it so as to overlap behind the effect pattern 70a.

(Specific example of winning a starting prize during a variable performance)
A specific example of a case where a starting prize is won during a variable presentation will be explained using FIGS. 76 and 77.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart in the case of starting winning during a variable presentation, and FIG. 77 is a diagram showing examples of presentation at various timings in FIG. 76. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 76, when the first pending number is "0", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol (Y-th cycle variation from the start of variation) and the sub- A variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the 1-variable display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. is displayed, and fluctuating BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 77(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 76, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "1", the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays "1", and the main A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first prefetch designation command) is transmitted from the control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 77(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 will display "1". Become. Further, the additional display of the pending icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode as an animation on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 77(c)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 76, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 77(d)).

In this way, when a game ball enters the starting hole during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is executed over a plurality of cycle variations. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately understand that the game ball has entered the starting hole, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, if a game ball enters the starting hole during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) will be output over multiple cycle fluctuations. There is. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately understand that the game ball has entered the starting hole, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball enters the starting hole and a winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable performance from being inhibited by the winning sound, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example of continuously executing variable effects)
A specific example of continuous execution of variable effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart when the variable effects are executed continuously, and FIGS. 79 to 81 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 78. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 78, when the first pending number is "2", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol (Nth cycle variation from the start of variation) and the sub-display. A variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the 1-variable display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "2". In addition, the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the center effect pattern 70a is scrolling at a low speed (updating fluctuation), and the special pattern TZ is being updated and changed (scrolling). display, switching display). Further, two pending icons HI in the normal display mode are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the relevant icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is displayed. It is output audibly (see FIG. 79(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N+1 cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the left effect symbol 70a that was being scrolled (updated fluctuation) starts to temporarily stop (FIG. 79(b) reference). Then, when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and the character of the left performance symbol 70a performs a performance motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking its head) (FIG. 79) c).

It should be noted that the "pre-stop action" may be any kind of performance as long as it is performed between the temporary stop and the stop display.
In addition, the pre-stop action may be a performance performed immediately before the temporary stop, not only after the temporary stop.

Next, at the timing of T1 to T2 in FIG. 78 (after the N+1 cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation...at the start of the cycle fluctuation), the right effect pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated fluctuation) temporarily stops. (See FIGS. 79(b) to 79(c)). Then, when the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and the character of the right performance symbol 70a performs a performance motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking its head) (FIG. 79) b) to (c)).

Next, at timing T2 in FIG. 78 (at the start of the N+16th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), the effect pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated fluctuation) starts to temporarily stop (FIG. 79(c)) reference). Then, when the inner production symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and the character of the inner production symbol 70a performs a production motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking its head) to complete all productions. The symbol 70a becomes temporarily stopped (see FIGS. 80(c) to 80(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 78, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Additionally, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in animation, and the production pattern 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") start to stop display ( (See FIG. 80(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 78, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 80(f)).

Next, at timing T6 in FIG. 78, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 controls the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display (first cycle fluctuation) (FIG. 81(g) )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 78 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes "1" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts (see FIG. 81(h)).

Further, the two pending icons HI displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B start shifting display (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the fluctuation performance is started, and the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-fluctuation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 81(h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 78 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the performance symbol 70a, the look-ahead effect performance (starting light emitting performance) that is executed only with this fluctuation performance ) is started, and a blue light emitting effect image EF is displayed around the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 81(i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 78 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the two pending icons HI ends, the first pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). . At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the variation is performed and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 81(i)).

In this way, the fluctuation BGM that has been audibly output before the start of the pre-fluctuation operation (levitating display, enlarged display, reduced display) of the production symbol 70a (during the stop display of the production symbol 70a) can be continued even during the execution of the pre-variation motion. The audible output is continuous (without interruption). Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that is a combination of a plurality of fluctuating performances, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), instead of changing the icon display mode from the start of the icon shift display, the icon shift The display mode of the icon is changed upon (after) completion. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the display mode of the icon noticeable, thereby increasing the effect of the icon change performance, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the special symbol and the performance pattern 70a are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, depending on the type of variable performance pattern, when the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops first (for example, the left performance pattern 70a) is performing a pre-stop performance, the performance pattern 70a that temporarily stops next (for example, the right performance pattern 70a) is performing a pre-stop performance. ) is now performing a pre-stop performance and other times performing update fluctuations (scrolling display). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the performance mode of the performance before stopping of the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped first and the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped next is the same, but may be a different performance mode. Further, in the case of shortening fluctuation, the pre-stop performance may not be performed.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 (sub-first The variable display (updated variation) of the 2-variable display 82) is now finished. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is completed, the disappearing display of the icon is started. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) is finished, the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and then the disappearing display of the icon ends. It looks like this. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.) in the fluctuation performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 (sub-first The variable display (update variation) of the 2-variable display 82) ends, and thereafter the disappearing display of the icon ends. Therefore, the progress of the game performance becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character shaking its head), but the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed without performing the pre-stop performance. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance is enhanced by the performance symbol 70a, and the player can be made aware of the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol TZ, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable production, the production pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the character shakes its head) and then stops displaying, but even if the production pattern 70a is in the pre-stop action or during the stop display, the background image (each The background image corresponding to the production mode) continues to perform the production operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop operation of the effect symbols 70a or after the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.), the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the performance pattern 70a and the special Even when the symbol TZ is being displayed in a stopped state, the background image (background image corresponding to each performance mode) continues to perform the performance operation. Therefore, even after the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when displaying special symbol variations on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the timing is different from the end timing of the cycle variation (before the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last (before the end timing of the cycle fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation), the production pattern 70a is displayed in a predetermined manner (temporary stop display, stop display) It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game performance and improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of both is unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced.

In addition, when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed before the last cycle variation is completed. ing. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand the flow of the game in which the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop and then the variable display of the special symbols ends, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last The special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed after the end timing of the cycle fluctuation and after the stop display timing of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of performances related to the stop display of the special symbol TZ, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of both is unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced.

In addition, when the holding icon HI is made to perform a production operation (swinging motion, rotating motion) during execution of a variation production, and a variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the final Even after the completion of the cycle fluctuation, the presentation operation of the pending icon HI continues to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the number of pending items is not "0" by the pending icon HI, and to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols have stopped being displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays special symbol variations, the timing is different from the end timing of the cycle variation (after the start timing of the last cycle variation, the last (after the end timing of the cycle fluctuation and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the disappearing display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of effects related to the disappearing display of the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of both is unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced.

In addition, after the cycle variation in the case where the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) displays the special symbols in a variable manner ends, the disappearing display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand the flow of the game from the stop display of the special symbol to the disappearance of the icon TI, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), a predetermined game sound that is started before the last cycle variation (during execution of a variation effect). The audible output of (fluctuation BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is performed at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation). , after the special symbol stop display timing). Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of performances when a predetermined game sound is output audibly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of both is unnecessary, and the control load and development burden can be reduced.

In addition, when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), a predetermined game sound that is started before the last cycle variation (during execution of a variation effect). It is possible for the audible output (temporary stop sound, etc.) to end before the cycle fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being carried over to the next variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) that has been output before the last cycle variation, It is possible to continue audible output even after the cycle fluctuation ends (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61), the performance operations (horizontal scrolling, scene changes, etc.) are continued to be executed even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (while the display is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the look-ahead effects (look-ahead zone effects, look-ahead effect effects) that are executed with the start of a change effect are executed after the first cycle change ends when performing a change display of special symbols. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow of the game from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the execution of the pre-read performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example of a case where a variable effect is started without receiving the stop command normally)
With reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a specific example will be described in which a variable effect is started without being able to properly receive a stop command. Note that although (a) to (c) are omitted in FIG. 83, they are the same as FIGS. 79(a) to (c).

FIG. 82 is a timing chart in the case where a variable effect is started without receiving the stop command normally, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 82. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timing from T0 to T2 in FIG. 82 is basically the same as the timing from T0 to T2 in FIG. 78, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing from T3 onwards will be explained.

At timing T3 in FIG. 82, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 80(d)).

However, since the performance control board 130 could not normally receive the command at the time of stop, the stop display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, etc. should normally have started at the timing of T4 in FIG. 82, but the performance pattern 70a The stop display of the special symbol TZ, etc. will not start, and the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ. will be extended.

Next, at timing T5 in FIG. 82, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 controls the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts varying display (first cycle variation) (FIG. 83(e) )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 82 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts from the beginning (extinguished) (see FIG. 83(f)).

Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased in a non-animated manner, and the pending icon HI displayed in the first display section starts to be shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. do. Furthermore, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped after the start of the variation effect is displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment, and then starts floating display as a pre-variation operation, and the special symbol that was being scrolled (updated variation) TZ continues scrolling display without stopping display (see FIG. 83(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T7 in FIG. 82 (during the fourth cycle variation), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Thereafter, scrolling display (updating fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 83(g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable effect is ended. If the third command (next start command) is received in a state where the current variable effect is not executed, the current variable effect is forcibly ended and the next variable effect is started. In other words, the fluctuating effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the fluctuating effect ends even if the second command is not received properly and the third command (next start command) is received. It looks like this. In other words, both when the second command is received and when it is not received, the previous fluctuating performance ends while the next fluctuating performance is being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately end the previous variable performance by starting the next variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a start command is received while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the production pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped will be displayed at the pattern stop position for a moment (same as if the stop command had been received normally). (in this case, a floating display). Therefore, the fluctuating performance can be started in the same manner as when the start command is received while the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the game can be played when the fluctuating performance is started from the state where the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The player's discomfort can be reduced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, when a start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is displayed in a non-animated manner, that is, erased and displayed in a shorter time than the erased display in animation. Therefore, the next time the pending icon HI is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not obstructed, and it is possible to suppress the production effect from deteriorating.

In addition, if the start command is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed on the first special symbol display 60 (for example, There is also a case where the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach effect (13.5 seconds variation). In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the main display device 70 enters a state in which a variable performance (specifically, SP reach performance) is executed, and in this state, the next start When the time command is received, the current variable effect is forcibly ended and the next variable effect is started. Regarding this point, the same operation applies to gaming machines that transmit and receive commands at the time of starting but do not transmit and receive commands at the time of stop.

(Specific example of when the normal variable performance ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of the case where the normal variation performance ends and the player waits for a customer will be explained using FIGS. 84 to 86.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart when the normal variable effect ends and the customer wait state is reached, and FIGS. 85 to 86 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 84. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 84, when the first pending number is "0", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol (Nth cycle variation from the start of variation) and the sub- A variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the 1-variable display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in front of the Mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the center effect pattern 70a is scrolling at a low speed (updating fluctuation), and the special pattern TZ is being updated and changed (scrolling). display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the fluctuating BGM is audibly output. Further, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap the front side of the right performance pattern 70a (see FIG. 85(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 84 (during the N-th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the center effect pattern 70a that was being scrolled (updated) stops temporarily, a temporary stop sound is emitted from the audio output device 9. Output is started, and the character of the center performance pattern 70a performs a performance motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking its head), and all the performance symbols 70a become temporarily stopped (see FIG. 85(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1 cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the main display device 70 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", and the audio output device 9 starts outputting a volume confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value "3" ( (See FIG. 85(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 84 (during the N+1 cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 85(d)). .

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 84 (in the middle of the N+16th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends a stop command to the production control board 130 (design confirmation command) is sent. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 85(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 84, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the production control board 130 receives the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Additionally, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to be displayed disappearing in animation, and the stop display of the production pattern 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") is started. . Further, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 10 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second) and the volume value image OG is erased, but the confirmation sound continues to be output (see FIG. 85(f)).

Thereafter, at the timing T6 in FIG. 84, when the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 86(g)), and at the timing T7 in FIG. 84, the icon TI disappears in the animation. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of display, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends (see FIG. 86(h)).

Next, at timing T8 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, it becomes a waiting period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. A status specification command is sent.

Then, at timing T9 in FIG. 84, when a stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the fluctuating BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 86(i)). When a demonstration standby period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, a customer waiting demonstration performance for appealing the game to the players is started.

In addition, if the stop display of the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is performed in response to the reception of the stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound is The output will continue until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, but this is also the case at the start of the fluctuating effect, and when the start command is received while the confirmation sound is output. Even when execution of the corresponding variation effect is started, the volume adjustment with the cross key 19 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period has elapsed.

Additionally, the audible output of the variable BGM will be stopped (muted) after a predetermined period of time has passed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, but if the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the fluctuating BGM The audible output is not stopped, and the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (muted) when, for example, a customer waiting state designation command or a jackpot game opening designation command is received next.

In this way, when the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed during a variable effect (a period in which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 for a predetermined period (1 second). Light amount adjustment is now regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player misses the important stage of stopping display of the production pattern 70a due to concentrating on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

If the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is displayed, the effect pattern that is stopped and displayed even if the display period (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) of the volume value image OG has not elapsed. In order to ensure visibility of the volume value image OG, visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the visibility of the performance symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed by the volume value image OG is not obstructed, and the player can check the performance symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the variable production starts or the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound is output during the output period (0. The output continues until 5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, the player can understand that the volume has been adjusted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the normal fluctuating performance ends and the customer waits, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, compared to the case where the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) immediately after the normal variable performance ends, the player is less likely to feel like quitting the game, and the operation of the gaming machine is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol 70a performs the pre-stop motion and then stops displaying, but the audible output of the performance BGM (fluctuating BGM for each production mode) continues even during the pre-stop motion or stop display of the performance symbol 70a. and is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the pre-stop operation or stop display of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, after the pre-stop performance (the motion of the character of the performance pattern 70a shaking its head, the output of a temporary stop sound, etc.), the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, but the performance pattern 70a and the special Even after the symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, the audible output of production BGM (fluctuation BGM for each production mode) continues to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal variable production, the production pattern 70a performs a pre-stop action (the motion of the character shaking its head) and then stops displaying, but when a predetermined time elapses after the production pattern 70a stops displaying, the production BGM (for each production mode) The audible output of the fluctuating BGM) is stopped. Therefore, since the audible output of the performance BGM is continued all the time, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a performs the pre-stop motion and then stops displaying, but even during the pre-stop motion of the performance symbol 70a, the volume of the performance BGM that is being output can be controlled by the player by operating the cross key 19. is adjustable. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player in adjusting the volume of the performance BGM, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when various error notification sounds are output during the pre-stop operation of the performance pattern 70a, the output of the performance BGM is limited (volume reduced or muted).

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but the performance is performed from the state where it is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the performance pattern 70a. It may be changed to a state where it is displayed (set) in a lower layer of the symbol 70a. In this way, since the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the production pattern 70a, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the production pattern 70a is ensured and the display is stopped. It becomes possible for the player to confirm the effect pattern 70a.

Additionally, when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for a customer, a volume confirmation sound is output, and when adjusting the volume by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance, the volume confirmation sound is not output. , the volume confirmation sound may not be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while waiting for a customer, and the volume confirmation sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during a variable performance. .

In addition, even when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19, the volume value image OG is displayed whether the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 even when the player is waiting for a customer or during a variable performance. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by , and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the cross key 19 during the variation performance.

In addition, when the stop display of the production pattern 70a is performed in response to the reception of the stop command while the confirmation sound is being output, or when the execution of the variable production is started in response to the reception of the start command while the confirmation sound is being output. However, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. This makes it difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and fluctuation stop sound, making it easier to hear the fluctuation start sound and fluctuation stop sound, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example of a case where the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed due to failure to receive the stop command normally)
A specific example in which the end of the normal variation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

FIG. 87 is a timing chart in the case where the end of the normal variation effect is delayed due to failure to receive the stop command normally, and FIG. 88 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 87. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timing from T0 to T3 in FIG. 87 is basically the same as the timing from T0 to T3 in FIG. 84, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing from T4 onward will be explained.

At timing T4 in FIG. 87 (in the middle of the N+16th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Sent. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 88(e)).

However, since the performance control board 130 could not normally receive the command at the time of stop, the stop display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, etc. should normally have started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 87, but the performance pattern 70a The stop display of special symbols TZ, etc. will not start. Then, the variable display period on the sub-first variable display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the cross key 19. The period during which volume adjustment and light amount adjustment can be performed will be extended (see FIG. 88(f)).

Next, at timing T6 in FIG. 87, when the output period of the confirmation sound has elapsed, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 88(g)), and at timing T7 in FIG. 87, the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed. Then, there is a standby period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Thereafter, at timing T8 in FIG. 87, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed to disappear in a non-animated manner, and the production symbol 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") are displayed at the symbol stop position. (=state where the display is stopped). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 10 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 88(h)).

Then, at timing T9 in FIG. 87, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the previous operation of the cross key 19 for volume adjustment) has elapsed, the volume value image OG is hidden (FIG. 88 ( i)), when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command at timing T10 in FIG. 87, the output of the variable BGM at an audible volume is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 88( (see j)), and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect is started to appeal to players to play the game.

In addition, even if the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command sent from the main control board 110 while the volume value image OG is displayed, basically the main control board This is similar to the case where the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command sent from the controller 110, and the variable production will not be executed. OG will no longer be deleted.

In addition, if the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 will be stopped, the icon TI will disappear in a non-animated manner, the production pattern 70a and the special Since the symbol TZ is not displayed in a stopped state, the state in which the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

In addition, if the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ will not be stopped and displayed, so a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) after entering the customer waiting state. Even if the time has elapsed, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variable effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variable effect is ended. If the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received while the robot is not in the customer waiting state, the current variable performance is forcibly ended and the customer waiting state is entered. In other words, the variable effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variable effect ends even if the second command is not received properly and the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received. It looks like this. In other words, in both cases where the second command is received and cases where the second command is not received, the variable performance is terminated when transitioning to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately end the variable performance by starting the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, if the production control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (such as a disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, or a disconnection of the connector) ), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are not restricted, and a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the production control board 130 cannot properly receive the start command or stop command sent from the main control board 110 (such as a disconnection or disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130), The display of the volume value image OG is maintained until the display period of the volume value image OG has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the start command is received by the production control board 130 in a garbled state due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the contents of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed on the first special symbol display 60 (for example, There is also a case where the content of the variable effect pattern of the variable effect executed on the main display device 70 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach effect (13.5 seconds variation). In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, the main display device 70 enters a state in which a variable performance (specifically, SP reach performance) is executed, and in this state, the state waits for a customer. When the designated command is received, the current variable performance will be forcibly ended and the system will enter the customer waiting state. Regarding this point, the same operation applies to gaming machines that transmit and receive commands at the time of starting but do not transmit and receive commands at the time of stop.

(Specific example of when the losing normal reach variation effect ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of the case where the losing normal reach variation effect ends and the player waits for a customer will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart when the losing normal reach variation effect ends and the player waits for a customer, and FIGS. 90 to 91 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 89. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 89, the first reserved number is "0" and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60 and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "0". In addition, three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 90(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 89, when the normal reach effect is started in which the center effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, an audible output of the variable BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of the normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 90(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 89, when the dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 17 is pressed. The promotion effect that prompts the operation and the effective period of the effect button 17 are started. Specifically, an operation promotion image SSG imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a promotion sound saying "Press" is produced from the audio output device 9. is output (see FIG. 90(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 89, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a development failure performance indicating that the development to the SP reach performance will fail and the normal reach performance will end is executed. . Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound "chi" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 90(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 89, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach performance is restarted, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is restarted (see FIG. 90(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 89, when the center effect pattern 70a, which was being scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation), temporarily stops at "6", the audio output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and The character of the performance pattern 70a performs a performance motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and the three performance symbols 70a are in a temporarily stopped state with a reach miss roll ("565"). Further, although the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped, the audible output of the variable BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 90(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T6 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 91(g)).

Next, at timing T7 in FIG. 89, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 91(h)).

Then, at timing T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to be displayed disappearing in animation, and the stop display of the production pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 91(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T9 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 91(j)).

Next, at timing T10 in FIG. 89, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a waiting period begins in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the main control board 110 sends a message to the performance control board 130 to wait for the customer. A status specification command is sent. Thereafter, when a demonstration standby period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, a customer waiting demonstration performance for appealing the game to the players is started.

In this way, when the normal reach variation effect is executed, when the normal reach effect is started, the variable BGM is muted and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach effect can be effectively enlivened. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the customer is in a waiting state after the losing normal reach variation performance, the performance BGM (variation BGM, normal reach BGM) will not be output before the normal reach variation performance ends, specifically from the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a. As a result, it is possible to immediately know that the normal reach performance has ended or that there has been a loss, and it is possible to improve interest.

Note that instead of stopping the output of the performance BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a, the variable BGM is audibly output in place of the normal reach BGM by the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 70a. You may also do so. In this way, the player will not be extremely disappointed when the normal reach variation performance with low jackpot expectation results in a loss.

(Specific example when variable performance is executed after losing SPSP reach performance ends)
With reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, a specific example will be described in which the variable performance is executed after the loss SPSP reach performance is completed.

FIG. 92 is a timing chart when a variable performance is executed after the loss SPSP reach performance is completed, and FIGS. 93 to 94 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in FIG. 92. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the effect mode is A, but since the effect modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 92, when the first pending number is "2", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variable display of the first special symbol, and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a variable display ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "2". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the three production patterns 70a (display mode including character images) are scrolling (updated fluctuation), and the special design TZ is updated (scrolled display, switching display). )are doing. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, a hold icon HI in a normal display mode (white) and a hold icon HI in a special display mode (blue) are displayed. Furthermore, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output.

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 92, when the normal reach effect is started in which the center effect pattern 70a is scrolled at a low speed while the left and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, an audible output of the variable BGM is started. is stopped (muted) and output of normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 92, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and a blackout effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the main display device 70 A promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 and a valid period of the performance button 17 are started. Specifically, an operation promotion image SSG imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and a promotion sound saying "Press" is output from the audio output device 9. is output (see FIG. 93(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 92, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a successful development performance indicating that the development to the SP reach performance is successful and the SP reach performance is executed is executed. be done. Specifically, the successful development image HSG is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound saying "You did it" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 93(b)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the blackout effect has elapsed, the display of the SP ready-to-reach background image and the output of the SP ready-to-reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP ready-to-reach effect is started. At this time, the effect pattern 70a changes to a display mode in which only numbers are displayed, and the left and right effect patterns are displayed at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state smaller than the normal size (see FIG. 93(c)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect has elapsed, the display of the SPSP ready-to-reach background image and the output of the SPSP ready-to-reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is started. At this time, the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than the normal size, and the first pending icon display area 70B is hidden together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 93(d)). .

Thereafter, at timing T6 in FIG. 92, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped in the final phase of the SPSP reach effect and the decisive effect is started, a promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are displayed. is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image SSG imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the audio output device 9 prompts to "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 93(e)).

Next, at timing T7 in FIG. 92, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a decision failure effect indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the decision failure image HBG is displayed on the main display device 70, and the failure sound “chi” is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, by temporarily stopping the center performance symbol 70a at "6" in the upper left corner of the screen, the three performance symbols 70a become temporarily stopped at the reach miss roll ("565") (Fig. 93(f) )reference).

Then, at timing T8 in FIG. 92, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect has elapsed, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) that suggests that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shielding image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, a character unique to the model, etc. (see FIG. 131)) that blocks the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc. is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position and the first mode before the start of the SP reach effect and is temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 94(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T9 in FIG. 92, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 94(h)).

Next, at timing T10 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to be displayed disappearing in animation, and the stop display of the production pattern 70a ("565") and the special pattern TZ ("565") is started. (See FIG. 94(i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 92, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 94(j)).

After that, at timing T12 in FIG. 92, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 sends the effect to the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to the player. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate (first cycle fluctuation) (FIG. 94(k) )reference).

Next, at timing T13 in FIG. 92 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending The display 83 displays "1", and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts from the beginning (extinguished) (see FIG. 94(l)).

Further, the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shifting display (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the fluctuating performance is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-fluctuation action, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scrolling display, switching display), and the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is restarted. (See FIG. 94(l)).

Although we have explained the SPSP reach variation effect here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effect, where playback of normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and normal reach BGM output is resumed during the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. SP Reach BGM is now output without the need to do so.

In addition, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been explained here, the case where the SP reach variation effect is a loss is the same as the case where the SPSP reach effect is a loss, and the effect pattern 70a which is a loss in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) that suggests that the effect pattern 70a should be stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and , the production pattern 70a returns to its normal size and first mode, and is in a temporarily stopped display state.

In addition, when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed and the look-ahead zone background is displayed and the reach state is reached and the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, the normal image like the mode A background image This is the same as when the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed in the ready state with the background image being displayed, but the effect pattern 70a that causes a loss in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be stopped is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the normal background image (before becoming the look-ahead zone background image) is executed. For example, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image) is resumed, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the normal size and first mode, and is in a temporarily stopped display state.

In this way, in the first variation performance (normal reach variation performance) in which a blackout performance (suggestion performance) that suggests whether or not the SP reach performance is executed, the normal reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout performance. The normal reach BGM that was muted during the normal reach performance after the blackout performance is returned to audible output, and the blackout performance (suggestive performance) that suggests whether or not the SP reach performance will be performed is performed. In the second variation performance (SP/SPSP reach variation performance) that is executed, the playback of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout performance, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach performance after the blackout performance. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

In addition, if the SP reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is the normal background image) or the second background image (pre-read zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, In addition to changing the background image to a third background image (SP reach background image) which indicates that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than the background image, the production pattern 70a which has formed a reach state and is temporarily stopped is displayed in a smaller size than the normal size. do. Then, when the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop due to a loss, they are then changed to the first background image (mode A background image, which is a normal background image), and the three effect patterns 70a are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the performance effect of the SP reach performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes, the mode of the effect operation (content of operation, cycle of operation, etc.) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SP reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the icon TI remains displayed and the pending icon HI is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the SPSP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the SPSP reach performance ends, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in normal display mode, hold icon in special display mode) is restarted. Therefore, after the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable performance will be performed again, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) will remain displayed if the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SPSP reach effect is executed, but the SPSP reach effect will be executed. However, the special symbol TZ is kept displayed regardless of whether or not the SP SP ready-to-reach effect is executed after the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be informed that the variable display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the SPSP reach effect ends, a first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that the SPSP ready-to-win performance will end and that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the display mode of the effect pattern 70a to the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of an eye-catching image) is executed to return the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by changes in the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI are displayed during the blackout performance, at least one of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP reach performance starts. It's okay.

Also, a valid period is generated during the blackout performance, and when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the development success performance or development failure performance is executed, but it is configured so that the validity period does not occur. It's okay. In this case, you may perform a successful development performance or a failed development performance, or you may return to a normal reach performance or develop to a SP reach performance without performing a successful development performance or a failed development performance. good.

Furthermore, while the SP reach performance is being executed, the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI are kept displayed, and while the SPSP reach performance is being performed, the pending icon HI is hidden and the relevant icon TI is kept displayed. However, the pending icon HI may be hidden and the icon TI may remain displayed while the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed, and the pending icon HI and the icon TI may be hidden while the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is being executed.

(Specific example of disappearing display in animation of the icon TI)
A specific example of displaying the disappearing icon TI in animation will be explained using FIGS. 95 and 96.

As described in FIGS. 28 and 29, the icon final display modes of the icon TI include "white icon," "blue icon," "red icon," and "rainbow icon." FIG. 95 shows a specific example of disappearing display in animation when the icon TI is displayed.

FIG. 95 shows, as an example, a specific example of display of a "white icon" and a "blue icon" disappearing in an animation of the corresponding icon TI. The "white icon" is the same as in FIG. 94(i), so its explanation will be omitted.
On the other hand, in the case of a "blue icon", the disappearing display is performed using the same animation as that used to display the "white icon" as shown in (h-2) to (j-2). As a result, both the "white icon" and the "blue icon" are displayed with the same animation, making it easier for the player to understand that the icon has disappeared and the variable performance has ended.

Note that the "blue icon" may be replaced with "red icon" or "rainbow icon." In addition, it was assumed that the "white icon", "blue icon", "red icon", and "rainbow icon" were all used to display their disappearance using the same animation, but it is also possible to display their disappearance using different animations. good. In addition, if an icon (for example, a character icon) not shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is included, such a character icon may also be displayed disappearing using the same animation as the "white icon" etc. Alternatively, only the character icon may be displayed using a different animation.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 95, the "blue icon" has a round shape, which is different from the hexagonal shape of the hold icon HI, but the "blue icon" also has the same shape as the hold icon HI (see FIG. For example, it may be displayed as a hexagon).

FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating how there are cases in which animation is used and cases in which animation is not used for disappearing display. Specifically, FIG. 96(b) shows FIG. 92(b), and when the developed image SEG indicating that the SP reach effect has been developed is displayed, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden. becomes. In this case, the icon TI or pending icon HI is made to disappear (not be displayed) without using the animation shown in FIG. 95 or the like. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable performance is still continuing since the icon TI has been hidden without animation.

In FIG. 96(i), the animation shown in FIG. 95 etc. is used to display the disappearing image. Thereby, the player can recognize that the variable performance has ended since the icon TI has disappeared with the animation.

Note that the case where the icon TI is hidden without animation is not limited to the time of development, but includes, for example, when the power supply is stopped, as shown in FIG. 103. The manner of disappearance in FIG. 96(b) is the same as the manner of disappearance in FIG. 103(b), but may be different. In other words, only the mode of disappearance at the end of the variable effect is different between when the variable effect ends, when it develops, and when the power supply stops, and the mode of disappearance may be the same at the time of development and when the power supply stops. However, the mode of disappearance may be different at the end of the variable performance, at the time of development, and at the time of stopping the power supply.

Note that, for example, the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a is different between the loss normal reach described in FIG. 89 and the loss SPSP reach described in FIG. 92. Specifically, the temporary suspension period of the production symbol 70a in the loss SPSP reach is longer than the temporary suspension period of the production symbol 70a in the loss normal reach. Therefore, the period during which the icon TI performs the performance operation during the temporary stop period is also longer for the losing SPSP reach. In this way, even if the period in which the relevant icon TI performs the performance operation is different between the losing normal reach and the losing SPSP reach, the icon TI will be displayed disappearing with the same animation, and the icon TI will be displayed disappearing with the same disappearing time. I try to do this. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the icon has disappeared and the variable performance has ended, although the variable performance and temporary stop period are different.

(Specific example when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends)
A specific example in which a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is completed will be described using FIGS. 97 to 99.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. 98 to 99 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 97. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

Note that the timing from T0 to T5 in FIG. 97 is basically the same as the timing from T0 to T5 in FIG. 92, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing from T6 onwards will be explained.

First, at the timing T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped in the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the decisive effect is started, a promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 are displayed. is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image SSG imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the audio output device 9 prompts to "press". Sound is output (see FIG. 98(e)).

Next, at timing T7 in FIG. 97, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a successful success performance indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (deeply descend) to the production position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the success image SEF is displayed on the main display device 70, and the success sound “Kyuinkyuin” is output from the audio output device 9. Also, by temporarily stopping the center performance symbol 70a at "5" in the upper left corner of the screen, the three performance symbols 70a become temporarily stopped at the jackpot ("555") (Fig. 98(f) )reference).

Then, at timing T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect has elapsed, a first stop suggestion effect (for example, for 0.5 seconds) that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shielding image (an eye-catching image including the model name) that shields the background image, the performance pattern 70a, etc. is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the effect pattern 70a returns to the position and first mode before the start of the SP reach effect and is temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon HI (see FIG. 98(g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion performance is started which suggests that the performance symbol 70a will be stopped and displayed when the result is a jackpot. Specifically, a light emitting display effect in which the light emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the effect pattern 70a to the other end and disappears is repeatedly performed twice at a predetermined period (for example, 0.75 seconds). At this time, the audio output device 9 is in a state in which no audio is output for a predetermined period (for example, until the performance symbol 70a stops being displayed) (see FIG. 98(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T9 in FIG. 97, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 99(h)).

Next, at timing T10 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. In addition, as the second stop suggestion effect ends, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts disappearing in animation, and the effect pattern 70a ("555") and the special symbol TZ ("555") ”) is started (see FIG. 99(i)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 99(j)).

Thereafter, at timing T12 in FIG. 97, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, a jackpot game opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 (see FIG. 99(k)).

Next, at timing T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the presentation control board 130 received the jackpot game opening designation command, the jackpot game opening presentation is started. Specifically, an opening production screen including the words "Jackpot" is displayed, and the right corner of the screen suggests that a game ball be fired aiming at the right area (big winning opening) of the gaming area 5a. A right-hand hitting image UG is displayed.

In this way, in a fluctuating effect that results in a jackpot, the pending icon HI (the pending icon in the normal display mode, the pending icon in the special display mode) will remain displayed if the SP SP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed. On the other hand, it is hidden when the SPSP reach effect is executed, but the special symbol TZ remains displayed regardless of whether the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SPSP reach effect is executed. There is. Therefore, the player can be informed that the variable display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the variable performance that becomes a jackpot, even if it does not develop into the SP reach performance after the normal reach performance, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) will be maintained. There is.

Furthermore, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a jackpot ends, a second stop suggestion performance (a light-emitting display performance in which the light-emitting effect image EF moves from one end of the performance pattern 70a to the other end and disappears) is executed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the SPSP ready-to-win performance will end and that the jackpot performance symbol 70a will be stopped and displayed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period (0.75 seconds) and the total performance time (1.5 seconds) of the light-emitting display performance in the second stop suggestion performance are the period (swinging motion, rotation motion) of the hold icon (shaking motion, rotating motion). 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting display performance in the second stop suggestion performance stand out, and it is possible to emphasize that the jackpot performance symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, although the performance mode of the light emission display performance in the second stop suggestion performance is such that the light emission effect image EF moves from one end of the performance pattern 70a to the other end and disappears, the number image part of the performance pattern 70a The light emitting effect image EF may move from one end to the other end and disappear, or the light emitting effect image EF may move from one end of the character image to the other end and disappear.

In addition, although the cumulative performance time of the light-emitting display performance in the second stop suggestion performance is shorter than the period of the performance operation of the hold icon (2 seconds or 3 seconds), the performance time of one light-emission display performance is, for example, By setting it to 2 seconds, the total presentation time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the presentation operation of the pending icon HI.

In addition, in the case of a normal variable performance in which various reach performances are not executed and three performance symbols are stopped and displayed on a losing roll, the light emitting display performance as the second stop suggestion performance is not executed. However, each time the three effect symbols on the left and center right temporarily stop in order, a light emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, a part of the effect image 70a It is also possible to display a light emitting image) for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) and sequentially execute a light emitting display effect during a temporary stop. In this way, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of sequentially executing the flash effect at temporary stop in the normal game state and specific game states (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the flash effect during temporary stop sequentially, and In the gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the temporary stop light emitting effect may not be performed sequentially.

In addition, in the case of a shortening variation performance in which various reach performances are not executed and three performance symbols are stopped and displayed on a losing roll, the light emitting display performance as the second stop suggestion performance is not executed. However, when the three effect symbols on the left and center right temporarily stop at the same time, a light emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, the effect image 70a An image in which part of the light emits white light) may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) to perform a simultaneous temporary stop light emitting display effect. In this way, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the simultaneous temporary stop light emitting effect in the normal gaming state and specific game states (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), it is possible to execute the simultaneous temporary stop light emitting effect in the normal gaming state, and specify In the gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the simultaneous temporary stop light emitting effect may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a reach variation performance in which various reach effects are executed and the three effect symbols 70a are stopped and displayed when the reach result is missed, the light emitting display effect as the second stop suggestion effect is not executed. However, when the center performance symbol 70a that is finally stopped and displayed is temporarily stopped, a second stop suggestion performance is made so as to be superimposed on this performance symbol 70a (excluding the left and right performance symbols 70a that were previously temporarily stopped). A light emitting effect image (for example, an image in which a part of the effect pattern 70a emits white light) different from the above may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds) to execute the light emitting display effect when reaching is missed. In this way, it is possible to inform the player that he has lost the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of executing the light-emission display performance when the reach is lost in the normal gaming state and specific game states (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), it is possible to execute the light-emission display performance when the reach is lost in the normal gaming state, and the specific game state In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the light-emitting display performance at the time of losing the reach may not be executed.

In addition, when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop and a normal reach performance is executed, the surroundings of the left and right performance symbols 70a (excluding the center performance symbol 70a which is changing) are different from the second stop suggestion performance. A light emitting effect image (for example, an image that emits white light so as to block at least a part of the production pattern 70a to restrict visibility) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1.2 seconds) and a light emitting display is performed when a reach is achieved. It may also be possible to perform a performance. In this way, the number of executions of the light emitting display effect in the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed can be increased than in the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, instead of executing a light-emitting display effect when a reach is established in the normal gaming state and a specific game state (time-saving gaming state, variable-probability game state), in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a light-emitting display effect when a reach is achieved, and a specific In the gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state), the light-emitting display performance may not be executed when the reach is established.

In addition, when the two left and right performance symbols 70a move to the top of the screen of the main display device 70 and develop into SP reach performance, the surroundings of the left and right performance symbols 70a (excluding the center performance symbol 70a which is changing) A light emitting effect image during development is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.4 seconds) of a light emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, an image that causes the inside of the number of the effect pattern 70a to emit light). It may also be executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the light emitting display effect in the variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed than in the variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, instead of executing the light emission display performance during development in the normal game state and specific game states (time saving game state, variable probability game state), it is possible to perform the light emission display performance during development in the normal game state, and in the specific game state In (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state), the light-emitting display effect at the time of development may not be executed.

Furthermore, even if the development flash display effect is executed, the three effect symbols 70a on the left center right are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen of the main display device 70, and the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this case, the light emitting display performance may not be executed for these three performance symbols 70a. In this way, it is not necessary to uselessly perform a light emitting display effect on the effect symbols 70a that are displayed in a reduced size so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load related to image display.

Also, at timing T7 in FIG. 97, after the three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at the jackpot in the upper left corner of the screen (while the pending icon is not displayed before the second stop suggestion performance is executed) Alternatively, it may be moved to the center of the screen and displayed at normal size. In this case, a light emitting effect image different from the second stop suggestion effect (for example, a yellow light emitting light that spreads outward from the center effect image radially) corresponds to the three effect symbols 70a that have moved to the center of the screen. The light emission before stop suggestion display effect may be executed by displaying an image (such as an image that appears) for a predetermined period (for example, 1.2 seconds). In this way, it is possible to appeal to the player that the performance symbol has become a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when displaying the light emitting effect image in the light emission before stop suggestion display performance, the frame lighting device 10 may be configured to emit light in the light emission before stop suggestion display mode (for example, in the same color as the display color of the light emitting effect image). good.

In addition, when a normal variation performance or a shortened variation performance in which the second stop suggestion performance (light emission display performance) is not executed, the three performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped due to a loss, and then the light emission display performance before stop suggestion is performed. It is best not to run it. In this way, the number of times the light emitting display effect is executed and the type of light emitting display effect to be executed change depending on the variable effect pattern, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, when a reach variation performance (normal reach variation performance, SP reach variation performance, SPSP reach variation performance) is executed in which the second stop suggestion performance (light emitting display performance) is not executed, the three performance symbols 70a are a loss result. It is preferable not to perform the pre-stop suggestion light emission display effect after the temporary stop. In this way, the number of times the light emitting display performance is performed and the type of light emitting display performance to be performed will change depending on whether or not a jackpot is achieved, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the second stop suggestion performance (light emission display performance) is executed, in the case of SP reach variation performance, the light emission display performance before stop suggestion is not executed, and in the case of SPSP reach variation performance, Alternatively, a light emitting display effect before a stop suggestion may be executed.

Also, even if the light emission before stop suggestion display performance is not executed depending on the gaming state (for example, the light emission before stop suggestion display performance is executed in the normal gaming state, and the light emission before stop suggestion display performance is not executed in the specific game state). Okay, so that the second stop suggestion performance (light-emitting display performance) is not executed depending on the gaming state (the second stop suggestion performance is executed in the normal gaming state, but it is not executed in the specific gaming state). Good too.

In addition, if the light emission before stop suggestion display performance can be executed regardless of the gaming state, the light emission before stop suggestion display performance in the normal gaming state and the stop in the specific gaming state (at least one of the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state) The execution time of the pre-suggestion light emission performance may be made different (for example, the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light emission display performance in the normal gaming state>the execution time of the pre-stop suggestion light emission display performance in the specific gaming state, etc.). In this way, the time from the pre-stop suggestion light emitting display performance to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the gaming state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the second stop suggestion performance (light emission display performance) can be executed regardless of the gaming state, the second stop suggestion performance (light emission display performance) in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, fixed variable The execution time of the second stop suggestion performance (light-emitting display performance) in at least one of the gaming states may be made different (for example, the execution time of the second stop suggestion performance in the normal gaming state>the second stop suggestion in the specific gaming state). performance execution time, etc.). In this way, the time from the second stop suggestion performance (light-emitting display performance) to the start of the jackpot changes depending on the gaming state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, although the hold icon HI is re-displayed after the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, the hold icon HI may not be re-displayed depending on the type of SPSP ready-to-reach effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach effect is executed or the second SPSP reach effect that results in a loss is executed, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the first stop suggestion effect is executed, and the jackpot and the second SPSP reach effect are executed. When the second SPSP reach effect is executed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed as is without executing the first stop suggestion effect (displaying the eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI. It's okay.

In addition, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach effect, but if you want to execute a revival effect that becomes a jackpot after the reach loss effect design 70a has temporarily stopped, The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, the performance symbol 70a for a jackpot may be temporarily stopped after the revival performance is executed, and the hold icon may be redisplayed, or the performance symbol 70a for a jackpot may be displayed or held after the revival performance is performed. The opening performance of the jackpot game may be performed without redisplaying the icon HI.

In addition, if the stop command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the temporary stop time of the production symbol 70a in the reach loss variation production is longer than the temporary stop time of the production symbol 70a in the jackpot variation production. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot fluctuation performance, the temporary stop time of the performance symbol 70a in the jackpot fluctuation performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance symbol 70a in the reach loss fluctuation performance. It is now possible for the length to be longer. In addition, if the stop command or opening designation command cannot be received normally in the jackpot fluctuation performance, the temporary stop time of the performance symbol 70a in the jackpot fluctuation performance is longer than the temporary stop time of the performance symbol 70a in the reach loss fluctuation performance. It's getting longer.

In addition, in FIGS. 97(g) to (h), "symbol promotion effect" may be executed. "Symbol promotion effect" means, for example, at timing T7 in FIG. 97, a effect symbol (for example, "444") suggesting the first jackpot is displayed, and then a display symbol indicating the second jackpot is displayed. This is a performance that changes and displays a design (for example, "777").
Specifically, the effect pattern (for example, "444") is scrolled up and down, and the effect pattern (for example, "777") is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 17. Then, the performance is finished by timing T9 in FIG. 97, and at timing T10 in FIG. 97, the performance symbol (for example, "777") is stopped and displayed.

The "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to the above example, but the effects range from the effect symbol suggesting the third jackpot (for example, "555") to the effect symbol suggesting the second jackpot (for example, "777"). ) may be displayed in a changing pattern, or the effect pattern that suggests the first jackpot (for example, "444") to the effect pattern that suggests the third jackpot (for example, "555") There may be a pattern that changes and is displayed.

Further, if a plurality of types of promotion patterns are provided and a "symbol promotion performance" is executed with a specific promotion pattern, it may be determined that the performance symbol (for example, "777") is changed and displayed.
Further, the execution timing of the "symbol promotion effect" is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 97(g) to (h), and may be executed at another timing. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot game.

(Modified example when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends)
FIG. 100 shows a modification of FIGS. 97 and 99, and the particular difference is that after the icon TI and pending icon HI are hidden at the time of development, they are not displayed again and can be played in a jackpot game. This is the point of transition.

Specifically, as described in FIG. 96, the icon TI and pending icon HI are hidden during development (see FIG. 100(b)). That is, at timing T2 in FIG. 97, the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden.

Then, the configuration is such that the transition to the opening in the jackpot game occurs without re-displaying the icon TI and the pending icon HI or displaying the disappearance of the icon TI through animation as shown in FIGS. 99(h) to (j). (See Figures 100(k) and 100(l)).

With this configuration, control for redisplaying the icon TI and pending icon HI and control for displaying the icon TI so that it disappears through animation becomes unnecessary, so that a reduction in control load can be expected.

Further, the time required to redisplay the icon TI and the pending icon HI and the time required to display the icon TI disappear through animation can be omitted, and the game can be quickly shifted to a jackpot game. Thereby, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the aspect shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 may be provided together with the aspect shown in FIG. 99, only FIG. 100 may be provided, or only FIG. 99 may be provided.

Furthermore, when the mode shown in the modified example of FIG. 100 is provided together with the mode shown in FIG. 99, they may be used depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 99 may be used, and in the variable probability gaming state, the mode shown in FIG. 100 may be used, or vice versa.

(Specific example of lighting mode of starting port lamp)
A specific example of the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 76 will be described using FIG. 101. Note that although FIG. 101 shows the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 76 in the example of FIG. 100, the application example is not limited to this, and may be applied to the example of FIG. It may be applied to the example of FIG. 96, or may be applied to the example of FIG. 99.

FIG. 101(a) shows the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. 100(a). Here, as an example, the icon TI is displayed in "red" and the starting port lamp 76 is The color "red" indicates that the light is emitting light.

FIG. 101(b) shows the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. Lamp 76 continues to visibly indicate that it is emitting "red" light.

FIG. 101(c) shows the lighting mode of the starting gate lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. It shows that it continues to visibly emit "red" light.

FIG. 101(k) shows the light emission state of the starting port lamp 76 in the scene of FIG. Showing.

With this configuration, even if the icon TI, etc. is not displayed, it is possible to check what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to by visually observing the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 76. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting what color the icon TI, etc. has changed to.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
A specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart for recovering from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance, and FIGS. 103 to 105 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in FIG. 102. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 102, when the first pending number is "2", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variable display of the first special symbol, and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a variable display ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "2". Further, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the three performance symbols 70a are being scroll-displayed (updated and fluctuated), and the special symbol TZ is also being updated and fluctuated (scrolled and switched). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, a hold icon HI in a normal display mode (white) and a hold icon HI in a special display mode (blue) are displayed. Furthermore, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 103(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 102, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, the main control board 110 performs a process when the power is cut off, and the first special symbol display 60 etc. The main information display 59 including the main information display 59, the sub information display 80 including the first sub variable display, the main display device 70, the sub display device 71, etc. are in a non-display state, and the game sound output from the audio output device 9 ( (fluctuating BGM, etc.) are also in a non-output state (see FIG. 103(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 102, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. The main control board 110, which has restored the control state of the game to the state before the power cutoff, sends a power-on command to the production control board 130 (here, a second power supply indicating that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner). A recovery designation command, a first special symbol storage designation command, and a second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power cut, and the first special symbol pending display The display of the first pending number "2" at 63 is also resumed (see FIG. 103(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the power ON command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initialization of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) At the same time as the operation (including the return operation) is started, information display on the sub-information display 80 is started (see FIG. 103(d)).

At this time, in the main display device 70 during power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set to the top layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at power restoration, The performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ that are the initial roll of , the number of reservations at the time of power restoration and the reservation icon HI according to the production mode, the number of reservations according to the number of reservations at the time of power restoration, etc.) are lower than the power recovery image. Image data for power restoration notification set in the layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visibility of various performance images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the hold icon are in a state of performance operation, and the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed at the pattern stop position. Become. In addition, the hold icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if it was in the special display mode before the power outage occurred, and the icon TI is hidden even if it was displayed before the power outage occurred. (See FIG. 103(d)).

In addition, in the sub information display 80 that is notifying power restoration, the sub first fluctuation display 81 and the sub second fluctuation display 82 are in a stopped display state without fluctuating, and the sub first suspension display 83 and the sub The second reservation display 84 is in a state where the number of reservations is displayed (see FIG. 103(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 102 (during power restoration notification), when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation number becomes "3" and the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first prefetch designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 (see FIG. 104(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the production control board 130 receives the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 display "3". Become. Further, additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode in the animation on the third display section of the first hold icon display area 70B is started, but it is visually recognized by the power recovery image set in the upper layer. is in a regulated state (see FIG. 104(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T6 in FIG. 102, after the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation has finished and the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends the performance control board 130 a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 104(g)).

Next, at timing T7 in FIG. 102, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the stop command, the power recovery notification ends, and the various production images whose visibility was regulated by the power recovery image (Background image according to the production mode when the power is restored, production pattern 70a and special symbol TZ that are the initial rolls when the power is restored, pending icon HI according to the current number of reservations and production mode, depending on the current number of reservations) (reserved numbers, etc.) become visible (see FIG. 105(h)).

Then, at timing T8 in FIG. 102, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "3" to "2", a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 sends a message to the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to the player. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes to display "2" and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (first cycle variation) (FIG. 105(i) )reference).

Thereafter, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 102 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 105 (j)).

Further, the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B start shifting display (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, the fluctuating performance is started and the performance pattern 70a starts floating display as a pre-fluctuation action, the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scrolling display, switching display), and audible output of the fluctuating BGM starts. (See Figure 105(j)).

Then, at timing T10 in FIG. 102 (during the fourth cycle variation), when the shift display of the pending icons HI ends, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). In addition, scrolling display (update fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 105(k)).

In addition, when the production mode D (probability variable gaming state) is controlled when the power is restored, and when the production mode F is controlled, the display mode of the production pattern 70a will be displayed in the fourth mode, but the production The number image of the symbol 70a becomes the initial performance symbol "753" which is common to the case where the game is controlled to the performance mode A (normal gaming state) when the power is restored. In addition, in order to distinguish between the case where the production mode D (variable gaming state) is controlled when the power is restored and the case where the production mode A (normal gaming state) is controlled when the power is restored, the initial production symbol is set to "246" etc. You may also do so.

In addition, if the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state and the control state of the game is restored, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Therefore, the production control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command while the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, and the production control board 130 waits for execution of the variable production without being notified of power recovery (production pattern 70a) will be displayed.

In addition, if the power supply is restarted after the power supply has stopped during a jackpot game and the control state of the game is restored, it will take time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the main control board 110. Therefore, after the loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, a power restoration notification is performed, and then a production screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of special symbols is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply recovery image displayed in the entire display area of the main display device 70 is set in the upper layer, and By generating image data in which the hold icon displayed in the icon display area of the main display device 70 is set as a lower layer and displaying it on the main display device 70, visibility of the hold icon in the lower layer is restricted. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as confusion among players after the power is restored. Furthermore, since the same display control as when not displaying the power recovery image can be performed, it is possible to reduce control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, if a special symbol memory designation command indicating that the number of hold icons has increased is received, Image data including a pending icon is generated. Therefore, the same display control as when not displaying the power recovery image can be performed, so it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to display control.

Further, even if the power restoration image restricts the visibility of the hold icon, the hold icon and the background image perform a presentation operation. Therefore, the same display control as when not displaying the power recovery image can be performed, so it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, even if the visibility of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, if the number of holds increases, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased display) using an animation. There is. Therefore, the same display control as when not displaying the power recovery image can be performed, so it is possible to reduce the control data and control load related to display control.

In addition, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a is made different depending on whether it is controlled in the first production mode (production mode A) or in the second production mode (production mode D or F) when the power is restored. However, the numerical image of the production pattern 70a has common numerical information ("753"). Therefore, even if the display mode of the effect pattern differs depending on the effect mode after the power is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the power has been restored.

In addition, in the first reservation display area (first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64) and second reservation display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84), , a third pending display area (the pending display area of the main display device 70) in which the display mode of the pending display is not changed based on the pre-reading result, but the pending display is easier to visually recognize than the first pending display area and the second pending display area. , the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the pre-read result, and when the power supply is stopped, the hold display is not displayed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored. is, the timing for restarting the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the main display device 70) is higher than the restart timing of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 63). , the second special symbol hold display 64) and the second hold display area (the sub-first hold display 83, the sub-second hold display 84) are restarted earlier. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the power is being restored and to let the player know the number of pending games at an early timing. Note that the timing for restarting the hold display in the first hold display area may be earlier than the timing for restarting the hold display in the second hold display area.

Further, the hold icon HI, which was displayed in a special display mode before the power was cut off, is displayed in a normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, there is no need to back up and store information indicating that the pending icon was in a special display mode in the production control board 130, and it is possible to avoid complicating the hardware configuration of the production control board 130. .

In addition, after the power is restored, the hold icon is visibly displayed after the variable display (blinking due to the moving lighting of the LED) on the first special symbol display 60 (second special symbol display 61) is resumed. It looks like this. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after displaying the power recovery image, the initial operations (including return operations) of various accessories (movable presentation device 73, sub-display device 71, presentation button 17) perform presentation operations at different timings for each accessory. It is designed to be executed in the same manner as the case. Therefore, it is possible to make it known that the initial movements of various accessories were executed due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the initial movements are performance movements.

Note that the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are configured to stop displaying without displaying fluctuations during the power restoration notification, but when the power restoration notification is being performed ( The variable display may be performed after receiving the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop display may be performed upon receiving the stop command (symbol confirmation command).

(Specific example of when the start command cannot be received normally during look-ahead performance)
A specific example of a case where the start command cannot be normally received during the prefetch performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

FIG. 106 is a timing chart in the case where the start command cannot be received normally during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 107 to 108 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 106. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 106, when the first pending number is "2", the first special symbol display 60 displays a variable display of the first special symbol, and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a variable display ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the first reservation number display area SA, and the sub-first reservation display 83 are displaying "2". In addition, three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, a hold icon HI in a normal display mode (white) and a hold icon HI in a special display mode (blue) are displayed. Furthermore, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 107(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 106, when the pre-read zone effect is started, the above-mentioned mid-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, a prefetch zone background image is displayed in a horizontally scrolled state, and a zone image ZG including a character image of "ZONE" is displayed. Further, the volume of the variable BGM decreases and output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 106, when the central performance symbol 70a that was being scrolled (updated and fluctuated) temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a temporary stop sound, and the character of the central performance symbol 70a performs a performance motion (a pre-stop motion of shaking the head), and all the performance symbols 70a become temporarily stopped (see FIG. 107(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound stops, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 A stop command (design confirmation command) is sent to. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 107(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Additionally, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C starts to disappear in animation, and the production pattern 70a ("523") and the special symbol TZ ("523") start to stop display ( (See FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 106, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 107(f)).

After that, at timing T6 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "2" to "1", a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 sends the message to the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to the player. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (first cycle variation) (Fig. 108(g) )reference).

However, since the production control board 130 could not normally receive the start command, the pending display was originally updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. Update, shift display of pending icon HI) and variable effects are supposed to be executed, but they are not executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is extended, and the look-ahead effect performance that is supposed to be executed over two variable performances from the current variable performance is not started. However, even during the extension period of the stop display period of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the horizontal scrolling of the pre-reading zone background image and the performance operation of the hold icon HI continue to be performed. (See FIG. 108(h)).

Then, at timing T8 in FIG. 106, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 108(i)).

However, when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the stop command, the disappearing display of the icon TI and the stop display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ should normally be executed, but these will not be executed.

After that, at timing T9 in FIG. 106, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 transfers the information to the production control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to the player. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display (first cycle fluctuation) (FIG. 108(j) )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 106 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending The display 83 becomes "0" and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts (see FIG. 108(k)).

In addition, among the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the previous variable display of the special symbol is erased in a non-animated manner, and the second pending icon HI (white icon) is deleted in a non-animated manner. The hold icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the current special symbol displayed on the display section is displayed in a non-animated manner on the first display section. Then, the pending icon HI displayed on the first display section starts shifting display (decreasing display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the fluctuation performance is started and the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-fluctuation operation, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 108(k)).

Then, at timing T11 in FIG. 106 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the floating display of the production symbol 70a, a look-ahead effect that should be executed over two variation productions from the previous variation production. The performance is started with a delay of one time, and a blue light emitting effect image EF is displayed around the performance symbol 70a (see FIG. 108(l)).

Thereafter, at timing T12 in FIG. 106 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, an icon change effect at the time of starting the variation is performed, and the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then scrolling display (update variation) of the effect pattern 70a is started.

In this way, if the performance control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, the fluctuation performance is not executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is the target of the predetermined look-ahead performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misperceiving the progress of the game due to the predetermined pre-read effect not being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of a special symbol that should start a predetermined pre-read effect (pre-read effect effect) due to the effect control board 130 not being able to properly receive the start command, this special symbol It is regulated that a predetermined look-ahead effect is started during the fluctuating display, and when the fluctuating performance is executed during the fluctuating display of the special symbol to be executed next, the pre-reading that was regulated during the fluctuating display of this special symbol is regulated. The performance is about to begin. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misperceiving the progress of the game due to the predetermined pre-read effect not being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the start command, but the variation production is not executed, the first pre-read production (icon change production, pre-read zone production) is not executed. However, the second prefetch effect (prefetch effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misperceiving the progress of the game due to the predetermined pre-read effect not being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, variable BGM (suggestive effect sound) is output during the execution of a variable effect (suggestive effect) to suggest the result of the jackpot judgment, and a target variable effect that is the target of expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. In addition to outputting zone BGM (pre-production sound) that suggests that a special game may be executed from before, the zone BGM is also output after the start of the target variation production, and when the zone BGM is being output. , the suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, while the pre-reading zone effect is being performed (while the zone BGM is being output), the volume of the fluctuating BGM is reduced, but the audible output of the variable BGM is to be stopped (muted) while the pre-reading zone presentation is being performed. You may also do so.

In addition, even if the effect control board 130 cannot normally receive the command at the time of start, and the icon change effect that is executed over multiple variable effects or the variable effect that starts the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the next execution The icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variable effect that is performed.

In addition, a look-ahead effect performance is executed as a look-ahead performance that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, but instead of a look-ahead effect performance, each variable performance (including a variable performance that results in a jackpot) is executed. You may execute a look-ahead countdown effect that performs a countdown effect (displaying a countdown image, outputting a countdown sound), or a so-called chance count (such as 556 or 667) for each variable effect (not including a variable effect that results in a jackpot). A losing roll with a certain rule that does not form a reach state is temporarily stopped, and the display of light emitting effect images around the three production symbols 70a and the output of effect sound effects are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). A look-ahead chance effect (a light-emission display effect when a chance move stops) may be executed in which the chance move is stopped and displayed after the move, or these three look-ahead effects may be executed.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance roll display (light-emitting display display when the chance roll is stopped), instead of making rolls with a certain rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of odd symbols among the production symbols are used. The numbers of the even symbols are set as red, and the numbers of the even symbols are set as blue, and the same color symbols such as "135" and "357" where all the numbers of the three production symbols 70a are red are temporarily stopped (stop display), "246" and " 468'', etc., where the numbers of the three production patterns 70a are all blue may be temporarily stopped (stopped display), and in this case, compared to the case where the same color blue patterns are temporarily stopped, The expectation level of jackpot may be higher when red symbols of the same color are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance production (light-emission display production when chance production stops), a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three production symbols 70a at the timing when the three (3 rows) production symbols 70a on the left-center right temporarily stop. Instead of performing a production that outputs an effect sound effect, a production that temporarily stops each time the three (3 rows) production symbols 70a on the left-center right temporarily stop in order (for example, every time a bounce display is performed). By displaying an effect image around the pattern 70a and outputting a light emitting effect sound effect (for example, every 0.5 seconds), the timing at which the three (three rows) of the effect images 70a on the left-center right side will emit light. may be different.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a look-ahead chance effect, while in a specific game state where a right-handed image is displayed (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state), the look-ahead chance look effect is executed. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead chance effect is not executed, but in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state) in which a right-handed image is displayed, the look-ahead chance effect is executed. You may also do so.

In addition, in the look-ahead chance production, instead of displaying the luminescent effect image around the three production symbols 70a, the luminous effect image is only displayed around the production symbol 70a in one of the left middle right columns (for example, the center column). An image may also be displayed.

In addition, when displaying the light emitting effect image in the look-ahead chance effect, the frame illumination device 10 may be set in a chance eye emitting mode (for example, the same color as the display color of the light emitting effect image displayed around the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a). ) may be used to emit light.

(Specific example when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed)
A specific example in which a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

FIG. 109 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while a menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 109. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 109, the player is in a waiting state for a customer in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed. At this time, a losing special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60, and on the main display device 70, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (production operation), and the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is in a state where it is stopped and displayed with a losing result ("537") which is the stop result of the previous variable performance. Furthermore, the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 110(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 109, when the production button 17 is operated, the menu operation becomes valid, and a plurality of selection items (game ("Model Description" item where explanations related to Machine 1 are displayed, "Customize Effects" item for customizing the effects in variable effects, "Pachilog" item for managing logs linked to mobile phones) A menu image MG including the following is displayed (see FIG. 110(b)).

Then, at timing T2 in FIG. 109, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the main control board 110 (broken wire, disconnected connector, etc.), the main control board 110 Processing at the time of power cutoff is performed, and the main information display 59 including the first special symbol display 60 is in a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub information display 80, the main display device 70, and the sub display device 71 continue (see FIG. 110(c)).

Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at timing T3 in FIG. Processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game. Then, a power-on command (here, a power-on designation command, a first special symbol storage designation command, and a second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, information display on the main information display 59 (display of losing special symbols on the first special symbol display 60, etc.) is started (see FIG. 110(d)).

Next, at timing T4 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the power-on command, the main display device 70 and sub-display device 71 include the words "NOW ROADING". The loading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub-information display 80 is momentarily hidden, and the audio output device 9 is in a state where game sounds (variable BGM, etc.) are not output (FIG. 110(e)) reference).

Then, at timing T5 in FIG. 109, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after displaying the loading screen (initial screen), the above-mentioned power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) At the same time, information display on the sub-information display 80 starts (see FIG. 110(f)).

At this time, on the main display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed in front of the mode A background image where the horizontal scrolling (effect movement) has started at the initial roll ("135") when the power is turned on. At the same time, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area SA and the second reservation number display area SB. Further, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, and mute output at the beginning of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 110(f)).

In addition, even when a power restoration designation command is received while displaying the menu image MG, the effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ displayed on the main display device 70 are the initial rolls ("753") at the time of power restoration. This is basically the same as when a power-on designation command is received, except that the power-on notification sound is not output.

Additionally, even if a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed, basically the power-on command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed. Same as in the case.

In this way, the command received by the production control board 130 from the main control board 110 while displaying the menu image MG on the main display device 70 is the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the menu image is made invisible on the main display device 70, and an image (such as a loading screen) corresponding to the power-on command is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130.

In addition, in this embodiment, the firing permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to fire the game ball. By transmitting a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control is started, the game balls may be fired after the game becomes ready for play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so the ball lending control board 120 installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1 It is possible to pay out game balls based on a payout request from a ball lending machine (ball lending), but game balls cannot be paid out based on a payout request from a ball lending machine after the game progress control has started and the game is ready for play. It may also be possible to pay out (lending balls).

In addition, in this embodiment, since backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) stores the unpaid data. Although no data on the number of balls to be put out remains, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the unpaid ball number data remains. It may also be possible to pay out game balls based on this.

Further, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the gaming area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the gaming area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the establishment of award conditions (the winning of game balls in the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening), but the The balls may be managed as data, and prize ball data may be added (added to ball data).

Further, in this embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom of the screen, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed across the screen. It is preferable to display the zone images on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone performances can be made compatible, and the performance effect can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot preview effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution mode of the variable performance is basically the same between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), but for example, the first stage performance in the normal gaming state Post-stage effects (cases of pre-reach effect and reach effect, cases of normal reach effect and SP reach effect, cases of SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect, case of pre-reach effect and temporary stop of the effect pattern, during reach effect and effect pattern) The first information advantageous to the player (information suggesting jackpot expectation level, information regarding execution of a special game, etc.) is notified during the execution of the subsequent stage performance of the variable performance (e.g. during temporary suspension of 70a). , Second information different from the first information (additional information on songs that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, mission achievement status, etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of a first stage performance and a second stage performance in the normal gaming state, there is a case where a common second stage performance is executed after executing the first stage performance, and a case where a common second stage performance is executed after executing a second stage performance different from the first stage performance. A common subsequent performance may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common subsequent performance that is executed when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends)
With reference to FIG. 111, a timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is completed will be described. Note that FIG. 111 is a timing chart that explains FIG. 97 in more detail, particularly regarding the aspects of the "frame lighting device,""board lighting device,""button drive device," and "effect button light-emitting LED." 97, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with FIG. 97 will be omitted as appropriate. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 111, a supplementary explanation will be provided using FIG. 112.

In addition, FIG. 111 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal gaming state" and the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends, but the invention is not limited to this. The same thing may be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability changing gaming state".

Timing T4 in FIG. 111 corresponds to timing T4 in FIG. 97, and is the timing at which the SP reach effect has developed.
When the SP reach effect develops, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 perform SP reach light emission, the button drive device 17b is OFF, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off. In addition, when executing the effect pattern 03 (see FIG. 36) of the blackout effect, the button drive device 17b is turned on for 3 seconds (the effect button 17 vibrates).

Timing T5 in FIG. 111 is the timing at which the SPSP reach effect has developed.
When the SPSP reach effect develops, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 perform SPSP reach light emission, the button drive device 17b is OFF, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c is turned off. Note that the button driving device 17b may be turned on when the cut-in notice is executed.

At timing T6 in FIG. 111, a promotion sound (for example, "Press") is output as a sound effect to urge the player to operate the performance button 17, and the performance button light emitting LED 17c emits white light.

Then, when the player operates the production button 17 at timing T7, a success sound of "kyuinkyuin" is output, and the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the production button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light for a predetermined period of time. Then, the button drive device 17b is turned on for 5 seconds and the production button 17 vibrates. As a result, the player is notified of the jackpot (see FIG. 112(f)).

Then, at timing T8, the output of the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" stops, and the rainbow light emission of the production button light emitting LED 17c ends. On the other hand, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b continues to be turned on. In this way, by first ending the rainbow emission of the production button emission LED 17c, the player's viewpoint can be directed toward the main display device 70 (see FIG. 112(g)).

Then, at the timing T9, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 receives the stop command at the timing T10, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. . Furthermore, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 end their rainbow emission, and the button drive device 17b is turned off (see FIG. 112(i)).

In this way, the fact that there is a jackpot is notified through each lighting device and the vibration of the performance button, so that the player's sense of satisfaction with having won the jackpot can be increased.

Note that the output period of the success sound, the period of rainbow emission, and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may be changed as appropriate. For example, both may be executed until timing T10. Further, the rainbow emission of the production button emission LED is first terminated, then the rainbow emission of the frame illumination device 10 is terminated, and finally, the rainbow emission of the board illumination device 74 is terminated at timing T10. Good too. Usually, the player pays attention to the main display device 70, and the rainbow emission of the board lighting device 74 near the main display device 70 (compared to the frame lighting device 10 and the production button light emitting LED) is visible to the player. Easy to enter. Therefore, by finally ending the rainbow emission of the board illumination device 74 (which is easily visible) at timing T10, it is possible to lift the player's mood. Moreover, since the rainbow emission of the board illumination device 74 has ended, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that a jackpot game will be executed from now on.

Further, the success sound, rainbow emission, and vibration may be performed continuously or intermittently. For example, in a decisive performance, a success sound is output, a rainbow is emitted, a vibration is performed, and after these performances are temporarily turned off, immediately before the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, in FIG. 112(g)), , it may be turned on again. With this configuration, it is possible to clarify the scene that the player wants to focus on, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, the period of rainbow emission may be made different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the time-saving game state, or the jackpot is won in the variable probability game state. For example, when winning a jackpot in a variable probability gaming state, the period of rainbow emission may be shorter than when winning a jackpot in a normal gaming state. In other words, if a player wins a jackpot in a normal gaming state where it is difficult to win a jackpot, the period of rainbow emission is made longer than in a variable gaming state, making the player who won a jackpot in a situation where it is difficult to win a jackpot feel superior. It can be soaked. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in a variable probability game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, excessive jackpot notification can be prevented by making the period of rainbow emission shorter than in the normal gaming state. This allows suitable notification depending on the situation (gaming state).

On the other hand, the output period of the success sound and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may be a common execution period regardless of the game state. Thereby, the output control of the success sound and the control for vibrating the performance button 17 can be made common to a plurality of game states, and the control and performance data can be simplified.
It should be noted that the output period of the success sound and the period of vibrating the effect button 17 may also be made different depending on the game state, similar to the period of rainbow emission described above.

Note that, although not particularly illustrated, not only rainbow light emission by each illumination device but also rainbow display by the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 may be performed. This rainbow display starts at timing T7, but ends, for example, at timing T8 or from timing T8 to T9. That is, it ends before the rainbow light emission of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. As a result, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 are responsible for the rainbow-colored decoration, and a new image (for example, a lingering image to be described later) is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub-display device 71. Therefore, the display on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 can be enriched without reducing the decorativeness.

(If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the performance mode when the performance control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop at the timing of T10 will be explained.

If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit rainbow light → The rainbow light continues to emit light even after the timing T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow emission of the production button light emission LED 17c ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the production is not extended).
Since the output ends before reaching the timing of success sound output → T10, it is not affected even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
When the button drive device 17b is turned ON for 5 seconds, it is turned OFF, so even if the stop command cannot be received, it will not be affected (the performance will not be extended).
The relevant icon TI→disappearance is not displayed, and the performance operation is continued.
Continuous horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible). For example, as shown in the normal background image data in FIG. 119, the image data changes.

As a result, even if the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, so that a jackpot game can be executed later. This allows the player to reliably understand the following.

Further, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the performance operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
Further, since the background image normally continues to horizontally scroll (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(About the success sound and rainbow emission at the timing of T7)
Here, further details (frames) of the success sound and rainbow emission at the timing of T7 will be explained.
In this embodiment, the update cycle (frame update timing) of the effect image controlled by the overall control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, The control cycle of the board lighting device 74 and the production button light emitting LED 17c) is synchronized (synchronized) at 1/30 second.

For example, if the frame immediately before the timing T7 in FIG. 111 is the "1500" frame (the time when the fluctuation starts is the "1" frame), the production button detection sw17a is turned ON at the "1501" frame at the timing T7 ( (The player operates the performance button 17).
When the production button detection sw17a is turned on, an operation command is transmitted from the production control unit 130m to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In this case, the image control unit 145 stores a "success image" (for example, in FIG. f) is drawn, and the "success image" is developed in the "1503" frame. Thereby, the "success image" becomes visible via the main display device 70.
Furthermore, in the audio control unit 148, a "success sound" is output from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the "1503rd" frame. As a result, the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" can be heard.

Furthermore, the lamp control unit 150 outputs rainbow light emission data that causes each lighting device (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, production button light emitting LED 17c) to emit a rainbow light in synchronization with the “1503” frame. Ru. This makes it possible to visually see how each lighting device emits rainbow light.

In this way, in the above example, the "success image" is displayed, the "success sound" is output, and the "rainbow light emission" is emitted in synchronization with the "1503" frame, so the performance to notify the jackpot is executed. It is possible to maintain the same pace (without any discrepancy in any one of the notification means), and to execute jackpot notification that is easy for the player to understand.

Although not enumerated in the example of FIG. 111, in the jackpot notification, even in the structure of moving the movable performance device described later or the structure of vibrating the vibration means, synchronized with the "1503" frame in the above example. Just do it.

Then, for example, the "success sound" is turned off in the "1530th" frame, and the rainbow light emission of the production button light emitting LED 17c is turned off in the "1540th" frame.
For example, when the stop display is performed at timing T10 (for example, at the "1650th frame"), the rainbow light emission of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 (one or both) is turned off.

As a result, in the above example, the rainbow emission of the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 (one or both) ends in synchronization with the stop display of the "1650" frame, so the rainbow emission continues after the stop display. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the game is not executed continuously.
Note that the above description regarding frame synchronization can be applied to the following diagram explaining jackpot notification.

(Timing chart when a jackpot game is executed after a variable performance accompanied by a symbol promotion performance or a revival performance ends)
An example where a symbol promotion performance is executed, an example where a revival performance is executed, and an example of a performance during a jackpot game will be explained using FIG. 113. It should be noted that FIG. 113 will be explained with emphasis on parts that are different from FIG. 111 (mainly production symbols and production pattern modes). Further, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 113, a supplementary explanation will be provided using FIGS. 114 and 115.

In addition, FIGS. 113 to 115 will be described as an example in which a jackpot game is executed after a variable performance accompanied by a symbol promotion performance or a resurrection performance is completed in a "normal game state", but the present invention is not limited to this. The same thing may be done in the "time-saving gaming state" or the "probability-changing gaming state."

(When "design promotion effect" is executed)
At timing T7 in FIG. 113, the effect symbols complete their update fluctuations and temporarily stop. At this time, the effect pattern mode (temporarily stopped effect pattern) is set to "444" (first mode in the effect pattern) (see FIGS. 114(f) to (g)).
Further, a success sound "Kuinkyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the production button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b is turned on and the production button 17 vibrates.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114(f) to (g), when the production pattern temporarily stops at "444", the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, the "symbol promotion performance" is executed, and each performance symbol 70a starts scrolling as shown in FIGS. 114(g) to (g)'. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the production button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
Note that while the "symbol promotion performance" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the "symbol promotion performance" was executed.

If the "symbol promotion effect" is successful, the production symbol 70a of "777" (second mode based on the production pattern) is temporarily stopped, and the "symbol promotion effect" fails, as shown in FIG. 114(h). If so, for example, the production symbol 70a of "444" is temporarily stopped again. At this time, the success sound "Kyuinkyuin" is outputted again as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and production button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b is turned on and the production button 17 is turned on. Vibrate.
In addition, the configuration that outputs the success sound again, the configuration that causes each lighting device to emit rainbow light, and the configuration that vibrates the production button 17 are executed only when the "symbol promotion production" is successful, and that the "symbol promotion" If the "promotion effect" fails, it may not be executed.
In addition, also in FIG. 114(h), the special symbol TZ continues to be updated and fluctuated in the same manner as before the execution of the "symbol promotion effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 114(i), both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". In other words, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the production pattern 70a temporarily stops before executing the "symbol promotion effect", and even if the production pattern 70a temporarily stops after executing the "symbol promotion effect", the update variation continues. The update fluctuation is continued and the update fluctuation is stopped and the display is stopped at the same time as the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. As a result, for example, even if some players find it difficult to understand whether or not the fluctuation performance is continuing due to the execution of the "symbol promotion performance" of the performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation performance can be changed due to the continuous update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ. It is possible to recognize that this is continuing.

(When "resurrection effect" is executed)
Next, a case where a "resurrection effect" is executed will be explained. For convenience, the case where the "symbol promotion effect" is executed and the case where the "resurrection effect" is executed are shown together in Figure 113, but the "symbol promotion effect" is executed after the "resurrection effect" is executed. May be executed.

At timing T7 in FIG. 113, the effect symbols complete their update fluctuations and temporarily stop. At this time, the effect pattern mode (temporarily stopped effect pattern) is set to "454" (first mode according to the effect pattern) (see FIGS. 115(f) to (g)).
In addition, a failure sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 93(f)), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the production button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button drive device 17b is turned off. be.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 115(f) to (g), when the production pattern temporarily stops at "454", the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate.

Then, from timing T8 to T8-1, a "resurrection effect" is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 115(g) to (g)', a revival effect image FG imitating lightning is displayed. At this time, the sound effect is OFF, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 emit white light, the production button light emitting LED 17c is turned off, and the button driving device 17b is OFF.
Note that while the "resurrection effect" is being executed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in the same manner as before the execution of the "resurrection effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(h), the performance symbol 70a of "777" (second mode based on the performance symbol) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the success sound "Kuinkyuin" is output as a sound effect, the frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, and production button light emitting LED 17c emit rainbow light, and the button drive device 17b is turned on, causing the production button 17 to vibrate. .
In addition, also in FIG. 115(h), the special symbol TZ continues to be updated and fluctuated in the same manner as before the execution of the "resurrection effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(i), both the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "777". In other words, the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate even if the production pattern 70a temporarily stops before executing the "resurrection effect", and continues to update and fluctuate even if the production pattern 70a temporarily stops after executing the "resurrection effect". However, when the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, the update fluctuation is ended and the display is stopped. As a result, for example, even if some players find it difficult to understand whether or not the fluctuating performance is continuing due to the execution of the "resurrection performance" of the performance symbol 70a, the fluctuating performance will continue due to the continuous update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ. It can make you realize that it is continuing.

Then, in both cases where the "symbol promotion performance" is executed and the "resurrection performance" is executed, the jackpot game starts from timing T14, and during the jackpot game, among the performance symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed, Only the numerical part of the effect pattern 70a of 1 is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 114(m) and 115(m), a round image RG showing the first round of the jackpot game, and an acquired game ball number image GG showing the game balls acquired in the jackpot game. , a right-handed image UG, a character image KG, and a character introduction image KSG showing details of the displayed character image KG. "7") is displayed in a position that does not overlap with other display images (for example, the upper left).

The number part (for example, "7") of the effect pattern 70a of 1 is a pattern corresponding to the effect pattern 70a that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i), and is displayed swinging below the round image RG. It is also displayed in the same size as the display size when it is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114(i)).
In addition, the display data of the numerical part (for example, "7") of the effect pattern 70a of 1 is display data different from the display data of the effect pattern 70a stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i).

In this way, by oscillating and displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the 1 performance symbol 70a, it is possible to improve the performance interest during the jackpot game.
In addition, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the 1 effect pattern 70a so as not to overlap with other images (for example, right-handed image UG), other images can be reliably recognized. .
In addition, by displaying the number part (for example, "7") of the first effect pattern 70a in the same size as the display size when it is stopped (see FIG. 114(i)), other images (for example, the right It is possible to prevent the display of the stamped image UG) from being obstructed, and it is possible to reliably make other images visible.
Furthermore, for example, if a symbol (for example, "7") that does not correspond to the performance symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i) is displayed, the player may feel uncomfortable. If so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by displaying a symbol (for example, "7") corresponding to the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(i).

In addition, during the jackpot game, three performance symbols 70a may be displayed, (one or three) performance symbols 70a with characters may be displayed, or the performance symbol 70a may be displayed without swinging. It may be stopped all the time, it may be made to swing and stop repeatedly, or it may be rotated. Note that the effect pattern 70a with a character refers to a state in which a numerical pattern is attached to a character, for example, as in the effect pattern 70a in FIG. 114(i).

In the example of FIG. 114, the "symbol promotion effect" performed in (g) to (g)' constitutes the pre-stop motion, and in the example of FIG. 115, the "symbol promotion effect" performed in (g) to (g)' constitutes "Resurrection performance" constitutes the pre-stop action.

(About the start timing of the fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game)
Here, the characteristic part of the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, which is not shown in FIG. 113, will be mentioned.
At the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, as the display mode of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the same type of pattern as the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ that were stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "777" is displayed as the production symbol 70a, "777" is displayed as the special symbol TZ, and the state is The variable display (first variation) after the end of the jackpot game starts from.

This allows the player to reconfirm what the jackpot symbol was at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game.
In addition, the same type of symbol means, for example, when the performance symbol 70a with a character is stopped and displayed at "777", the performance symbol 70a with a character "777" is displayed again at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the performance pattern 70a with a character is stopped and displayed at "777", when the performance pattern 70a with only numbers "777" is displayed at the start timing of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot game, For example, if the number-only production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed at "777", it is assumed that the number-only production pattern 70a "777" is displayed at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game. .

On the other hand, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, as the display mode of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, a pattern different from the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ that were stopped and displayed at the timing T10 may be displayed. . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 113, in the stop display, "777" was stopped and displayed as the performance symbol 70a, and "777" was stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ, but the variable display after the end of the jackpot game At the start timing, "135" (the initial roll after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the production pattern 70a, and "135" (the initial roll after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. It's okay.
For example, if the player is waiting for a customer when the jackpot game ends (if the number of pending players is 0 at the end of the jackpot game), the main display device 70 will display "777" as the performance symbol 70a (the game player will not be able to enter the starting slot). The special symbol TZ "777" will be stopped and displayed (until the game ball enters the starting hole). In such a case, it may give the misunderstanding that the game is moving to a jackpot game, so by displaying the initial roll after the jackpot game state ends as described above, this misunderstanding can be given. This can be prevented.

The configuration of displaying different kinds of symbols is particularly effective in a gaming machine that may display a predetermined symbol as the jackpot effect symbol 70a. A special symbol is a symbol that is not displayed as the production symbol 70a during update fluctuations in the normal gaming state, but is displayed only when a jackpot is won by the special symbol.For example, the jackpot display mode of the production symbol 70a becomes "5 (left) - predetermined symbol (middle) - 5 (right)". In such a case, at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game, "135" (the initial roll after the end of the jackpot game state) is displayed as the production pattern 70a, and "135" (the jackpot) is displayed as the special symbol TZ. By displaying the initial result after the end of the gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the predetermined symbol being displayed at the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game.

Note that the characteristic part in the start timing of the variable display after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to that shown in FIG. 113, but is applicable to timing charts that transition to the jackpot game (for example, FIG. 111 described above and FIG. 117 described below). It's fine.

(If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the performance mode when the performance control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop at the timing of T10 will be explained.

If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74 emit rainbow light → The rainbow light continues to emit light even after the timing T10 (the effect is extended and executed).
Since the rainbow emission of the production button light emission LED 17c ends before the timing of T10 is reached, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the production is not extended).
Since the output ends before reaching the timing of success sound output → T10, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
Since the vibration ends before the button drive device 17b is driven → T10 timing, there is no effect even if the stop command cannot be received (the performance is not extended).
The temporary stop continues at "777" even after the timing of production pattern 70a→T10. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until an opening designation command is received at timing T13.
The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of special symbol TZ→T10. Then, for example, the update fluctuation continues until the opening designation command is received at timing T13.
The relevant icon TI→disappearance is not displayed, and the performance operation is continued.
Continuous horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible).

As a result, even if the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 continue to emit rainbow light, so that a jackpot game can be executed later. This allows the player to reliably understand the following.

Furthermore, even if the production control board 130 fails to receive the stop command, it will continue to temporarily stop the production pattern 70a without stopping and displaying it, and will continue to update and fluctuate the special pattern TZ, so it will recognize that it is a jackpot. While doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game has not yet started because each symbol has not stopped and been displayed.

Further, the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when an opening designation command is received at timing T13. As a result, even if the production control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop, it can be terminated by the next received command (in this case, the opening designation command), so the production pattern 70a can be temporarily stopped, or the special symbol It is possible to save the effort of transmitting and receiving a dedicated command again to end the TZ update fluctuation.

Further, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the performance operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
Further, since the background image normally continues to horizontally scroll (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect ends)
FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the effect image and effect pattern of FIG. 92 in detail. Therefore, the effect image and the effect pattern will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with FIG. 92 will be omitted.

In addition, FIG. 116 will be described as an example in which the variable performance is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect ends in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to the "time-saving gaming state" or the "probability variable game". The same thing may be done in "state".

At timing T0 in FIG. 116, the effect symbols are updated and fluctuated with characters attached. As described above, with characters is a state in which a numerical pattern is attached to the character.
Then, at timing T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. Note that the normal reach performance is performed using the performance pattern 70a with a character. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "with character".

Then, at timing T2, when the normal reach performance ends, the performance pattern 70a with characters changes to a performance pattern 70a with only numbers (for example, see FIG. 93(a)). Then, an update variation is performed using the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a with a character changes to the performance pattern 70a with only numbers, for example, the character part of the performance pattern 70a disappears from the state shown in FIG. 91(g), and the number part changes to the state shown in FIG. It is designed to move to the position shown in a). Then, during the movement, the display size of the number part is gradually reduced, and the screen moves to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). That is, the display size of the number part at the timing when the character part disappears, the display size of the number part at the timing when the character part is moving (intermediate position), and the display size of the number part at the timing when the character part moves to the position shown in FIG. 93(a). Regarding the display sizes, in descending order of display size, the timing when the character part disappears>timing when the character part is moving (intermediate position)>timing when it moves to the position shown in FIG. 93(a).
As a result, only the numerical part is not suddenly displayed in a manner shown in FIG. 93(a), thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, by displaying all movement modes so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the player can enjoy even the smallest details.

Then, at timing T4, the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and the SP ready-to-reach image is displayed as the effect image (for example, see FIG. 93(c)).
Further, even during the execution of the SP ready-to-reach performance, update fluctuations are continuously performed using the performance pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.

Then, at timing T5, when the SP ready-to-reach effect ends and the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is executed, the SPSP ready-to-reach image is displayed as the effect image (for example, see FIG. 93(d)).
Further, even during the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, update fluctuations are continuously performed using the performance pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.

Then, at the timing T6, a final image corresponding to the final performance is displayed as the performance image (for example, see FIG. 93(e)), and at the timing T7, the final image corresponding to the final performance is displayed as the performance image in response to the operation of the performance button 17. Display the image (for example, see FIG. 93(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as a "temporary stop number."

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a is returned to the state before the execution of the SP ready-to-reach performance. Then, a temporary stop is made at the effect pattern 70a with the character. In addition, in FIG. 116, this is described as "temporary stop".

In addition, when changing from the performance pattern 70a with only numbers to the performance pattern 70a with characters, the movement mode can be visually recognized as when the above-mentioned performance pattern 70a with characters changes to the performance pattern 70a with only numbers. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. 131, which will be described later, a switching image is displayed to change the effect pattern 70a with only numbers to the effect pattern 70a with characters. Thereby, the mode of the symbols can be changed quickly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to, for example, being shown the moving mode of the symbols after being notified of a loss.

Then, at timing T10, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
With this configuration, in the SP ready-to-reach presentation or the SPSP ready-to-reach presentation, by displaying the display space of the presentation pattern 70a consisting only of numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the performance contents of the SP ready-to-reach presentation or the SPSP ready-to-reach presentation. Then, when the SPSP ready-to-win performance is finished, by returning to the performance pattern 70a with the character, the next variable performance can be smoothly started without any discomfort.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 116, it is assumed that the performance pattern 70a changes to the form of numbers only, but even if the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is performed, the effect pattern 70a may not change with the character attached. good.

In the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the effect pattern 70a during the display of the failure images (f) to (g) constitutes the pre-stop action.

(If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10)
Here, the performance mode when the performance control board 130 cannot receive the command at the time of stop at the timing of T10 will be explained.

If the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing of T10,
The relevant icon TI→disappearance is not displayed, and the performance operation is continued.
Continuous horizontal scrolling from background image to normal background (continuous background change is possible).
A temporary stop is also performed at the effect pattern 70a with the character after the timing of the effect pattern 70a→T10. Then, for example, the temporary stop is continued until the start command is received at timing T13.
The update fluctuation continues even after the timing of special symbol TZ→T10. Then, for example, the update fluctuation continues until the start command is received at timing T13.

As a result, even if the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, the production pattern 70a continues to be temporarily stopped without being displayed in a stopped state, and the special pattern TZ continues to update and fluctuate, so each symbol is still stopped. It is possible to recognize that the next variable display will not start without displaying the display.

In addition, the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a and the update fluctuation of the special pattern TZ are terminated, for example, when a start command is received at timing T13. As a result, even if the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command, it can be terminated with the next received command (in this case, the start command), so the production pattern 70a can be temporarily stopped, or the special symbol It is possible to save the effort of transmitting and receiving a dedicated command again to end the TZ update fluctuation.

Further, since the icon TI does not disappear and continues to perform the performance operation, the player can be entertained until the next command is received.
Further, since the background image normally continues to horizontally scroll (the background can be continuously changed), the player can be entertained until the next command is received.

(Timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends)
FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating the effect image and effect pattern of FIG. 97 in detail. Therefore, the effect image and the effect pattern will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the overlapping parts with FIG. 97 will be omitted.

In addition, FIG. 117 will be described as an example in which the variable performance is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the "time-saving gaming state" or "probable variable game" The same thing may be done in "state".

At the timing of T0 in FIG. 117, the effect symbols are updated and fluctuated with characters attached. As described above, with characters is a state in which a numerical pattern is attached to the character.
Then, at timing T1, the normal reach effect is executed, and the normal reach image is displayed as the effect image. Note that the normal reach performance is performed using the performance pattern 70a with a character. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "with character".

Then, at timing T2, when the normal reach performance ends, the performance pattern 70a with characters changes to a performance pattern 70a with only numbers. Then, an update variation is performed using the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers. Note that the manner in which the effect pattern 70a with characters changes to the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 116.

Then, at timing T4, the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and the SP ready-to-reach image is displayed as the effect image.
Further, even during the execution of the SP ready-to-reach performance, update fluctuations are continuously performed using the performance pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.

Then, at timing T5, when the SP ready-to-reach effect ends and the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is executed, the SPSP ready-to-reach image is displayed as the effect image.
Furthermore, even during the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, update fluctuations are continuously performed using the performance pattern 70a consisting only of numbers.

Then, at the timing T6, a final image corresponding to the final performance is displayed as the performance image (for example, see FIG. 98(e)), and at the timing T7, the final image corresponding to the final performance is displayed as the performance image in response to the operation of the performance button 17. Display the image (for example, see FIG. 98(f)). At this time, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped at the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers. In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as a "temporary stop number."

Then, at the timing of T8, the performance pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the performance pattern 70a with characters, and the state of the performance pattern 70a is returned to the state before the execution of the SP ready-to-reach performance. Then, a temporary stop is made at the effect pattern 70a with the character (for example, see FIG. 98(g)). In addition, in FIG. 117, this is described as "temporary stop". Note that the manner in which the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the effect pattern 70a with characters is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 116.

Then, at timing T10, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached.
With this configuration, in the SP ready-to-reach presentation or the SPSP ready-to-reach presentation, by displaying the display space of the presentation pattern 70a consisting only of numbers, it is possible to concentrate on the performance contents of the SP ready-to-reach presentation or the SPSP ready-to-reach presentation.

In the example of FIG. 116, the "temporary stop" of the effect pattern 70a during the display of the success images (f) to (g) constitutes the pre-stop action.

In the example of FIG. 117, at timing T8, the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the effect pattern 70a with characters, and at timing T10, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the character attached. However, the pattern is not limited to this, and may have another pattern.

For example, it may have a pattern shown in FIG. 118. In FIG. 118, at the timing T8 in the example of FIG. 117, the effect pattern 70a with only numbers is changed to the effect pattern 70a with characters, but in FIG. 118, the effect pattern 70a with characters is changed at the same timing. It is configured to maintain the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers without changing the number, and to stop display it as it is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(h), the production pattern 70a "555" consisting only of numbers makes a temporary stop, and then from (i) to (l), the production pattern 70a "555" consisting only of numbers The production pattern 70a "555" is displayed in a stopped state. Then, the game shifts to the jackpot game from (l).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time required to change the effect pattern 70a with only numbers to the effect pattern 70a with characters, and it is possible to quickly shift to a jackpot game.

Note that the case where the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing T10 is basically the same as that in FIG. 111, so the explanation here will be omitted.

(About an example of normal background image data)
FIG. 119 is an example of normal background image data in mode A. Although mode A will be explained as an example, other modes (for example, mode B) are configured in the same way (only the image data content is different).

For example, the normal background image data in mode A is as shown in FIG. It has multiple types of background image data such as "3" image data (for example, one picture) (for example, it is stored in the CGROM 146). An update value corresponding to each image data is determined. The updated value is a value that is updated at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1/30 seconds) in the image control unit 145, and normal background image data is selected with reference to the updated value. For example, for "Castle Town 1", the update value is "1", for "Castle Town 2", the update value is "2", and for "Castle Town 3", the update value is "3", and the image control If the current value updated in section 145 is "2", "Castle Town 2" is displayed.

Similarly, image data "Castle interior 1" (for example, 1 picture) → image data "Castle interior 2" (for example, 1 picture) → image data "Castle interior 3" (for example, 1 picture)... It has multiple types of background image data, such as "Castle 1" is the update value "N", "Castle 2" is the update value "N+1", and "Castle 3" is the update value. "N+2" is determined for each.

Similarly, image data "Garden 1" (for example, one picture) → image data "Garden 2" (for example, one picture) → image data "Garden 3" (for example, one picture)... It has multiple types of background image data, such as "Garden 1" has an update value of "N+3", "Garden 2" has an update value of "N+4", and "Garden 3" has an update value of "N+4". "N+5" is determined for each.

Next, a method of displaying a background image using such image data will be described using a timing chart for the case where (a) the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach variation effect is completed. Note that the content of the timing chart is the same as that explained with reference to FIG.

From timing T0 to T2, a normal background horizontal scroll is displayed as a background image, and as an example, "Castle Town 2" is developed on layer N+1. In other words, the normal background image of "Castle Town 2" is visible to the player. Also, since it is set as "castle town 2", the updated value is "2".

Then, at timing T2, a dark background is developed in layer N, and normal background image data is not developed in layer N+1. As a result, the dark background becomes visible to the player, and the background image related to "castle town" that was displayed up to timing T2 becomes invisible (see FIGS. 93(a) and (b)). In addition, although it is set as "not visible," a part of the background image related to "castle town" may be visible, or the entire background image related to "castle town" may be slightly visible. In other words, it may be "hard to see."

Note that the update value is updated at predetermined intervals even if the background image data is not developed. For example, the update value is updated to "3" from timing T2.

Then, when horizontal scrolling of the normal background is restarted at timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 selects the normal background image data with reference to the value to be updated. In the example of FIG. 119, the updated value at timing T8 is "N+4", and the normal background image data of "Garden 2" corresponding to the updated value "N+4" is expanded to layer N+1. As a result, when the SPSP reach effect ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background is restarted, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.

In other words, if horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed from timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the normal background image will continue from the timing when it became invisible (timing T2 in FIG. 119) (in the example of FIG. 119). It is assumed that the normal background image continues to change even during the invisible period, and the normal background image corresponding to the updated value is displayed when restarting (Fig. 119 is an example of "garden").
For example, if the normal background is displayed from the timing when it becomes invisible when restarting, the amount of change in the normal background will be small, giving the player a feeling of boredom.However, by configuring as shown in FIG. It is possible to increase the amount of variation and allow the player to visually recognize various types of normal background images. This can prevent players from feeling bored.

Note that in the example of FIG. 119(a), the normal background image is redisplayed using the updated value, but other methods can also be used. For example, in the modified example shown in (b) of FIG. 119, no update value is particularly used.

Specifically, even if the normal background image becomes invisible at timing T2, the development on the layer continues. For example, at timing T2, the normal background image data of "Castle Town 3", which is a continuation of "Castle Town 2" that had been developed up to timing T2, is developed on layer N+1. However, since layer N+1 is a layer located behind layer N, when the layers are combined and displayed on the main display device 70, "Castle Town 3" is displayed due to the dark background developed on layer N. It becomes invisible. In other words, although it is developed on the layer, it is not visible to the player.

Thereafter, the development on the layer continues, and the normal background image data developed on layer N+1 immediately before timing T8 is designated as "Garden 1." Then, it is assumed that the timing when the timing T8 is reached is the display time for one frame of "Garden 1".

Then, in the scene where horizontal scrolling of the normal background is resumed at timing T8 (same as timing T8 in FIG. 92), the image control unit 145 continues to develop the normal background image data on layer N+1. Here, "Garden 2", which is a continuation of "Garden 1", is developed. As a result, when the SPSP reach effect ends and horizontal scrolling of the normal background is restarted, the normal background image of "Garden 2" becomes visible.
Even with this configuration, the same effect as in the case of the configuration using the method (a) described above can be obtained.

In addition, in FIG. 119, an example of the normal background image data in mode A has been explained, but it may be configured in the same way (not displayed again from the timing when it is hidden) in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state. . On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, it may be redisplayed from the timing when it was hidden, or when redisplaying, certain image data (for example, image data displaying a specific character) may be redisplayed. ) may be always redisplayed. In particular, in the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the amount of change in the background image is not large compared to the normal gaming state. Display control can be simplified by re-displaying the image data (image data to be displayed). Furthermore, in the variable probability game state, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the normal game state, so the time for the player to visually check the background image is reduced. Therefore, display control can be simplified in this way.

Furthermore, regarding the performance motion (shaking motion) of the hold icon HI described in FIG. ) is being performed continuously, the image is redisplayed from the posture at the time of redisplay. This allows the player to view various postures of the hold icon HI, thereby preventing the player from feeling bored.
Note that a similar configuration may be used when the icon TI is hidden together with the pending icon HI.

(About other examples of jackpot SPSP reach variation effects)
FIGS. 120 to 122 show other performance examples in the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance. Examples of other performances include, for example, a plurality of types of jackpot SPSP reach variation performances, one of which is shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, and another example is shown in FIGS. 120 to 122. Note that in FIG. 120, explanation will be given starting from timing T5, and since timings T0 to T5 are the same as in FIG. 97, explanations will be omitted.

In addition, FIGS. 120 to 122 will be described as an example in which the variable performance is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect ends in the "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and the "time-saving gaming state" or The same thing may be done in the "probability variable gaming state".

At timing T5, the SPSP reach effect is executed. In this SPSP reach production, as shown in Figure 121(d), a character image imitating a girl says the line "I will stand on stage again!" (line image SER1), and the corresponding form As shown in FIGS. 121(d) to 121(e), a task image MG in the SPSP reach performance is displayed, which says, "If you press the button and the girl character stands on the stage, you will win the jackpot."
In other words, the SPSP reach effect shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is an effect in which a jackpot can be won if the player operates the effect button 17 (for example, single press, continuous press, long press, etc.) and a girl character stands on the stage. be.

Note that the dialogue image SER1 can be displayed in white characters in a normal mode and red characters in a special mode in which expectations for a jackpot game to be executed are higher than in the normal mode. In other words, when the dialogue image SER1 is displayed in a special mode rather than in a normal mode, there is a higher expectation that a jackpot game will be executed (= a girl character is more likely to stand on the stage).

Then, toward timing T6, a button introduction image BDG is displayed, suggesting that timing T6 will soon be reached and the effect button 17 will be operated.
Then, at timing T6, a decisive image is displayed and a prompting sound "Press" is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 121(e)).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated, a success image is displayed and a success sound is output (see FIGS. 121(f) to (g)). Then, from timing T8 to timing T8-1, an "SPSP reach image (lingering image)" is displayed as an effect image. In addition, to correspond to this, SPSP reach BGM (lingering BGM) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, all the performance symbols 70a are hidden (see FIGS. 121(g) to 121(g)').

Then, lingering images as shown in FIGS. 121(g) to 121(g)' are displayed. This lingering image is executed for a predetermined period of time as shown in FIGS. 122(g) to 122(g)′, and while the lingering image is displayed, the effect pattern 70a is completely hidden, and the special symbol TZ is updated and changed to be visible. continues. Note that, if there is a hold icon, the hold icon is hidden.
In other words, although a jackpot was announced in FIGS. 121(f) to (g), during the subsequent display of the lingering image, notification of the jackpot by the effect pattern 70a or the special symbol TZ is not made. It has become.

This allows the player to concentrate on displaying the lingering image. In addition, by hiding the effect pattern 70a, etc., it is possible to make the lingering image easier to see. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is not displayed, the special symbol TZ continues to update and fluctuate in a visible manner, so that it can be easily understood that the continuation of the fluctuating performance after the jackpot notification is being executed.

Note that the lines "Thank you everyone" (speech image SER2) shown in FIGS. Display in a special mode such as is not performed. For example, even if the above-mentioned dialogue image SER1 is displayed in a special manner, the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in a normal manner.

In other words, since Figures 122(g) to 122(g)' are after the jackpot has already been announced, dialogue image SER2 is displayed in the normal mode to prevent excessive effects. can. In addition, if the dialogue image SER2 is displayed in a special mode, there is a risk of giving the impression that something will be notified after Fig. 122(g) to (g)', but this fear has also been resolved. can.
Note that there is no problem even if the display mode of the line image SER2 is based on the display mode of the line image SER1. For example, when a special mode is determined as the display mode of the line image SER1, the display mode of the line image SER2 may also be set to the special mode. This allows for consistency in performance.

Further, the lingering image has a relationship with the content of the task image MG shown in FIGS. 121(d) to (e), for example, and a performance that clears the content of the task image MG is developed. This allows the player to understand that there is a connection between the performances before and after the jackpot notification.
Thereafter, when all the lingering images are displayed, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at "555" from timing T8-1 to timing T9. That is, the effect pattern 70a is displayed from timing T8-1.

Note that while the lingering image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c may be made to emit rainbow light. As a result, although the presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ do not notify that a jackpot has been achieved, it is possible to make the player recognize that a jackpot has been obtained by the light emitting mode of each lighting device. Furthermore, since the lingering image is displayed together with the rainbow emission, it is possible to further satisfy the player. Additionally, if the display time of the lingering image becomes longer, some players may become concerned about whether they have really won the jackpot, but if each lighting device emits rainbow light, such concerns can be alleviated. can also be resolved.

Further, while the lingering image is being displayed, the button driving device 17b may be turned on to cause the effect button 17 to vibrate. As a result, although the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ do not notify the player that a jackpot has been achieved, the vibration of the production button 17 makes it possible to recognize that a jackpot has been achieved. Further, since the aftereffect image is displayed together with the vibration of the effect button 17, it is possible to further satisfy the player.

On the other hand, while the lingering image is being displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 may be caused to emit normal light (e.g., white light), and the production button light emitting LED 17c may be turned off. This allows the viewer to pay more attention to the lingering image without focusing on the light emitting mode of each lighting device.

Further, while the lingering image is being displayed, the button driving device 17b may be turned off so that the effect button 17 does not vibrate. This allows the user to pay more attention to the lingering image without being distracted by the vibration of the effect button 17.

In addition, while the lingering image is being displayed, all of the performance symbols 70a are hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it is not a mode to notify a jackpot. For example, the left and right effect patterns 70a may be displayed, and the inner effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner (for example, "5↓5"). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting what the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the jackpot was.

In addition, if the SPSP reach effect shown in Figs. 120 to 122 is a loss, the movable effect device shown in Figs. 121(f) to (g) does not operate, and the lingering effect is shown in Fig. To end a variable performance without displaying an image. In other words, in the case of a loss, the lingering image is not displayed, and the lingering image can be displayed only when a jackpot is achieved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the lingering image corresponding to the loss being displayed for a long time even though the game is a loss.

Note that the case where the production control board 130 cannot receive the stop command at the timing T10 is basically the same as that in FIG. 111, so the explanation here will be omitted.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation effect (loss).
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the structure for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 92. The following configuration may be used.

In addition, FIG. 123 will be explained as an example in which the losing SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal gaming state", but the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since either case is a SPSP reach variation performance (loss), the display of a failure image, the output of a failure sound, and a temporary stop in a mode that notifies the loss of the performance symbol 70a are started from timing T3.

In either case, the failure image is displayed and the provisional stop is continued in a manner that notifies the failure of the performance symbol 70a until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
In other words, in case 1, the failure image is displayed from "N+6th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner to notify the failure of the production pattern 70a, and in case 2, , from "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds) a failure image is displayed and a temporary stop is performed in a manner that notifies the failure of the production pattern 70a, and Case 1 is better than Case 2. The period of temporary stop in the mode of displaying the failure image and notifying the failure of the effect pattern 70a becomes longer (about 2 seconds) than the above.

In addition, the failure sound is output for about 1 second (approximately 4 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) varies depending on the operation timing of the production button 17. It is designed not to occur.

In other words, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4 is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations". The number of fluctuations is "approximately 44 cycle fluctuations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T4.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

In other words, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations", and the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T4 and timing T6 (or T8) is "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations". There will be no difference in the number of fluctuations.

In addition, in case 1, the number of cycle fluctuations performed from timing T3 when the player operates the production button 17 to timing T6 until the production symbol starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends is On the other hand, in case 2, in case 2, there is timing T6 from timing T3 when the player operates the production button 17 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until it ends. The number of cycle fluctuations performed during this period is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations", which results in a difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, the display of a failure image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the mode of notifying the loss of the performance pattern 70a. Because there is a difference in the execution time of the temporary stop (approximately 2 seconds), it may give the impression that the content of the production has changed depending on the timing of operating the production button 17, or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation production has been executed. Sometimes I ended up giving it away.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so based on the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or a different SPSP It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that a reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, since the failure sound is output for about 1 second (approximately 4 cycle fluctuations) in each case, even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different, the player is made aware that he/she has lost. I can do it.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described in the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, the timing will change from timing T3 to timing T4. The period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, when the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T4 is about 8 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 32 cycle variation").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 97. The following configuration may be used.

Although FIG. 124 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal gaming state", the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in a mode that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a start from timing T3.

Furthermore, the movable presentation device starts operating at timing T3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(f), the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (greatly descend) to the production position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction.
Then, the movable performance device operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continued in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from "N+6th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and in case 2, , from "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and a temporary stop will be performed in a manner to notify the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, so Case 1 is better than Case 1. 2, the period of temporary stop in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) is determined by the operation timing of the production button 17. There is no difference.

In addition, the operation of the movable performance device (standby position → performance position, performance position → standby position) is performed for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in each case, and the operation period (and There is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed during operation.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, at timing T3, the success image is displayed, the success sound is output, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a manner to notify the jackpot, and the movable performance device starts operating, and then at timing T6 (or T8), the number of cycle fluctuations executed until the production symbol stops displaying is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations", whereas in case 2, the success image is displayed and the success sound is performed at timing T3. , a temporary stop in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and a cycle that is executed from the start of the operation of the movable production device until the production pattern stops displaying at timing T6 (or T8). The number of fluctuations is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, the display of a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a. Because there is a difference in the execution time of the temporary stop (approximately 2 seconds), it may give the impression that the content of the production has changed depending on the timing of operating the production button 17, or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation production has been executed. Sometimes I ended up giving it away.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so based on the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or a different SPSP It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that a reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, the player will be aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. can be done.

In addition, since the operation of the movable performance device is performed for approximately 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in each case, the player is made aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different. be able to.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described for the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, the timing will change from timing T3 to timing T6. The period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, if the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cycle fluctuation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle fluctuations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 97. The following configuration may be used.

Although FIG. 125 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal gaming state", the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in a mode that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a start from timing T3.

Further, at timing T3, the vibration means (button drive device 17b) starts operating. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the effect button 17 vibrates due to the operation of the button drive device 17b.
Then, the vibration means operates until timing T3-1.

In either case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continued in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from "N+6th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and in case 2, , from "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and a temporary stop will be performed in a manner to notify the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, so Case 1 is better than Case 1. 2, the period of temporary stop in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) is determined by the operation timing of the production button 17. There is no difference.

In addition, the operation of the vibration means is performed for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, and the operation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the operation period) varies depending on the operation timing of the production button 17. It is designed not to occur.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

In other words, in case 1, at timing T3, the success image is displayed, the success sound is output, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a manner to notify the jackpot, and the vibration means is started, and then at timing T6 ( In Case 2, the number of cycle fluctuations executed until the production pattern stops displaying in T8) is "approximately 80 cycle fluctuations", whereas in Case 2, the success image is displayed and the success sound is played at timing T3. output, a temporary stop in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and a cycle variation that is executed from the start of the operation of the vibration means until the production pattern stops displaying at timing T6 (or T8). The number of cycle fluctuations is "approximately 72 cycle fluctuations", and a difference occurs in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3 and timing T6 (or T8).

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, the display of a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a. Because there is a difference in the execution time of the temporary stop (approximately 2 seconds), it may give the impression that the content of the production has changed depending on the timing of operating the production button 17, or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation production has been executed. Sometimes I ended up giving it away.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so based on the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or a different SPSP It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that a reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, the player will be aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. can be done.

Furthermore, since the vibration means is activated for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in each case, the player is made aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. I can do it.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described for the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, the timing will change from timing T3 to timing T6. The period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, if the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cycle fluctuation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle fluctuations").

(Timing chart when vibration effects occur in each scene of variable effects)
FIGS. 126 and 127 are timing charts showing cases where a vibration effect occurs in each scene in the variable effect.
Specifically, it shows a vibration effect at the start of fluctuation, a vibration effect at the time of development, and a vibration effect at the time of jackpot notification.
The vibration effect at the start of fluctuation is partially extracted from Figure 78, the vibration effect at the time of development is partially extracted from Figure 92, and the vibration effect at the time of jackpot notification is partially extracted from Figure 97. This is an excerpt. Therefore, explanations of parts that overlap with the excerpt source will be omitted.

The vibration performance "at the start of variation" indicates, for example, the vibration (1 second) at the start of variation in the accessory preview described in FIG. 36.
In the vibration production, the vibration means (button drive device 17b) operates to press the production button 17 at timing T7 when the production symbols start floating and the special symbols start updating and fluctuating in the middle of the first cycle. It is a vibrating performance.

The vibration effect continues until timing T9-1, which is in the middle of the fifth cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over a period of approximately 4 cycles (approximately 1 second) from the middle of the first cycle to the middle of the fifth cycle.

In addition, the vibration effect at the "start of variation" is performed from timing T7 to timing T9-1 in both cases where a prize is won in the starting slot while waiting for a customer, and when the variation effect is performed continuously.
In addition, although the vibration effect at the "start of fluctuation" is designed to be executed based on the accessory notice pattern described in FIG. It may be as follows.

The vibration performance "at the time of development" indicates, for example, the vibration (3 seconds) when the development performance is executed in the blackout performance described in FIG. 36.
The vibration production is, for example, a production in which the vibration means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the production button 17 vibrates at the start of the Nth cycle and at timing T3 when a developing sound is output as a sound effect. be.

The vibration effect continues until timing T4, which is the end of the N+11th cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over approximately 12 cycle fluctuations (approximately 3 seconds) from the start of the Nth cycle to the end of the N+11th cycle.

The vibration performance at "big hit notification time" indicates, for example, the vibration (5 seconds) at the time of jackpot notification in the deciding performance described in FIG. 36.
The vibration production is performed, for example, at the start of the N+40th cycle, at timing T7 when a success image is displayed, a success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a. This is an effect in which the means (button drive device 17b) is activated and the effect button 17 vibrates.

The vibration effect continues until timing T8-1, which is the end of the N+60th cycle. That is, the effect button 17 vibrates over a period of approximately 20 cycles (approximately 5 seconds) from the start of the N+40th cycle to the end of the N+60th cycle.

Comparing the vibration performance at "start of fluctuation", the vibration performance at "development time", and the vibration performance at "jackpot notification", the execution time of the vibration performance at "start of fluctuation" is the shortest, and the vibration performance at "big hit" is the shortest. The execution time of the vibration effect during "Notification time" is the longest.
In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations executed when the vibration effect is being performed at "start of fluctuation" is the least, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the vibration effect is being performed at the "time of jackpot notification". is the most common.

In this way, if you visually check not only the execution time of the vibration performance but also the number of cycle fluctuations executed during the vibration performance, for example, if the number of cycle fluctuations is small, you can know that it is time to start the fluctuation. , and if the number of cycle fluctuations is large, it can be understood that it is time to notify a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to grasp which phase of the fluctuation performance is being executed from the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the vibration performance, which leads to improvement in game interest.

Although not particularly shown, in the scene shown in FIG. 126, the effect button light emitting LED 17c does not emit rainbow light, and in the scene shown in FIG. 127, the effect button light emitting LED 17c causes rainbow light emission. Thereby, it is possible to grasp which phase in the variable performance is being executed from the light emission mode of the performance button light emitting LED 17c, which leads to an improvement in game interest.

Note that FIGS. 126 and 127 are only examples, and the above effects can be achieved in other forms as well. For example, by lengthening the execution time of the vibration effect "at the start of fluctuation" (correspondingly, the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration effect is also the largest), and by shortening the execution time of the vibration effect "at the time of jackpot notification" ( Along with this, the number of cycle fluctuations during the vibration presentation may also be minimized.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 97. The following configuration may be used.

Although FIG. 128 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal gaming state", the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in a mode that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a start from timing T3.

Further, at timing T3, the light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74, production button light emitting LED 17c) starts emitting rainbow light. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(f), the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the effect button light emitting LED 17c start emitting rainbow light.
Then, the rainbow emission is executed until timing T3-1.

In either case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continued in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from "N+6th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and in case 2, , from "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and a temporary stop will be performed in a manner to notify the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, so Case 1 is better than Case 1. 2, the period of temporary stop in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In addition, the success sound is output for approximately 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, and the output period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the output period) is determined by the operation timing of the production button 17. There is no difference.

In addition, the rainbow emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, and the activation period (and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the activation period) differs depending on the operation timing of the production button 17. is designed not to occur.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, the display of a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a. Because there is a difference in the execution time of the temporary stop (approximately 2 seconds), it may give the impression that the content of the production has changed depending on the timing of operating the production button 17, or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation production has been executed. Sometimes I ended up giving it away.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so based on the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or a different SPSP It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that a reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, the player will be aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. can be done.

In addition, since the rainbow emission of the light emitting means is performed for about 8 seconds (approximately 32 cycle fluctuations) in all cases, the player is made aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. be able to.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described for the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, the timing will change from timing T3 to timing T6. The period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, if the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cycle fluctuation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle fluctuations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 129 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot).
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 97. The following configuration may be used.

In addition, FIG. 129 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal gaming state", but the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time-saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since both cases are SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot), the display of a success image, the output of a success sound, and the temporary stop in a mode that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a start from timing T3.

In either case, the success image is displayed and the temporary stop is continued in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a until the cycle variation of the "N+57th cycle" is completed.
In other words, in case 1, a success image is displayed from "N+6th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 13 seconds), and a temporary stop is performed in a manner that notifies the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, and in case 2, , from "N+14th cycle" to "N+57th cycle" (approximately 11 seconds), the above success image will be displayed, and a temporary stop will be performed in a manner to notify the jackpot of the production pattern 70a, so Case 1 is better than Case 1. 2, the period of temporary stop in the mode of displaying the success image and notifying the jackpot of the effect pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds).

In addition, the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycle fluctuations) from timing T3 to timing T3-1 in all cases, and the output period (and the output period during the output period) is performed depending on the operation timing of the production button 17. There is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that occur.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

On the other hand, in either case, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 when the production button 17 becomes operable and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the display ends. is "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, the display of a success image performed between timing T3 and timing T4, and the mode of notifying the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a. Because there is a difference in the execution time of the temporary stop (approximately 2 seconds), it may give the impression that the content of the production has changed depending on the timing of operating the production button 17, or the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation production has been executed. Sometimes I ended up giving it away.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so based on the number of cycle fluctuations, it may be recognized that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or a different SPSP It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that a reach variation effect has been executed.

In addition, since the success sound is output for about 1.5 seconds (approximately 6 cycles of variation) in each case, the player will be aware that it is a jackpot even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different. can be done.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described for the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, the timing will change from timing T3 to timing T6. The period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, if the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T6 will be approximately 15 seconds (the cycle fluctuation executed during the period is "approximately 60 cycle fluctuations").

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are a comparison of cases where the operation timing of the operating means is different in the same SPSP reach variation effect (loss).
Note that FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating further details from timing T8 to timing T9 in FIG. 92. Further, for convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when the SPSP reach effect is developed, but the structure explained in FIG. 73 may be used as the structure for starting the fluctuation.

In addition, FIG. 130 will be described as an example in which the losing SPSP reach variation effect is executed in the "normal gaming state", but the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time-saving gaming state" or the "probability-variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, the SPSP reach effect is executed from timing T0 to timing T2. Timing T2 is the timing at which the fixed image is displayed, and the timing at which the effect button 17 becomes operable (the start of the valid operation period). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started at the "N+2nd cycle".

In case 1, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+6th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game begins at the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable and when the "N+5 cycle" ends (that is, approximately 1 second after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player at timing T3 when the cycle variation of the special symbol starts the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, the game starts from the timing T2 ("N+2 cycle") when the production button 17 becomes operable to the timing when the "N+13 cycle" ends (that is, about 3 seconds after the production button 17 becomes operable). It is assumed that the production button 17 was operated by the user.

Since either case is a SPSP reach variation performance (loss), the display of a failure image, the output of a failure sound, and a temporary stop in a mode that notifies the loss of the performance symbol 70a are started from timing T3.

In addition, the display of the failure image and the temporary stop in a mode that notifies the failure of the performance symbol 70a continue until timing T3-1 when the cycle variation of the special symbol ends "N+41st cycle" in both cases.

In other words, in case 1, the failure image is displayed and the temporary display is performed in a manner that notifies the failure of the performance pattern 70a over the period of "approximately 36 cycle fluctuations" (approximately 9 seconds) from "N+6th cycle" to "N+41st cycle". The stop is performed, and in case 2, the failure image is displayed and the failure of the production pattern 70a is notified for "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations" (approximately 7 seconds) from "N+14th cycle" to "N+41st cycle". In case 1, the period of temporary stopping in the mode of displaying the failure image and notifying the failure of the production pattern 70a is longer (about 2 seconds) than in case 2. .

Then, from timing T3-1, a "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed as a performance image, and a background change (change of the background image) is performed. The "switching image (eye-catching image)" is, for example, an image in which the model name is written on an image imitating a shutter, as shown in FIGS. 131(d)' to (e). By displaying , the SPSP reach background that was visible in FIG. 131(d) becomes invisible.

Furthermore, while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is being displayed, the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers becomes invisible. On the other hand, even when the "switching image (eye-catch image)" is displayed, the update fluctuation of the icon TI and special symbol TZ, the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB cannot be visually recognized. It is possible.

The display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is continuously displayed until timing T4, and the special symbol is displayed from timing T3-1 to timing T4 while the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is being displayed. The number of cycle fluctuations is "approximately 16 cycle fluctuations" in all cases.

In addition, the cycle variation of the special symbol that occurs from when the production button 17 becomes operable at timing T2 (the start of the valid operation period) until the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1. In all cases, the number of times fluctuates by about 40 cycles.

In either case, at timing T4, the display of the "switching image (eye-catching image)" ends, and the horizontally scrolling background image of the normal background becomes visible, and the loss of the performance pattern 70a with the character is completed. The temporary stop becomes visible in a manner that notifies the driver.

In either case, at timing T5 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T6. That is, in Case 1 and Case 2, the cycle fluctuations executed until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed are from "1st cycle" to "N+85th cycle". Then, the stop display of the performance symbols is continued until timing T8.

In both cases, this is carried out between timing T3-1 when the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed and timing T6 until the production pattern starts to stop display, or timing T8 until the end of the display. The number of cycle fluctuations is "approximately 44 cycle fluctuations", and there is no difference in the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T3-1 and timing T6 (or T8).

In this way, when the timing of operating the performance button 17 is different even though the SPSP reach variation performance is the same, for example, a failure image is displayed between timing T3 and timing T3-1, and a failure of the performance pattern 70a is notified. Because there is a difference (about 2 seconds) in the execution time of the temporary stop in the mode where the SPSP reach change effect is executed, it may be recognized that the content of the effect has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or a different SPSP reach variation effect may be executed. Sometimes I gave the wrong impression.
On the other hand, for example, after the production button 17 becomes operable at timing T2 (the start of the valid operation period), the process is performed from when the "switching image (eye-catching image)" is displayed at timing T3-1. If you visually check the number of cycle fluctuations, it will be the same "approximately 40 cycle fluctuations" in all cases, so from the number of cycle fluctuations, you can recognize that the content of the performance has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17. It is possible to prevent this from giving away or giving the wrong impression that a different SPSP reach variation effect has been executed.

Also, for example, if you visually check the number of cycle fluctuations that occur between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8, it will be the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" in either case, so the cycle in question It is possible to prevent the number of variations from giving the impression that the performance content has changed at the timing of operating the performance button 17, or from giving the misunderstanding that a different SPSP reach variation performance has been executed.

Incidentally, Case 1 and Case 2 are both described for the case where the operating means (presentation button 17) is operated, but if the operating means (presentation button 17) is not operated, from timing T3 to timing T3 -1 period is even shorter than in case 2. For example, if the operating means (production button 17) is not operated, the period from timing T3 to timing T3-1 will be about 5 seconds (the cycle variation executed during the period is "about 20 cycle variation").

The "switching image (eye-catching image)" is not limited to that shown in FIG. 131. For example, the image may be a whiteout image or a blackout image. Furthermore, the image is not limited to the image, and may be temporarily shielded by operating a movable member (shielding member).

(Timing chart for specific variable performance pattern)
FIG. 132 shows a timing chart for specific variable effect patterns (variable effect pattern a, variable effect pattern b) when the special figure variable pattern designation command is “special figure variable pattern A (variation time = approximately 38 seconds)”. Showing.
In addition, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is "special figure variation pattern A", either the variation effect pattern a or the variation effect pattern b is determined by the process of step E321 of FIG. 26. That is, it is possible to execute either the variable effect pattern a or the variable effect pattern b for the "special figure variable pattern A."

In both the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b, timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing at which the first cycle of the special symbol starts. Here, horizontal scrolling of the normal background is displayed as the background image, and a "normal variation effect" (for example, update variation of all the effect symbols 70a) is being executed as the variation effect content.

Timing T3 is the timing when the normal reach variation performance is started after the normal variation performance is finished. Then, timing T5 is the timing when the normal reach variation performance is completed and the SP reach is developed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has finished the "100th cycle" cycle variation. In other words, in any variation effect pattern, the number of cycle variations of the special symbol performed from the start of the variation display (timing T0) to the start of SP reach (timing T5) is "approximately 100 cycle variations." .

Timing T5 in the variable effect pattern a is the timing at which "typhoon reach" as the SP reach effect starts. That is, the variable performance pattern a is a variable performance pattern in which "typhoon reach" is defined as the variable performance content.

Timing T5 in the variable performance pattern b is the timing at which "heavy snow reach" as the SP reach performance starts. That is, the variable performance pattern b is a variable performance pattern in which "heavy snow reach" is defined as the variable performance content.

In other words, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is "special figure variation pattern A", either "typhoon reach" or "heavy snow reach" is executed, and for the first special figure variation pattern, This makes it possible to perform multiple variations. Thereby, it is possible to keep the special symbol variation pattern on the main control board 110 to the necessary minimum while increasing the variety of variation effects that can be executed.

In both of the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b, timing T6 is the timing at which SP reach is finished. Then, timing T7 is the timing at which the special symbol stops displaying, and at this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has completed the "152nd cycle" cycle variation.

In both the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b, timing T8 is the timing at which the performance symbols and special symbols start to stop display, and timing T10 is the timing at which the performance symbols and special symbols end the stop display. be.

In other words, in both variable performance pattern a and variable performance pattern b, after the SP reach performance starts (timing T5), the performance symbols start stop display (timing T8), or end the stop display (timing The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed up to T10) is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations."

In other words, in the case of "special pattern variation pattern A", the special symbol cycle variation (approximately 38 seconds) from "1st cycle" to "152nd cycle" is performed from the start of the variation display until the stop display is executed. You will be killed.

In this way, in variable effect pattern a and variable effect pattern b, although the variable effect content in SP reach is different between "Typhoon reach" and "Heavy snow reach", from the start of the variable display to the start of SP reach. The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbols performed in both cases is "approximately 100 cycle fluctuations." In addition, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbols performed from the start of SP reach until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed is "approximately 52 cycle fluctuations." In other words, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbols performed from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of the performance symbols in each of the fluctuation performance patterns is "approximately 152 cycle fluctuations."

The player recognizes that the execution is based on different "special pattern variation patterns" due to the difference in the variation effects when "Typhoon Reach" is executed and when "Heavy Snow Reach" is executed. There have been cases where players have recognized that the level of expectation for a jackpot game to be executed is different.
On the other hand, for example, as described above, from the start of variation until SP reach starts, from the start of SP reach until the stop display of the production symbol, and from the start of variation until the stop display of the production symbol, any variation production pattern Since the number of cycle fluctuations is the same, if you visually observe the number of cycle fluctuations, you can recognize that the games are being played based on a common "special pattern fluctuation pattern", and the expectation level that jackpot games will be played. can also be recognized as common.

Incidentally, the game state in which the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b are executed may be any game state. For example, it may be executed in the normal gaming state, it may be executed in the time-saving gaming state, or it may be executed in the variable probability gaming state. Furthermore, it may be executed in any one gaming state, in any two gaming states, or in all gaming states.

Further, the game state in which the variable performance pattern a and the variable performance pattern b are executed may be set as a normal game state, and the games may be executed in a plurality of modes in the normal game state.
For example, if special figure fluctuation pattern A is received in mode A of the normal gaming state, the fluctuation effect pattern a is executed, and if special figure fluctuation pattern A is received in mode B of the normal gaming state, the fluctuation Performance pattern b may also be executed. As a result, even if the mode is different and the variation production pattern for each mode is executed, if you visually check the number of cycle variations, you can recognize that it is executed based on the common "special figure variation pattern". It is possible to make the players recognize that they have the same level of expectation for playing a jackpot game.

(Timing chart when a dialogue notice occurs during variable production)
FIG. 133 is a timing chart when a dialogue preview occurs in a variable performance. Case 1 and case have the same variable effect pattern, but indicate that the operation timing of the effect button 17 in the speech preview is different.
Although FIG. 133 will be described as a dialogue preview as an example, it may be replaced with a cut-in preview.

In addition, FIG. 133 will be described as an example in which a dialogue preview occurs in a variable performance in a "normal gaming state", but the same is not limited to this, and the same can occur in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "variable probability gaming state". may be performed.

In both case 1 and case 2, timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol starts.
In either case, at timing T2 when the 6th cycle of the special symbol starts to change, a speech preview image is displayed as a performance image, and the operation validity period of the performance button 17 starts.
Note that the "line preview image" refers to the display of an image imitating the production button 17 (see FIG. 134).

In case 1, it is assumed that the production button 17 is operated by the player at timing T4 when the cycle variation of the 9th cycle of the special symbol is completed.
On the other hand, in case 2, it is assumed that the production button 17 is operated by the player at timing T4 when the cycle variation of the 13th cycle of the special symbol is completed.

When the player operates the performance button 17, the display of the dialogue preview image is ended and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as the performance image.
Note that the display time of the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2) is the same for both case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time of the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2) is executed while the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2) is displayed. The number of cycle fluctuations is also common to both Case 1 and Case 2 (for example, approximately 8 cycle fluctuations).

In either case, at timing T5 when the special symbol has finished its 58th cycle variation, the performance symbol finishes its update variation and starts the pre-stop operation.
In either case, at timing T6 in the middle of the 60th cycle of the special symbol, the performance symbol finishes its pre-stop motion and starts a temporary stop.

In either case, the stop display of the special symbol starts at timing T7 when the 60th cycle of the special symbol has finished its cycle variation. Then, at timing T8, the performance symbols and special symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, and at timing T10, the performance symbols and special symbols end their stop display.

In case 1, after the player operates the performance button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), until the performance symbols start to stop display (timing T8), Alternatively, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed until the performance symbol ends the stop display (timing T10) is "approximately 51 cycle fluctuations."

On the other hand, in case 2, after the player operates the performance button 17 and the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4) until the performance symbols start to stop display (timing T8). ), or the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed until the production symbol ends its stop display (timing T10) is "approximately 47 cycle fluctuations."

In addition, in either case, from the start of the operational validity period of the production button 17 (timing T2) until the production pattern starts to stop display (timing T8), or until the production pattern ends the stop display (timing The number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed at T10) is "approximately 55 cycle fluctuations."

In this way, when the timing of operating the production button 17 is different even though the variation production is the same, for example, after the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed (timing T4), the production pattern is stopped and displayed. (timing T8) or until the effect pattern stops displaying, there is a difference in time, which may give the impression that the effect content has changed at the timing of operating the effect button 17, or cause different fluctuations. Sometimes it gave the impression that a performance had been carried out.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T6, or between timing T2 and timing T8 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T5). If it is, the same "approximately 55 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so the number of cycle fluctuations may give the impression that the production content has changed at the timing of operating the production button 17, or a different variation may occur. It is possible to prevent the user from giving the wrong impression that the performance has been executed.

Furthermore, the display time of the serif pattern image (here, serif pattern 2) is the same for both case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time is the same for both case 1 and case 2 (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time is The number of cycle fluctuations is also the same for both cases 1 and 2 (for example, approximately 8 cycle fluctuations), so even if the timing of operating the production button 17 is different, the dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) The player can be made aware of this.

Note that Case 1 and Case 2 are both described in the case where the operation means (production button 17) is operated, but if the operation means (production button 17) is not operated, the dialogue preview will not be executed. . In other words, if the operating means (direction button 17) is operated, a cycle change occurs during the dialogue preview execution, but if the operating means (direction button 17) is not operated, the cycle during dialogue preview execution occurs. The phenomenon of fluctuation does not occur.

(Timing chart when dialogue preview and fixed performance occur in variable performance)
FIG. 134 is a timing chart when a dialogue preview and a fixed performance occur in a variable performance. Regarding the dialogue preview, further details are shown between timing T1 and timing T2 in FIG. 133, and regarding the final performance, further details are shown between timing T5 and timing T6 in FIG. 92.
For convenience, the case in which a dialogue preview and a final performance occur is shown in the variable performance pattern 1, but if they occur separately (a dialogue preview occurs but a final performance does not occur, a dialogue preview does not occur). The same can be said for the case where the performance is determined by the performance.
Further, the dialogue preview in Figure 134 may be replaced with a cut-in notice (in this case, the cut-in notice and the final performance will be compared), or the final performance may be replaced with a cut-in notice (in this case, the final performance will be compared with the final performance). , a comparison between dialogue previews and cut-in previews).

In addition, FIG. 134 will be described as an example in which a line preview and a fixed performance occur in a variable performance in a "normal gaming state", but this is not limited to this, and it may also occur in a "time-saving gaming state" or a "probable variable gaming state". Something similar may be done.

Timing T0 is the start timing of the variable display, and is the timing when the first cycle of the special symbol starts.
Then, at timing T1-1, a suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed that suggests that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the dialogue preview will be displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the second cycle variation.

Then, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for approximately four cycle fluctuations (approximately 1 second) from the start of the second cycle fluctuation to the end of the fifth cycle fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 134, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is an image imitating the production button 17 that is displayed in a light color, and gradually fades toward the end of the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image). It will change to a darker color.

Then, at timing T2, the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (line preview image) is displayed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 17 begins. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "sixth cycle" cycle variation.

Then, at timing T4, the player operates the performance button 17, and a dialogue pattern image (here, dialogue pattern 2) is displayed as the performance image.
In other words, it is assumed that the performance button 17 is operated by the player approximately 1 second after the start of the operational validity period of the performance button 17.

In this manner, in the case of a dialogue preview, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image imitating the production button 17 will be displayed is displayed over approximately 4 cycle fluctuations (approximately 1 second).

Then, timing T6 is the timing at which the decisive image in the decisive effect is displayed, and before reaching the timing T6, a suggestive image (fade-in) suggesting that an image imitating the effect button 17 in the decisive effect will be displayed. image) is displayed.

Specifically, from timing T5, a suggestion image (fade-in image) that suggests that an image imitating the performance button 17 in the final performance is displayed starts to be displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "N+1 cycle" cycle variation.

Then, the suggestion image (fade-in image) is displayed for approximately 16 cycle fluctuations (approximately 4 seconds) from the start of the cycle fluctuation in the N+1st cycle to the end of the cycle fluctuation in the N+16th cycle. Note that the suggestion image (fade-in image) is a spiral button introduction image BDG, as shown in FIG. 134.

Then, at timing T6, the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image) ends, an image imitating the effect button 17 (line preview image) is displayed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 17 begins. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "N+17th cycle" cycle variation.

In this manner, in the case of a fixed performance, a suggestion image (fade-in image) suggesting that an image imitating the performance button 17 will be displayed is displayed over approximately 16 cycle fluctuations (approximately 4 seconds).

Between the dialogue preview and the fixed presentation, the display time of the suggestion image (fade-in image) is longer in the fixed presentation, and the number of cycle changes performed during display is also greater.
As a result, by visually observing the number of cycle fluctuations that occur during the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image), it becomes easier to predict whether a dialogue preview or a final performance will be executed later.
Furthermore, it becomes easier to predict which phase of the variation performance is occurring based on the difference in the number of cycle variations performed during the display of the suggestion image (fade-in image).

In addition, in FIG. 134, between the dialogue preview and the final performance, the display time of the suggestion image (fade-in image) is longer in the final performance, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during display is also greater. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display time of the suggestion image (fade-in image) may be shorter in the fixed effect, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during display may be smaller.

(Timing chart when the operating means is operated)
FIG. 135 is a timing chart when the operating means (for example, the performance button 17) is operated in the SPSP reach variation performance. In addition, FIG. 135 shows a case where meter pattern 1 is performed and a case where meter pattern 2 is performed in the meter performance, which is one of the SPSP reach performances, and the same SPSP reach variation performance (jackpot ) shows a comparison when the operating timing of the operating means is different.
For convenience, the explanation is given from the timing when SPSP reach effect is developed, but the configuration for starting the fluctuation may be the same as that explained in FIG. 73, and the structure until it develops into SPSP reach effect is explained in FIG. 97. The following configuration may be used.

Although FIG. 135 will be described as an example where the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the "normal gaming state", the same is not limited to this, and the same can be done in the "time saving gaming state" and the "probability variable gaming state". may be performed.

In both patterns, timing T0 is the timing at which the SPSP reach effect is executed. At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "Nth cycle" cycle variation.

In both patterns, timing T2 is the timing at which the meter effect is started as the SPSP reach effect. As shown in Figure 136(c), the "meter performance" is a performance that shows a task (introductory image and sound as shown in Figure 135) such as "If you hit the button repeatedly and the meter reaches MAX, you will win!" The meter increases each time the player operates the performance button 17, and when the meter reaches MAX, the player is definitely notified of a jackpot.

In addition, the meter pattern in the meter performance has a plurality of meter patterns, and for example, in the case of a jackpot, the operation input of the performance button 17 has been performed five times (the performance button 17 has been pressed five times). ), the meter reaches MAX (meter pattern 1 in Figures 135 and 136), and the meter reaches MAX when the production button 17 is operated 10 times (the production button 17 is pressed 10 times). A pattern in which the meter becomes MAX when there is one operation input to the production button 17 (the production button 17 is pressed once) (meter pattern 2 in FIGS. 135 and 136), etc. have. In addition, there are multiple meter patterns in case of a loss (not shown).

In either pattern, when timing T3 is reached, a fixed image is displayed as a performance image, and a promotion sound is output as a sound effect (see FIG. 136(d)).
In both patterns, it is assumed that the player operates the performance button 17 from timing T4.

In the case of meter pattern 1, the meter reaches MAX when the production button 17 is operated five times, so a success image is displayed at timing T5 when the production button 17 is operated five times from timing T4. , a success sound is output and the temporary stop is started in a manner to notify that the performance symbol is a jackpot (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "N+30th cycle" cycle variation.
In other words, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the meter performance at timing T2 until the jackpot is announced at timing T5 is "approximately 28 cycle fluctuations."

On the other hand, in the case of meter pattern 2, since the meter reaches MAX when the production button 17 is operated once, the successful image is displayed at timing T5 when the production button 17 is operated once from timing T4. is displayed, a success sound is output, and a temporary stop is started in a manner to notify that the effect symbol is a jackpot (see FIG. 136(f)). At this time, it is assumed that the cycle variation of the special symbol has started the "N+14th cycle" cycle variation.
In other words, the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol executed from the start of the meter presentation at timing T2 until the jackpot is announced at timing T5 is "approximately 12 cycle fluctuations."

In each pattern, at timing T7 when the cycle variation of the "N+85th cycle" is finished, the cycle variation of the special symbol is finished and a stop display is performed.
Furthermore, in either case, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed at timing T8. In other words, whether meter pattern 1 is executed or meter pattern 2 is executed, the cycle variation executed from the start of the meter production until the production pattern stops displaying is approximately 84 cycles variation. ”.

In this way, if the meter pattern is different even though the meter effect is the same, for example, there will be a difference in time from the start of the meter effect (timing T2) until the jackpot is announced (timing T5). This may give the player the perception that the timing of the jackpot notification changes depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the performance button 17, etc., and there is a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust.
On the other hand, for example, visually check the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T8, or between timing T2 and timing T10 (strictly speaking, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between timing T2 and timing T7). If so, the same "approximately 84 cycle fluctuations" will occur in all cases, so the timing of the jackpot notification may change depending on the timing (skill) of the player's operation of the performance button 17 based on the number of cycle fluctuations. It is possible to make the player realize that it is not a real thing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 135, the explanation is made assuming that the operating means (production button 17) is operated, but in the case where the operation is not performed in meter pattern 1, and in the case where the operation is not performed in meter pattern 2. In this case, the display period of the successful image from timing T5 to timing T6 and the temporary stop period in the mode of notifying the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a are the same time. In other words, the number of cycle changes of the special symbols performed between timing T5 and timing T6 is also the same number of times. As a result, no matter which meter pattern is executed, it is possible to ensure the display period of the success image and the temporary suspension period in a manner that notifies the player of the jackpot of the performance symbol 70a. The results can be clearly understood.

Note that the meter pattern may be a meter pattern for "long press" in which the production button 17 is continuously operated for a predetermined period of time or more. For example, in meter pattern 1, the "long press" time until the jackpot is announced is "3 seconds", and in the meter pattern 2, the "long press" time is "3 seconds" until the jackpot is announced. The time may be "5 seconds".

(Specific example where the state after the power outage is restored is a special pattern changing display)
FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which the state after the power outage is restored is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. Note that FIG. 137 follows the content of FIG. 54, and a power outage occurs while the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is being displayed as a special pattern variation pattern, and then the power is restored. This shows the case where
Note that the variation time of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is "10 seconds".

Timing T0 is the timing when a power outage occurs and the power is turned off while the variation display of the special figure variation pattern corresponding to the normal variation is being executed.
In addition, since it is assumed that the timing T0 was reached when the cycle variation of the special symbol was executing the 12th cycle variation, the power outage occurred about 3 seconds after the start of the variation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At timing T1, an initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle variation of the special symbol of the "13th cycle" is started. It should be noted that the cycle variation of the special symbol "13th cycle" is a cycle variation that is a continuation of the cycle variation "12th cycle" that was being performed when the power was cut off at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T9, the return operation and initial operation of the movable presentation device explained with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Note that since the return operation and initial operation have already been explained with reference to FIG. 54 and the like, their explanation will be omitted here. Note that the time required for the return operation is approximately 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is approximately 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

Timing T6 is the timing when the special symbol starts its 40th cycle fluctuation, and is the timing when the sub-display device starts its initial operation.
Then, when timing T7 is reached, the special symbol completes the 40th cycle variation and starts a stop display.

When the special symbol confirmation command is received at timing T7-1, a stop screen (production symbol 753) is displayed on the main display device 70, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device.
Then, the initial operation of the sub display device ends at timing T9.

That is, in the example of FIG. 137, the power outage occurs at timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display, and when the power is turned on at timing T1, the remaining fluctuation time is about 7 seconds. .
On the other hand, since the time required for the return operation is approximately 3 seconds and the time required for the initial operation is approximately 11 seconds, if the return operation and initial operation are started from timing T2, the fluctuation display will finish earlier than the initial operation. I will do it.
That is, at the time when the initial operation is finished (timing T9), the variable display of the special symbols has been finished, and the main display device 70 is in a state where the stop screen (production symbol 753) is displayed.
Note that if there is a pending execution of the next variable display, the next variable display will be started regardless of whether the initial operation ends. Therefore, it is possible that the initial action ends while the next fluctuating display is being executed, and when the initial action ends, the next fluctuating display stop screen (for example, the effect pattern 468) is displayed. This is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial action is executed during the fluctuating display, if you visually check the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed while the movable production device is operating, the special symbol will change between the initial motion and the production operation. Since the number of cycle fluctuations is different (see FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, etc.), it is recognized from the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is an initial operation. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the operation of the movable presentation device during the variable display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, during the initial operation, the LED of the movable presentation device turns off and performs the initial operation, so from the light emission mode (lights out) of the movable presentation device, the execution starts from timing T4. It can be recognized that the operation of the movable presentation device is the initial operation.

In addition, in FIG. 137, especially in the case where the variable display ends earlier than the initial operation, the variable display of the special symbol ends when the initial operation ends (timing T9), and the main display 70 is set to be in a state where a stop screen (effect pattern 753) is displayed. This eliminates the need to control the display contents of the main display device 70 in accordance with the end timing of the initial operation (for example, displaying a stop screen when the initial operation ends), and it is possible to prevent display control from becoming complicated. .

In addition, by displaying a stop screen (effect pattern 753) on the main display device 70 without waiting for the end of the initial operation, the player is promptly notified of the jackpot determination result, thereby giving the player a sense of distrust. You can prevent this from happening.

Note that although FIG. 137 describes power restoration as an example, the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned instantaneous power outage occurs during variable display, the recovery operation and initialization operation are not executed. In this way, the event shown in FIG. 137 does not occur in all "power outages", but instantaneous power outages are excluded.

(Specific example where the state after the power outage is restored is a special pattern changing display)
FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which the state after the power failure is restored is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, FIG. 138 follows the content of FIG. 54, and a power outage occurs while the special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is being displayed as a special symbol variation pattern, and then the power is turned off. Indicates the case where the data has been restored.
In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach fluctuation is "70 seconds".

Timing T0 is the timing at which a power outage occurs and the power is turned off while the variable display of the special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach variation is being executed.
In addition, since it is assumed that the timing T0 was reached when the cycle variation of the special symbol was executing the 12th cycle variation, the power outage occurred about 3 seconds after the start of the variation display.

Timing T1 is the timing when the power is restored and turned on. At timing T1, an initial screen is displayed on the main display device 70, and the cycle variation of the special symbol of the "13th cycle" is started. It should be noted that the cycle variation of the special symbol "13th cycle" is a cycle variation that is a continuation of the cycle variation "12th cycle" that was being performed when the power was cut off at timing T0.

Then, from timing T2 to timing T7, the return operation and initial operation of the movable performance device described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like are executed. Note that since the return operation and initial operation have already been explained with reference to FIG. 54 and the like, their explanation will be omitted here. Note that the time required for the return operation is approximately 3 seconds, and the time required for the initial operation is approximately 11 seconds (see FIGS. 59, 61, 62, etc.).

Timing T7 is the timing at which the initial operation of the sub display device ends and all initial operations end. At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the "Restoring" screen that has been displayed since timing T2.

That is, in the example of FIG. 138, the power outage occurs at timing T0 about 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display, and when the power is turned on at timing T1, the remaining fluctuation time is about 67 seconds. .
On the other hand, since the time required for the return operation is approximately 3 seconds and the time required for the initial operation is approximately 11 seconds, if the return operation and initial operation are started from timing T2, the initial operation will finish earlier than the fluctuation display. I will do it.
That is, at the time when the initial operation is finished (timing T7), the variable display of the special symbols is being continuously executed, and the main display device 70 is in a state where the recovery screen is being displayed.
Note that in the example of Fig. 138, it is assumed that a power outage occurs 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but for example, if a power outage occurs 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and there is a pending execution of the next fluctuation display. , the next variable display will start regardless of whether the initial operation ends. Therefore, it is possible that the initial action ends while the next fluctuating display is being executed, and when the initial action ends, the next fluctuating display stop screen (for example, the effect pattern 468) is displayed. This is a possible event.

In this way, when the initial action is executed during the fluctuating display, if you visually check the number of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol performed while the movable production device is operating, the special symbol will change between the initial motion and the production operation. Since the number of cycle fluctuations is different (see FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, etc.), it is recognized from the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations that the operation of the movable performance device executed from timing T4 is an initial operation. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive expectations that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot due to the operation of the movable presentation device during the variable display.

In addition to the difference in the number of cycle fluctuations, during the initial operation, the LED of the movable presentation device turns off and performs the initial operation, so from the light emission mode (lights out) of the movable presentation device, the execution starts from timing T4. It can be recognized that the operation of the movable presentation device is the initial operation.

In addition, in FIG. 138, especially in the case where the initial motion ends earlier than the fluctuating display, when the initial motion is finished (timing T7), the fluctuating display of the special symbol is continuously executed, It is assumed that the main display device 70 is in a state where a recovery screen is displayed. This eliminates the need to control the display contents of the main display device 70 in conjunction with the end timing of the initial operation (for example, end the recovery screen when the initial operation ends), and prevents display control from becoming complicated. can.

In addition, by ending the initial action without waiting for the end of the variable display, the initial action can be quickly ended, and it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a performance action is being performed.

Note that although FIG. 138 describes power restoration as an example, the same can be said for power-on. Further, if the above-mentioned instantaneous power outage occurs during variable display, the recovery operation and initialization operation are not executed. In this way, the event shown in FIG. 138 does not occur in all "power outages", but instantaneous power outages are excluded.

(Specific example 1 when variable performance starts during customer waiting demonstration performance)
A specific example 1 in which a variable performance starts during a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer will be described using FIGS. 139 to 141.

FIG. 139 is a timing chart when the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demonstration performance, and FIGS. 140 to 141 are diagrams showing examples of performance at various timings in FIG. 139. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, before timing T0 in FIG. 139, the customer is in a waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed, and the first special symbol display 60 displays a losing special symbol (only the rightmost LED (lit) is displayed, and the main display device 70 displays a fluctuation standby screen waiting for execution of the fluctuation effect. Specifically, the mode A background image is horizontally scrolled (production operation), the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at "537", and the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area "0" is displayed in SB. Further, the volume adjustment and the light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are possible.

Then, at timing T0 in FIG. 139, when a demonstration standby period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, a customer waiting demonstration performance for a predetermined period (for example, 80 seconds) is started. Specifically, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in front of the performance symbol 70a and behind the special symbol TZ and the pending display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB). The customer waiting demonstration image begins to fade in (from a transparent state to a gradually opaque state), and the production pattern 70a gradually becomes invisible (see FIG. 140(a)).

In addition, the special symbol TZ and the pending display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they cannot be seen (they are blocked) by the customer waiting demo image. However, the background image, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon display area, and the icon display area are not visible (hidden) by the customer waiting demonstration image.

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 139, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demonstration image is completed, the effect pattern 70a becomes hidden (invisible state) and the output of the demonstration effect sound is started. Specifically, the customer waiting demo background is scrolling (direction action), the character image "DEMO in progress" is displayed, and a model-specific display (display of the model name, introduction of model-specific characters, demo movie with variable effects) is displayed. playback, display of an addictive prevention image to the player, etc.) (see FIG. 140(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T2 in FIG. 139, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the manufacturer name of the gaming machine is displayed following the model-specific performance, the first reserved number becomes "1" and the first special The symbol hold display 63 displays "1", and the winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first prefetch designation command) are transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 (FIG. 140) c).

Then, at timing T3 in FIG. 139, when the first pending number changes from "1" to "0" and a jackpot determination is performed, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start command (special symbol A storage designation command, a gaming state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (first cycle variation) (FIG. 140(d) reference).

Furthermore, since a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance control board 130 received the winning command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 display "1", and the back side of the customer waiting demo image On the side, a hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner on the first display part of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the performance pattern 70a (before the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance) "537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance is displayed without fading in, and output of the first winning sound (or second winning sound) is started. Furthermore, the output of the customer waiting demonstration sound is stopped (see FIG. 140(d)).

Note that if the hold icon is additionally displayed in a non-animated manner while waiting for a customer, the hold icon may be displayed in action from the first posture (initial posture), or may be displayed in motion from the second posture. You may also do so. In addition, when additionally displaying the hold icon without going through the customer waiting demonstration image, the operation is displayed from the first or second posture, and when the hold icon is additionally displayed through the customer waiting demo image, , the motion may be displayed from the first posture.

Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a ("537" indicating the result of the previous variable performance) before the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance may be constantly displayed behind the customer waiting demonstration image, and in this case, Even if there is a customer waiting demo image, visibility is restricted.

Thereafter, at timing T4 in FIG. 139 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the start command, the first pending number display area The SA and sub-first hold display 83 becomes "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts (see FIG. 140(e)).

In addition, the customer waiting demo image starts to fade out (gradually changes from opaque state to transparent state and disappears) for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed with the same number (" 537'') can be visually recognized (confirmed/recognized), and the pending icon HI can also be visually recognized. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B starts to be shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the fluctuation performance is started, and the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation motion, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scrolling, switching display). In addition, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are disabled (adjustment is not possible), and the audio output device 9 starts audible output of variable BGM (here, normal BGM corresponding to non-reach performance). (See FIG. 140(e)).

Regarding the special design TZ, regardless of the number that was stopped and displayed, when the update fluctuation starts, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "678" → Nine patterns of image data are switched every frame in the order of "789" → "891" → "912" → "123", etc., and are displayed in cycles like a slide show. Therefore, when the customer waiting demonstration image starts to fade out, the update fluctuation of the special symbol TZ starts immediately, so that the appearance of the special symbol TZ (the customer waiting performance starts The time during which the player can visually check (confirm/recognize) the previous stop result) is now shorter.

In addition, if the volume value image or the light amount value image is displayed due to the operation of the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demonstration image starts, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 will be performed by starting the fluctuation effect. However, the volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted before the customer waiting image fades out. In other words, when erasing the volume value image or the light intensity value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

In addition, regardless of whether the customer is waiting for a customer or not, if a variable display (variable display of production symbols) or a variable display of special symbols is started, the cross key 19 will be pressed at the same timing regardless of the type of variation production pattern. It is now restricted to a state where it is impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity (adjustment is impossible).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle variation), when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, a specific effect is executed at the start of the variable effect. A starting effect performance (a type of jackpot preview performance) is started. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a during floating display is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to prevent the visibility of the background image and the performance pattern 70a. A production (including the output of a sound effect) that will be restricted (shielding) is performed (see FIG. 140(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 become possible (adjustable), and at timing T7 When the shift display (decreasing display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the corresponding icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE restricts the visibility of the three performance symbols 70a. (see FIG. 141(g)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle variation), the floating display as a pre-fluctuation operation of the production symbol 70a ends, and the scrolling display (update variation) of the production symbol 70a starts; The effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the fluctuation start order of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 141(h)), and the preview effect image YE is erased at timing T9 (see FIG. 141(i)). .

Note that the preview effect image YE is gradually enlarged to restrict the visibility of the production pattern 70a (the order in which the variation starts becomes difficult to see), but the visibility of the three production patterns 70a is restricted from the beginning. It may be displayed in the same size. In addition, although a part of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a visible state to the extent that the fluctuation start order becomes difficult to see due to the preview effect image YE, all of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a state that is not visible. You may also do so.

In addition, the preview effect image YE is displayed at the timing when the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image is completed, but it is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the customer-waiting demo image fade-out is completed. It is also possible to do so.

In addition, multiple characters appear (displayed) in the model-specific effects, but the characters that appear the most in the model-specific effects are the effects that are expected to hit the jackpot during the variable effects. It is also becoming easier to appear in In addition, in the model-specific presentation, the display period of the anti-immersion image (for example, 5 seconds) is longer than the display period of the model name (for example, 3 seconds), and the anti-immersion image is displayed after the model name is displayed. Although the display is designed to be performed, an image to prevent immersion may be displayed while the model name is being displayed (from the middle of displaying the model name).

In addition, the demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) until the first customer waiting demonstration performance after the end of the variable performance is longer than the demonstration waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) until the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performances (after the customer waiting demonstration performance ends). may be shorter (for example, 50 seconds).

In addition, instead of the customer waiting demo image fading in from the state where the production pattern 70a etc. is displayed, the screen is blacked out for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds longer than the eye-catching production described later). The customer waiting demonstration image may be faded in after the performance image such as the performance pattern 70a is shielded.

(Specific example 2 when variable performance starts during customer waiting demonstration performance)
A second specific example in which the variable performance starts during the customer waiting demonstration performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 142.

In FIG. 142, the basic flow is the same as in Example 1, in which the variable effect starts from the customer waiting demo effect shown in FIGS. 139 to 141, but instead of the effect effect at the start, the effect mode is shifted. The difference is that a mode change effect is executed to make the game. Therefore, only the parts related to the differences will be explained here.

At the timing of T4 in FIG. 139 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and The sub-first reservation display 83 changes to "0" display, and the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub-first variable display 81 starts (see FIG. 142(e)).

In addition, the customer waiting demonstration image begins to fade out (gradually changes from opaque state to transparent state and disappears), and it is visually confirmed (confirmed and (recognition) becomes possible, and the pending icon HI becomes visible. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B starts to be shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the fluctuation performance is started, and the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation motion, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scrolling, switching display). In addition, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are disabled (adjustment is not possible), and the audio output device 9 starts audible output of fluctuating BGM (normal BGM here) (see FIG. 142(e)). ).

In addition, if the volume value image or the light intensity value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image starts, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 will be performed by starting the fluctuation effect. However, the volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted before the customer waiting image fades out. In other words, when erasing the volume value image or the light intensity value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the fade-out of the customer waiting image.

In addition, regardless of whether the customer is waiting for a customer or not, if a variable display (variable display of production symbols) or a variable display of special symbols is started, the cross key 19 will be pressed at the same timing regardless of the type of variation production pattern. It is now restricted to a state where it is impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity (adjustment is impossible).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 139 (during the second cycle variation), when the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image is completed and the customer waiting demo image is completely hidden, a specific effect is executed at the start of the variable effect. A mode change performance (a type of jackpot preview performance) will begin. Specifically, the mode change image MC that restricts the visibility of the production pattern 70a and the background image from the right side of the screen of the main display device 70 (in this case, it is not a whiteout image with a high expectation of a jackpot, but a blackout with a low expectation of a jackpot). An effect (including the output of a sound effect) is performed in which the image) is enlarged and displayed toward the left side of the screen (see FIG. 142(f)).

Furthermore, at timing T6 in FIG. 139, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the state returns to a state where volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are possible (adjustable). .

Thereafter, at timing T7 in FIG. 139, when the shift display (decreasing display) of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the mode change image MC is The size is such that the visibility of the effect pattern 70a is restricted (see FIG. 142(g)).

Note that when the entire screen of the main display device 70 is blocked by the mode change image, the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B, and the background image, production pattern 70a, and , the icon (pending icon) changes to one corresponding to production mode B.

Furthermore, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 139 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), the floating display of the performance symbol 70a as a pre-fluctuation operation ends, and the scrolling display (updated fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a starts; The mode change image MC makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the fluctuation start order of the production symbols 70a (see FIG. 142(h)), and at the timing of T9, the mode change image MC goes out of frame on the left side of the screen of the main display device 70. (See FIG. 142(i)).

In addition, regarding the mode change image MC, although the visibility of the effect pattern 70a is gradually restricted (the order of change start becomes difficult to see), the visibility of the three effect patterns 70a is regulated from the beginning. May be displayed. In addition, although a part of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a visible state to the extent that the change start order is difficult to see due to the mode change image MC, all of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in an invisible state. You may also do so.

In addition, the mode change image MC is displayed at the timing when the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image is completed, but it is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the customer-waiting demo image fade-out is completed. It is also possible to do so.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display of special symbols (cycle variation) starts from the customer waiting state, there are restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. It does not occur or is not subject to restrictions (adjustability is maintained), but when a variable production (variable display of production symbols) is started in response to the start of a variable display of special symbols (cycle variation), press the cross key 19. Restrictions arise or become restricted (adjustment becomes impossible) with respect to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume and light intensity are adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the start of the variable performance.

Note that if the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted or is subject to restrictions (adjustment becomes impossible) due to the start of the fluctuation performance, no matter which type of fluctuation performance is executed, At the same timing, restrictions arise or are imposed on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the player is not forced to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 each time a variable performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display of special symbols (cycle variation) starts from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. Or, there is no restriction (adjustability is maintained), but the variable display of the special symbol (variable display on the sub-first variable display 81) is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (cycle variation). When the volume adjustment and the light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted or are subject to restrictions (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume and light intensity are adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the start of the variable performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display of special symbols (cycle variation) starts from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. Or, if there are no restrictions (adjustability is maintained), but the number of pending icons is displayed decreasing (shift display) in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation), the volume can be adjusted using the four-way controller 19. Restrictions arise or become restricted (adjustment becomes impossible) regarding light intensity adjustment. Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume and light intensity are adjusted, the player can be made aware of the decrease in the number of pending games.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable display of special symbols (cycle variation) starts from the customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. Or, there is no restriction (adjustability is maintained), but variable BGM (which may be a variation start sound, a notice sound, etc.) is audibly output in response to the start of the variation display (cycle variation) of the special symbol. At this time, restrictions occur or are imposed on volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of starting the audible output of the fluctuating BGM.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when a game ball enters the starting slot while waiting for a customer and the hold icon (hold number display area, sub hold display) is displayed in an increasing number, , there are no restrictions or restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 (adjustability is maintained). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the restrictions regarding volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are released before the fluctuation display (updated fluctuation) after the pre-fluctuation operation of the performance symbol is started. (adjustable). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a restriction regarding the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur after the start of the variable display (cycle variation) of the special symbol, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are not possible, but the volume value image and the light intensity value image may not be displayed (or be erased if displayed), or the volume value image and the light amount value image displayed on the front layer of the effect pattern 70a may be displayed on the rear layer of the effect pattern 70a ( By superimposing the background image in front of the background image and behind the production pattern 70a, restrictions may be imposed on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the variable performance starts with the same display result for a plurality of performance symbols and a plurality of special symbols. During the execution of the customer waiting demo performance (while the customer waiting demo image is being displayed), in which the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted) and the display results are the same, the number of pending memories increases and the variable performance is changed. When started, multiple production symbols and multiple special symbols will be displayed so that they are visible during the fade-out of the customer waiting demo image, but the time until the multiple special symbols are displayed fluctuating (updating fluctuation) Also, the time it takes for multiple performance symbols to be displayed in a variable manner (updated variation after the pre-variation motion) is now longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance in which the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted), the number of pending memories increases and the variable performance is started. In this case, the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner (updated variation) before the end of the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image, and the variable display (updated change after the pre-fluctuation movement) of the production pattern is started after the end of the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image. It is about to start. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance in which the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted), the number of pending memories increases and the variable performance is started. In this case, the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner (updated variation) before the end of the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image, the pending icon is displayed visibly during the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image, and the fade-out of the customer-waiting demo image ends. After that, the decreasing display (shift display to the relevant icon) ends. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of special symbols has started, and also to accurately recognize that the number of pending memories has decreased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance in which the performance symbols are hidden (visibility is restricted), the number of pending memories increases and the variable performance is started. In this case, the hold icon is displayed visibly while the customer waiting demo image is fading out, and before the customer waiting demo image fades out, the display starts decreasing (shifting to the icon), and the production pattern is set to the customer waiting demo image. Variation display (updated variation after the pre-variation operation) is started after the end of the fade-out of the demo image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance and the variable performance is started, the pending icon is visible while the customer waiting demonstration image is fading out. At the same time, the decreasing display (shift display to the relevant icon) will start after the customer waiting demo image fades out, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern will start after the pending icon finishes decreasing display. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, if the number of pending memories increases and the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the icon will be displayed after the customer waiting demo image fades out. The display is completed (the shift display from the pending icon is completed), and the fluctuating display of the effect pattern is started after the display of the icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and the variable performance is started, the special symbol is displayed before the end of the fade out of the customer waiting demonstration image. The display mode is changed multiple times during cycle fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special symbols has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect and the variable effect is started, it becomes visible while the customer waiting demonstration image is fading out. As shown in the figure, the design is displayed without fading in (superimposed on the back of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration performance can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable performance can be started without delay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, a specific preview performance (starting effect performance, mode change performance) that makes people expect a jackpot in response to the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance symbols is possible, and if the number of pending memories increases and a variable effect is started while the customer waiting demonstration image is being executed, the effect pattern will not be faded in so that it becomes visible while the customer waiting demo image is fading out. It is displayed (so as to be superimposed on the back side of the customer waiting demo image), and a specific preview performance is started after the performance pattern becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific preview effect has started due to the start of the variable effect while also confirming the stop roll of the previous variable effect, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even when the customer-waiting demo image is displayed in which the production design is hidden (visibility is restricted), the special design is displayed by the customer-waiting demo image. Visibility is not restricted (it is displayed superimposed in front of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, when displaying a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene of an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene of a successful decision performance, a scene of a jackpot performance, etc.) as a customer waiting demonstration performance, Even in this case, the player can be made aware that the player is in a customer waiting state in which no variable performance is executed, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the game machine is reduced due to the player's misunderstanding.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, even if the customer waiting demo image in which the production design is hidden (visibility is restricted) is being displayed, the number of reservations display area (the first reservation The number of reservations displayed in the number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB) is not restricted in visibility by the customer waiting demo image (displayed in a superimposed manner in front of the customer waiting demo image). . Therefore, when displaying a demo movie of a performance executed during a variable performance (for example, a scene of an SP/SPSP reach performance, a scene of a success performance, a scene of a jackpot performance, etc.) as a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer, Even in this case, it is possible to assist the player in making him or her aware that the player is in a customer waiting state where variable effects are not executed, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine due to a player's misunderstanding. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the variable effect is started and the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started, the number at the start (previous stop number) is Regardless, the predetermined combination of special symbols ("123") will be the first roll (starting point) after updating, and the numbers in each column will be updated one by one from that roll. . Therefore, it is possible to control the variable display of special symbols regardless of the previous stop result, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

(Specific example of recovering from a power outage that occurred during a variable performance)
A specific example of recovery from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144.
FIG. 143 is a timing chart for recovering from a power outage that occurs during a variable performance, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing examples of performance at various timings in FIG. 143. Note that here, in order to restore the normal gaming state, the control is made to the performance mode A.

First, at a timing before the timing T0 in FIG. 143, a power outage occurs during the variable display of the special symbol whose first pending number is "2", and then the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted. When restarted, a loading screen (initial screen) including the words "NOW ROADING" is displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. At this time, it is impossible to adjust the volume or light amount using the cross key 19.

Then, the main control board 110, which has restored the control state of the game to the state before the power cutoff, sends a power-on command to the performance control board 130 (here, a command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). 2 power recovery designation command, first special symbol storage designation command, and second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the main information display 59 is resumed, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is resumed from the state before the power cut, and the first special symbol pending display The display of the first pending number "2" at 63 is also restarted.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the production control board 130 received the power-on command, the above-mentioned power restoration notification and the initial operations (including return operations) of various accessories (board accessories, frame accessories) are performed. At the same time, information display on the sub-information display 80 starts.

At this time, on the main display device 70 during power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set to the top layer, and various effect images (Mode A background image, effect that becomes the initial roll when power is restored) are set to the top layer. The power restoration is set in a lower layer than the power restoration image (design 70a and special design TZ, reservation icon HI according to the number of reservations at the time of power restoration and production mode, reservation number according to the number of reservations at the time of power restoration, etc.) Image data for notification is displayed (see FIG. 144(a)).

Next, at timing T1 in FIG. 143, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. In addition, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144(a)).

Then, at the timing T2 in FIG. 143, when the first pending number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is performed, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start command (special symbol A storage designation command, a gaming state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts varying display of the first special symbol (first cycle variation). At this time, the main display device 70 continues to display the power recovery image (see FIG. 144(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T3 in FIG. 143 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle variation), when a predetermined period has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the start command, the first pending number display area The SA and sub-first hold indicator 83 becomes "1", the variable display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) starts on the sub-first variable indicator 81, and the output of the power recovery notification sound stops. (See Figure 144(c)).

Additionally, when the power recovery image begins to fade out (gradually change from an opaque state to a transparent state and disappear), it is visually confirmed (confirmed) that the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are the same number ("753").・Recognition) becomes possible, and the pending icon HI becomes visible. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B starts to be shifted (reduced) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the fluctuation performance is started, and the performance symbol 70a starts floating display as a pre-variation motion, and the special symbol TZ starts updating fluctuation (scrolling, switching display). Also, the audio output device 9 starts audible output of the fluctuating BGM (see FIG. 140(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 143 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when the fade-out of the power recovery image is completed and the power restoration image is completely hidden, as a specific effect executed at the start of the fluctuation effect. At the start of the game, an effect performance (a type of jackpot preview performance) is started. Specifically, a preview effect image YE of a size that restricts the visibility of the central performance pattern 70a during floating display is displayed, and the preview effect image YE gradually expands to prevent the visibility of the background image and the performance pattern 70a. A production (including the output of a sound effect) that will be restricted (shielded) is performed (see FIG. 144(d)).

After that, at timing T5 in FIG. 143, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 become possible (adjustable), and at timing T6. When the shift display (decreasing display) of the pending icon HI ends, it is displayed as the corresponding icon TI (white icon), the output of the winning sound ends, and the preview effect image YE restricts the visibility of the three performance symbols 70a. (see FIG. 144(e)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 143 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), the floating display of the performance symbol 70a as a pre-fluctuation operation ends, and the scrolling display (update fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a starts; The advance notice effect image YE makes it difficult (impossible) to recognize the fluctuation start order of the performance symbols 70a (see FIG. 144(f)), and the notice effect image YE is erased at timing T8.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the special symbol fluctuation display (cycle fluctuation) is started from the time when the power restoration image is displayed, which imposes restrictions on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. When this happens, the state in which the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 are restricted continues for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display of special symbols (including variable effects) has started, and then adjust the volume and light intensity, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is displayed in which the effect pattern is hidden (visibility is restricted), the power recovery image fades out. Multiple performance symbols and multiple special symbols are displayed so that they can be visually recognized in the middle, but the time it takes for the multiple special symbols to be displayed in a variable manner (updated variation) is longer than the time it takes for the multiple production symbols to be displayed in a variable manner (before variation). The time it takes to update (changes after an operation) is longer. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is displayed in which the effect pattern is hidden (visibility is restricted), the special pattern is Fluctuation display (updated fluctuation) is started before the end of image fade-out, and fluctuated display (updated fluctuation after pre-fluctuation action) of the effect pattern is started after fade-out of the power recovery image is completed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is displayed in which the effect pattern is hidden (visibility is restricted), the special pattern is The floating display (updating variation) starts before the end of the image fade out, the pending icon is visibly displayed during the power restoration image fading out, and the decreasing display (shifting display to the icon) after the power restoration image fade out ends. ) is now terminated. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of special symbols has started, and also to accurately recognize that the number of pending memories has decreased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed, the hold icon is visibly displayed while the power restoration image is fading out, and the Decrease display (shift display to the relevant icon) starts after the fade-out of the restored image ends, and fluctuating display of the effect pattern starts after the decrease display of the pending icon ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, if the fluctuation effect is started while the power restoration image is being displayed, the icon will be displayed completely after the power restoration image fades out (from the pending icon). (shift display is completed), and the variable display of the effect pattern is started after the display of the relevant icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power restoration image is displayed, the display mode changes in the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol before the end of the fade-out of the power restoration image. is performed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special symbols has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is being displayed, the effect pattern is faded in so that it becomes visible while the power recovery image is fading out. (superimposed on the back of the customer waiting demo image). Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration performance can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable performance can be started without delay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, a specific preview performance (start effect performance, mode change performance) that makes people expect a jackpot in accordance with the start of the variable performance and restricts the visibility of the performance symbols is possible, and if the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is displayed, the effect pattern should not be faded in so that it becomes visible while the power recovery image is fading out (behind the customer waiting demo image). A specific preview effect is started after the effect pattern becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific preview effect has started due to the start of the variable effect while also confirming the stop roll of the previous variable effect, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal game state or a specific game state (time saving state), if the special symbol fluctuation display becomes a shortened fluctuation, the operation before the performance symbol fluctuation is not performed (or If the first variation display of the special symbol that starts after recovery from a power outage becomes a shortened variation, the time before the power recovery image fades out (or The variable display of the performance symbols will start at an earlier timing than when the variable performance is executed during the waiting performance. In other words, it takes longer for the performance symbols to change (update fluctuation) when the fluctuation effect is started while the power recovery image is being displayed than when the fluctuation effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed. It becomes easier to shorten. In this way, after the power is restored when the player understands that the special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner, the performance can proceed smoothly and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Timing chart for sending and receiving commands for normal fluctuation effects)
A specific example of command exchange for normal variation effects will be described using FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 (1) is a timing chart when the production control board 130 can normally receive the command related to the normal variation production, and FIG. 145 (2) is a timing chart when the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the command related to the normal variation production. This is a timing chart.
Note that in FIGS. 145(1) and 145(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag in the performance caused by the exchange of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 145(1) will be explained.
At timing T0, the customer is in a waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed, and on the main display device 70, the normal background image is horizontally scrolling, and the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. . In addition, BGM is not output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while waiting for customers.

Then, at timing T1, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 to start commands related to the normal variation production (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. If the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the normal variation production will start, the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ will start variable display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and during the non-reach production Corresponding normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is played back and output from the beginning of the song, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform normal variable light emission.

After that, at timing T2, when the center effect pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right effect patterns 70a that have temporarily stopped first, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) ) emits light when a loss occurs, and the output of the stop sound ends at timing T3.

Further, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. .

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed and the game enters the customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and production button 17 emit light while waiting for a customer.

After that, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting state started (receiving the customer waiting state designation command), the output continued because the normal variable effect ended. Output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is stopped in the middle of a song (in the middle of song data).

In addition, at timing T8 after timing T7, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start time command related to the normal variation production (special symbol storage designation command, A gaming state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) are transmitted. If the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the normal variation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and the normal BGM (variation BGM) (1 type) is played back and output from the beginning of the song, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) normally emit variable light.

Next, FIG. 145(2) will be explained.
Note that since the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as in FIG. 145(1), the timings after T4 will be explained.

At timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary suspension period of the production symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, and the failure of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) The flash period is extended.

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed and the game enters the customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the period during which the production button 17 is turned off is extended.

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds, which is the BGM remaining time) has passed since the customer waiting state started, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) that should normally stop stops. At timing T7, when the output period is extended and the normal BGM output period is being extended, the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). Since a predetermined period of time has elapsed, other commands have been received, a specific performance has started, etc.), the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Note that while the output period of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, the normal BGM will be output again from the beginning of the song every time the normal BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data). (The normal BGM corresponding to the current production mode is played in a loop, and the normal BGM of a production mode different from the current production mode is not output from the beginning of the song.)

Then, at timing T8, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 to start commands related to the normal variation production (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the normal variation production is started.

At this time, if the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a ends and the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped has shifted from the pattern stop position, the effect pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position and is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuation display). (pre-operation) starts. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ does not end and continues to be displayed in a variable manner, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, and the turn-off period of the performance button 17 continues. Further, the failure light emission period in various illumination devices ends and the normal variable light emission starts.

In addition, if the production control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at timing T5, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ end, and the temporarily stopped production The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ, which has been displayed in a variable manner, is stopped and displayed. Further, the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) continues to be output without interruption, but after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the normal BGM stops.

Here, we have explained the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during a normal variable performance, but there is also a case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during a long variable performance. , the basic flow is the same.

In addition, in FIG. 145 (1), the output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is stopped at timing T6 after the production control board 130 successfully receives the customer waiting state designation command at timing T5. However, instead of continuing to output inaudible sound and starting output of normal BGM from the beginning of the song at the timing of T8, the normal BGM that was being output as inaudible sound is switched to audible sound. It may also be output.

Further, in FIG. 145(2), instead of continuing to output the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) without interruption at timing T8, the normal BGM may be output from the beginning of the song.

(Timing chart related to command exchange for losing SPSP reach variation effect)
A specific example of command exchange for the losing SPSP reach variation performance will be described using FIG. 146.

FIG. 146 (1) is a timing chart when the command related to the losing SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and FIG. 146 (2) is a timing chart when the command related to the losing SPSP reach variation effect cannot be received normally. It is a chart.
Note that in FIGS. 146(1) and 146(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and here, the time lag of the performance caused by the exchange of commands is not considered.

First, FIG. 146(1) will be explained.
At the timing of T0, a variable display of special symbols related to the SPSP reach variation effect is being executed, and the SPSP reach effect is being executed. Specifically, on the main display device 70, the SPSP reach background image is displayed, and the two left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at the upper left corner of the screen to form a reach state, and the center effect symbol 70a changes. The performance related to SPSP reach is being performed with all three special symbols TZ being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, the SPSP reach BGM is output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

Then, at timing T1, it is determined that the SPSP reach performance is in its final phase and the performance is started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the valid period of the performance button 17 occurs, and the operation promotion performance is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound saying "Press!" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, the production button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, at timing T2, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, a decision failure effect indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays a decision failure image, and the audio output device 9 outputs a failure sound of “ch-”. In addition, at the upper left corner of the screen, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops when the number of reach misses, and various lights (frame illumination device 10, board illumination device 74) emit light when the game loses.

Further, at the timing T3, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the decision failure performance was started, the output of the failure sound is stopped. In addition, by executing an eye-catching effect (for example, 1 second) that suggests that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is stopped and displayed, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and also returns from the number-only display mode to the number+character display mode and maintains the temporarily stopped state.

Then, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. .

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed and the game enters the customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this customer waiting state designation command, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and production button 17 emit light while waiting for a customer.

Also, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start time command related to the normal variation production (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start command, the normal variation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ start variable display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and correspond to the non-reach production. Normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is played back and output from the beginning of the song, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) normally emit variable light.

Next, FIG. 146(2) will be explained.
Note that since the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as in FIG. 146(1), the timings after T4 will be explained.

At timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary suspension period of the production pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ, the non-output period of BGM, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 10, The illumination period of the lighting device 74) is extended when the lighting device 74) fails.

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed and the game enters the customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this customer waiting state designation command, the period during which the production button 17 is turned off is extended.

Also, at the timing of T6, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start time command related to the normal variation production (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, Special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this start time command, the extension of various periods ends and the normal variable production is started.

At this time, if the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a ends and the effect pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped has shifted from the pattern stop position, the effect pattern 70a is momentarily displayed at the pattern stop position and is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuation display). (pre-operation) starts. On the other hand, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ does not end and continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the turn-off period of the production button 17 also continues. Further, output of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is started, and normal variable light emission in various lighting devices is started.

In addition, if the production control board 130 normally receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of T5, the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a and the variable display period of the special symbol TZ end, and the production that was temporarily stopped The symbol 70a is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position, and the special symbol TZ, which has been displayed in a variable manner, is stopped and displayed.

In addition, here we have explained the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the loss SPSP reach variation performance, but the stop command and the customer waiting state command are not received during the loss normal reach variation performance or the loss SP reach variation performance. Even if the status specification command cannot be received normally, the basic flow is the same except that the output of BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) will stop when the final performance is not performed and the result of reach failure is temporarily stopped. becomes.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in a non-reach variable production in which the BGM continues to be output until after the variation production ends (which remains), the production sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output. When the stop condition is not met when the production pattern is temporarily stopped (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally) , the temporary stop period of the production symbol and the output period of the production sound are extended, and if the production sound is output to the end (end of the song) while the temporary stop period of the production symbol is extended, the special symbol fluctuation display will be Even when it is not being executed, the effect sound is output from the beginning (the beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in a non-reach variable production in which BGM continues to be output until after the variation production ends (remains), production sound (variable BGM, etc.) is output. If the stop conditions are not met when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally), , If the special symbol variation period and production sound output period are extended, and the production sound is output to the end (end of song) while the special symbol variation period is extended, the special symbol variation display is not executed. Even in this state, the effect sound is output from the beginning (the beginning of the song) and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from deteriorating during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in a reach variable presentation in which the output of BGM does not continue until the end of the variable presentation (no trace remains), the BGM is not output and the production pattern (losing effect) When the symbol) is temporarily stopped, the stop conditions are not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally). When the temporary suspension period of a symbol is extended, BGM is not newly output during the extension of the temporary suspension period of a performance symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a so-called revival effect (a effect that suggests a jackpot after indicating a loss) may be carried out, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, in a reach variation production in which the output of BGM does not continue (no trace remains) until after the variation production ends, special symbols are displayed in a variable manner without BGM being output. When the stop condition is not satisfied (cannot receive the stop command normally, cannot receive the customer waiting state designation command normally, cannot normally receive the next start command), the special symbol fluctuation period is If it is extended, no new BGM will be output during the extension of the special symbol variation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a so-called revival effect (a effect that suggests a jackpot after indicating a loss) may be carried out, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(Timing chart related to command exchange for jackpot SPSP reach variation effect)
A specific example of command exchange for the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance will be described using FIG. 147.

FIG. 147 (1) is a timing chart when the command related to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect can be normally received, and FIG. 147 (2) is a timing chart when the command related to the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect cannot be received normally. It is a chart.
In addition, in FIGS. 147(1) and 147(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the performance caused by the exchange of commands is not considered here.

First, FIG. 147(1) will be explained.
At the timing of T0, a variable display of special symbols related to the SPSP reach variation effect is being executed, and the SP reach effect is being executed. Specifically, on the main display device 70, the SP reach background image is displayed, and the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the top of the screen to form a reach state, and the center effect symbol 70a is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The SP reach-related performance is being performed with all three special symbols TZ being displayed in a variable manner. Further, the SP reach BGM is output and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the SP reach effect reaches its final stage and the number of reach failures is temporarily stopped, the SPSP development effect that suggests that it will develop into the SPSP reach effect is executed, and at the timing of T1, the SPSP reach effect is started. Then, on the main display device 70, the SPSP reach background image is displayed, and the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed. Further, SPSP reach BGM is output instead of SP reach BGM, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SPSP reach light emission.

At this time, the confirmed performance is executed when the execution timing of the confirmed performance has arrived. Specifically, the sound output device 9 outputs a confirming sound of "kyuinkyuin", and a handle light emitting device (not shown) rotatably provided in the firing handle 15 is activated. Specifically, it lights up and spins in rainbow colors to indicate a jackpot.

After that, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has passed from the start of the confirmed effect, the output of the confirmed sound of the confirmed effect stops, and at timing T3, the final stage of the SPSP reach effect is decided and the effect starts. . Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the valid period of the performance button 17 occurs, and the operation promotion performance is started. At this time, an operation promotion image imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound saying "Press!" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, the production button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a determined success performance (a type of confirmed performance) indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b descend (deeply descend) to the production position, and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, a successful decision image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a success sound “Kyuinkyuin” is output from the audio output device 9. Further, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen when a jackpot roll is made. Further, various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) and the production button 17 emit light in rainbow colors indicating a jackpot, and the production button vibration motor operates to cause the production button 17 to vibrate.

Furthermore, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the success effect, the output of the success sound will stop, the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 will stop, and the vibration of the effect button 17 will stop. stops. In addition, by executing the eye-catching effect, the SPSP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, the effect pattern 70a returns to the normal size, and the display mode changes from the display mode of numbers only to the display mode of numbers + characters. and maintain the temporarily stopped state.

Next, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light in rainbow colors. and emit light while stopped. Further, the handle light emitting device rotatably provided within the firing handle 15 stops operating.

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, an opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 normally receives this opening designation command, the opening performance is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays the jackpot medium background (here, the opening background), the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, and the audio output device 9 displays the jackpot medium BGM (here, the opening BGM). ) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during a jackpot.

Further, at timing T8, when the opening time has elapsed, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the round production is started.

Next, FIG. 147(2) will be explained.
Note that since the timing from T0 to T5 is the same as in FIG. 147(1), the timing after T6 will be described.

At timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a, the fluctuation period of the special symbol TZ, the rainbow color of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) The light emitting period in the firing handle 15 and the operating period of the handle light emitting device rotatably provided in the firing handle 15 are extended.

Further, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, an opening designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this opening designation command, the horizontal scrolling period of the normal background image and the non-output period of the variable BGM are extended.

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the opening time has elapsed, a round designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this round designation command, the extension of various periods ends and the round production is started. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays the background during the jackpot (here, the background during the round), the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden, and the audio output device 9 displays the BGM during the jackpot (here, the background during the round). Medium BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light during the jackpot.

In addition, when the production control board 130 normally receives the opening designation command at the timing of T7, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a and the variable display period of the special pattern TZ end, and the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ The opening performance starts without stopping the display.

Further, instead of stopping the output of the success sound at the timing of T5, the output of the success sound may be stopped at a timing between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, or at the timing of T5, The rainbow-colored light emission and vibration of the effect button 17 may not be stopped at the same time, but may be stopped with a time difference.

In addition, the confirmed effect can be executed at multiple timings (at the start of the variable effect, at the start of the normal reach effect, at the start of the SP reach effect, etc.), and among these, the confirmed sound and the rotation of the handle light emitting device can be output. Although the output is set to stop after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start, the rainbow light emitted from the handle light emitting device continues until the stop command is received, so no matter which timing the final effect is executed. Also, if the performance control board 130 cannot normally receive the stop command, the rainbow light emission period of the handle light emitting device is extended.

In addition, the confirmed performance can be executed at multiple timings (such as the start of the variable performance, the start of the normal reach performance, the start of the SP reach performance, etc.), but it can be executed after the reception timing of the stop command (temporary performance pattern 70a). It will not be started (executed) during the extension of the stop period or the extension of the special symbol TZ fluctuation display period.

In addition, here we have explained the case where the stop command and the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally during the jackpot SPSP reach variation performance, but the stop command and the customer waiting state command are not received during the jackpot normal reach variation production or the jackpot SP reach variation production. Even if the state specification command cannot be received normally, the basic flow will be the same, except that the output of variable BGM (normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM) will stop when the winning effect is temporarily stopped without execution of the final performance. are the same.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the jackpot fluctuating effect, when the effect pattern (loss effect pattern) is temporarily stopped, the stop condition is not satisfied (the stop command is normally received). If the temporary suspension period of the production pattern is extended, the final performance will not start during the extension of the temporary suspension period of the production pattern, but the temporary stop of the production pattern The confirmed performance that was started before the extension of the period can continue to be executed even during the extension of the temporary suspension period of the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmed effect includes the first effect (output of confirmed sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and before the temporary stop period of the effect pattern is extended. Regarding the confirmed performance that has started, the first performance (output of the final sound) ends before the temporary stop period of the performance pattern is extended, and the second performance (the activation of the handle light emitting device) continues even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern. ) can continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the confirmed performance during the extension of the temporary suspension period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, in the jackpot fluctuating performance, when the special symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the stop condition is not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the opening specified command cannot be received normally, If the special symbol's fluctuation period is extended, the fixed performance will not start during the extension of the special symbol's fluctuation period, but the fixed performance that started before the special symbol's fluctuation period was extended. can be executed continuously even during the extension of the special symbol fluctuation period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from deteriorating during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 147, the confirmed effect includes the first effect (output of a confirmed sound) and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device), and starts before the extension of the special symbol variation period. Regarding the confirmed effect, the first effect (output of the confirmed sound) ends before the special symbol variation period is extended, and the second effect (operation of the handle light emitting device) continues even during the extension of the special symbol variation period. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the confirmation sound becomes harsh during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when executing a confirmed effect in a jackpot fluctuating effect, regardless of the start timing of the confirmed effect, the second effect (activation of the handle light emitting device) may occur during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol or during the variable period of the special symbol. It will continue to run even during the extension.

(Timing chart related to command exchange during look-ahead zone performance)
A specific example of command exchange during prefetch zone performance will be described with reference to FIG. 148.

FIG. 148(1) is a timing chart when a command can be normally received during the look-ahead zone performance, and FIG. 148(2) is a timing chart when a command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead zone performance.
It should be noted that in FIGS. 148(1) and 148(2), it is assumed that the game progresses on the same time axis, and the time lag of the performance caused by the exchange of commands is not considered here.

First, FIG. 148(1) will be explained.
At the timing T0, a variable display of special symbols related to the normal variation effect is being executed, and the normal variation effect is being executed. Specifically, in the main display device 70, the normal background is scrolled horizontally, and three effect symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner. Further, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) normally perform variable light emission. In addition, a zone suggestion effect is being performed that suggests that a pre-read zone effect may be executed.

Thereafter, at timing T1, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the zone suggestion effect, the look-ahead zone effect is started. Specifically, on the main display device 70, a prefetch zone background image is displayed, a blue zone image (or a red thermal zone image) is displayed, and output of the zone BGM (or thermal zone BGM) is started. Ru. At this time, the volume of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) decreases.

Then, at the timing T2, when the center effect pattern 70a temporarily stops following the left and right effect patterns 70a that have temporarily stopped first, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 10, board lighting The device 74) emits light in the event of a loss, and the output of the stop sound ends at timing T3.

Further, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. .

At this time, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but there are conditions to stop the output (e.g., a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the start of a special performance, etc.) Since this is not true, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at timing T5, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start command (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, etc.) related to the loss SP reach variation performance. command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) are transmitted. When the production control board 130 normally receives this command at the time of start, the loss SP reach variation production is started, the production pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ start variable display (pre-variation operation, update variation), and various lighting devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 74) normally emit variable light.

In addition, at the timing of T6, when the normal reach effect is started by the left and right effect symbols 70a forming a reach state and temporarily stopping, the normal reach BGM (a type of variable BGM) is used instead of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM). 1 type) is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

After that, when the normal reach performance reaches its final stage, the SP reach development performance is executed, and at timing T7, when the SP reach performance is started, the look-ahead zone performance ends, and the SP reach background image is displayed on the main display device 70. The effect image related to SP reach is displayed, the effect pattern 70a forming the reach state is moved to the top of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and the effect pattern 70a changes from the number + character display mode to the number only display mode. do. Further, SP reach BGM is output instead of normal reach BGM, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) perform SP reach light emission.

Then, at the timing T9 after passing through the timing T8, when the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped due to a reach miss roll in the final phase of the SP reach production, a stop sound is output, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, The board illumination device 74) emits light when the board loses.

In addition, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the number of reach misses is temporarily stopped, the eye-catching effect is executed, and the SP reach background image returns to the horizontal scrolling of the normal background image, and the effect pattern 70a returns to its normal size, and returns from the number-only display mode to the number+character display mode, maintaining the temporarily stopped state.

After that, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. .

Next, FIG. 148(2) will be explained.
Note that since the timings from T0 to T3 are the same as in FIG. 148(1), the timings after T4 will be explained.

At timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this stop command, the temporary suspension period of the production symbol 70a, the variable display period of the special symbol TZ, and the failure of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) The period of light emission is extended.

At this time, normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but the output stop condition (a predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, receiving other commands, Since the start of the final performance, etc.) has not been established, the normal BGM is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol variable display is started, the main control board 110 sends the production control board 130 a start time command ( A special symbol storage designation command, a gaming state designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) are transmitted. If the production control board 130 cannot normally receive this start command, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variable display period of the special pattern TZ, and the failure of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) The period of time emission is further extended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the output period of normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is extended, and at the timing of T7, the SP reach effect is not executed, so the display period of the look-ahead zone background image and the output of the look-ahead zone BGM are extended. The period will be extended.

After that, at timing T8, the zone BGM is output until the end of the song (the end of the song data), but since the output stop conditions (start of SP reach effect, reception of other commands) are not satisfied, the zone BGM is output. It is output again from the beginning of the song (the beginning of the song data).

Then, at the timing T11 after passing through the timing T9 and the timing T10, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Ru. When the production control board 130 normally receives this stop command, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74) emit light while stopped. . Further, horizontal scrolling of the normal background image is started instead of the prefetch zone background image, output of the zone BGM is stopped, and the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) is restored.

In addition, even if the stop command (symbol confirmation command) cannot be received normally at the timing of T11, and then the start command, customer waiting state designation command, opening designation command, etc. are normally received, the effect design 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed, the display of the pre-read zone background image is finished, and the output of the zone BGM is stopped.

Additionally, if the output of the zone BGM stops due to the normal reception of the start command, the output of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM) will start (resume) instead of the zone BGM, and the output of the opening specified command will be restarted. When the output of the zone BGM is stopped due to normal reception, output of the jackpot BGM (opening BGM) is started in place of the zone BGM.

In addition, when the look-ahead zone effect starts at timing T1, instead of reducing the volume of the normal BGM (a type of variable BGM), the output may be stopped, or the output may be output at an inaudible volume. You can do it. In that case, the output of the normal BGM at an audible volume may be resumed at timing T11.

In addition, here we have explained the case where the loss SP reach variation effect is not executed because the stop command and start command cannot be received normally during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect that is scheduled to be performed over multiple variable displays. Even when the SP reach variation performance is a jackpot SP reach variation performance, the basic flow is the same.

In addition, we have explained the case where the SP reach variation effect, which was the target of the preview of the look-ahead zone effect, is not executed due to the inability to properly receive the stop command and the start command. The basic flow is the same even in the case where the normal reach variation performance or the SPSP reach variation performance is not executed because the stop command and the start command cannot be received normally in the reach variation performance.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, when the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in a non-reach variable performance in which a specific sound (zone BGM, etc.) that makes people expect to execute a jackpot game is output, If the stop conditions are not met (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the temporary stop period of the production pattern and the specific sound If the output period is extended and the specific sound is output until the end (the end of the song) while the temporary stop period of this production symbol is extended, the specific sound will be output at the beginning ( (at the beginning of the song), and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, when a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in a non-reach variable performance in which a specific sound (zone BGM, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game is output, the stop condition is set. is not established (the stop command cannot be received normally, the next start command cannot be received normally, the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the special symbol fluctuation period and the specific sound output period is extended and the specific sound is output until the end (end of the song) while the variation period of this special symbol is extended, the specific sound will be output from the beginning (beginning of the song) even if the special symbol variation display is not executed. The output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 148, during the extension of the output period of a specific sound (zone BGM, etc.), a predetermined command (command at the time of stopping a variable performance that should end a look-ahead zone performance, specifying a customer waiting state) command, opening designation command, etc.), it is possible to end the variable performance and stop outputting the specific sound. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a specific sound (zone BGM, etc.) is output even after the expectation of a jackpot has disappeared, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example of when the icon is redisplayed after being hidden)
A specific example in which an icon is redisplayed after being hidden will be described using FIGS. 149 to 151.

FIG. 149 is a timing chart when the icon is redisplayed after being hidden, and FIGS. 150 and 151 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 149. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 149, when the first pending number is "2", the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60 and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed ( Blinking: (represented by ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol pending display 63, the first pending number display area SA, and the sub-first pending display 83 are displaying "2", and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19. (adjustable) (see FIG. 150(a)).

In addition, on the main display device 70, the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the top of the screen where the SP reach background image is displayed, forming a reach state, and the center effect symbol 70a is displayed in a fluctuating manner. , the SPSP reach effect is being executed with all the special symbols TZ being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the pending icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed in a state of effect operation, and the corresponding icon display area 70C, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in a state in which it is performing an effect, and the SP reach BGM is audibly output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(a)).

Then, at timing T1 in FIG. 149, when the SP reach effect reaches its final stage and the number of hit misses in the reach is temporarily stopped, an SPSP development effect indicating that it will develop into an SPSP reach effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move to the presentation position (greatly lower), and the second movable member 73b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the main display device 70 displays a developed image HA that covers (hides and restricts visibility) various performance images in a manner corresponding to the first movable member 73a, and also displays the developed image HA that is output from the audio output device 9. The output of the SP reach BGM that was being played is stopped and the developing sound is output (see FIG. 150(b)).

Note that by executing the development effect (displaying the development image HA), the icon TI and the pending icon HI are hidden (covered and visibility is restricted), but the normal display mode is suspended when the icon is hidden. The icon HI and the icon TI are in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) is rotated by a predetermined angle (here, 90 degrees) to the right. It is in the second position.

Thereafter, at timing T2 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the development performance, the SPSP reach performance is started. Specifically, while the SPSP ready-to-reach background image is displayed, the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a smaller size than the normal size, and the performance image related to the SPSP ready-to-reach is displayed. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B remains hidden, and the SPSP reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9 (see FIG. 150(c)).

In addition, the icon will be hidden when the SPSP development performance starts and will be redisplayed when the SPSP development performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it will be in the operating state when it was hidden due to the start of the SPSP development performance. The process of displaying from (the first posture facing left) is not performed, and the display is displayed from a predetermined operation state (a posture that would have continued the production movement even after being hidden: here, the second posture facing right) (See FIG. 150(c)).

Furthermore, at timing T3 in FIG. 149, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage, the effect is decided and started. Specifically, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, the valid period of the performance button 17 occurs, and the operation promotion performance is started. At this time, an operation promotion image imitating the production button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, and a promotion sound saying "Press!" is output from the audio output device 9. Furthermore, the effect button 17 emits white light (see FIG. 150(d)).

Then, at timing T4 in FIG. 149, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a decision failure effect indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed. Specifically, the main display device 70 displays a decision failure image, and the audio output device 9 outputs a failure sound of “ch-”. In addition, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the upper left corner of the screen when a reach miss roll is made (see FIG. 150(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T5 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the winning failure effect, the output of the failure sound is stopped and the effect symbol 70a is moved from the upper left corner of the screen to the center of the normal position (above the symbol stop position) and is displayed in normal size (see FIG. 150(f)).

Furthermore, at the timing T6 in FIG. 149, an eye-catching effect is executed that suggests that the effect pattern 70a (special pattern TZ) is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC displayed at the center of the screen gradually expands and becomes in a state of blocking the production pattern 70a and the icon TI (see FIG. 151(g)). In addition, even if the eye-catching image IC is enlarged, the special symbol TZ and various pending number display areas (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) are not blocked (visibility is restricted). .

Then, at timing T7 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time from the start of the eye-catching effect ends, the eye-catching effect ends. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC expands to the entire screen and fades out, the SPSP reach background image returns to horizontal scrolling from the normal background image (here, the mode A background image), and the production pattern 70a returns to the normal size. At the same time, the display mode returns from the display mode of numbers only to the display mode of numbers + characters, maintains the temporarily stopped state, and the icon TI and pending icon HI are redisplayed (see FIG. 151(h)).

Note that the pending icon in the normal display mode (white) will be hidden when the SPSP development effect starts, and will be redisplayed when the eye-catching effect ends, but when it is redisplayed, it will be hidden due to the start of the SPSP development effect. The display process is not performed from the operating state (the first posture facing left) when it becomes , and the predetermined operating state (the posture in which the performance movement would have continued even after being hidden: here, vertical) The motion is displayed from the second orientation (see FIG. 151(h)).

In addition, the reserved icon in the special display mode (blue) will be hidden when the SPSP development performance starts, and will be redisplayed when the eye-catching performance ends, but when it is redisplayed, it will be hidden due to the start of the SPSP development performance. The process of displaying from the operating state when it became (the second posture rotated 90 degrees to the right) was not performed, and the production operation would have continued even after becoming invisible. Attitude: Initial attitude here) is displayed (see FIG. 151(h)).

In addition, even if the pending icon is in a special display mode other than blue, when it is redisplayed, the processing to display it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, and the predetermined operating state (after being hidden) is not performed. The movement is displayed from the posture in which the performance movement would have been continued.

In addition, the icon in the normal display mode (white) will be hidden when the eye-catching effect starts, and will be re-displayed when the eye-catching effect ends, but when it is re-displayed, it will be hidden due to the start of the eye-catching effect. The display process is not performed from the operating state at the time (the first posture facing left), and the predetermined operating mode (the posture in which the production operation would have continued even after being hidden: here, vertical) (see FIG. 151(h)).

Note that even if the icon is in a special display mode (blue, red, rainbow color), when it is redisplayed, the processing to display it from the operating state when it was hidden is not performed, but it is changed to the predetermined operating state (non-displaying state). The movement is displayed from the posture in which the performance movement would have continued even after the movement was displayed.

Thereafter, at timing T8 in FIG. 149, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (see FIG. 151(i)).

Then, at timing T9 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the production control board 130 received the stop command, the variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 stops. Furthermore, the animation display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, and the stop display of the effect pattern 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") is started. Further, the volume adjustment and the light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are disabled (adjustment impossible) (see FIG. 151(j)).

Further, at timing T10 in FIG. 149, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 151(k)).

In addition, if the volume value image or the light amount value image is displayed by operating the cross key 19 before the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the volume value using the cross key 19 is changed by the stop display of the effect pattern 70a. The volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted when the adjustment or the light amount adjustment becomes impossible, but the volume value image and the light amount value image are deleted before the animation of the icon TI is erased. That is, when erasing a volume value image or a light intensity value image, it is erased in a shorter time (earlier timing) than the erasing animation of the icon TI.

Next, at timing T11 in FIG. 149, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number changes from "2" to "1" and a jackpot determination is performed, and the main control board 110 controls the performance control board 130. A start time command (special symbol storage designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" display, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display (first cycle fluctuation) of the first special symbol.

After that, when a predetermined period of time passes after the production control board 130 receives the start command, the first pending number display area SA and the sub-first pending display 83 become "0" display, and the sub-first variable display The variable display at 81 is started. Further, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable effect, the state returns to a state where the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are possible (adjustable).

In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command after receiving the stop command, when a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the cross key 19 Returns to a state where the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (adjustable).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, a specific performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance ~ SPSP reach performance ~ eye When redisplaying the pending icon in the normal mode or special mode in response to the end of the catch effect), the process of displaying the icon from the operating state (posture) when it was hidden is not performed, and the icon is changed to the predetermined operating state (hidden). The movement is now displayed from the posture in which the performance movement would have been continued even after . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the pending icon, and it is also less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player when redisplaying the pending icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Regarding the predetermined operation state when redisplaying the pending icon, instead of setting it in the posture in which the performance movement would have continued even after it was hidden, it is in the first posture (first posture), which is the initial posture. 1 operation state). In addition, in short-term specific performances (SP development performances, etc.), the performance will be redisplayed from the posture that would have continued even after being hidden, and in long-term specific performances (SPSP reach performance), The display may be re-displayed from the first posture (first operating state), which is the initial posture.

In addition, as specific effects (short-time effects) in which the hold icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the hold icon) does not change, but the background image changes, such as a stage change effect or a predetermined effect. A jackpot preview performance that displays a shielding image (both performances performed before the reach performance), etc. may be provided.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the end of a specific performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, eye-catching performance, etc.) that hides the icon in the normal mode or special mode in the variable production. When redisplaying the icon in normal mode or special mode depending on The motion is displayed from the posture in which the performance motion would have been continued (the first posture). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the icon, and it is also less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when redisplaying the icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, regarding the predetermined operation state when redisplaying the icon, it is not set to the posture in which the performance operation would have continued even after it is hidden, but to the first posture (the first posture) which is the initial posture. 1 operation state). In addition, in short-term specific performances (SP development performances, etc.), the performance will be redisplayed from the posture that would have continued even after being hidden, and in long-term specific performances (SPSP reach performance), The display may be re-displayed from the first posture (first operating state), which is the initial posture.

In addition, as specific effects (short-time effects) in which the icon is hidden and then redisplayed, the effect mode (display mode of the pending icon) does not change, but the background image changes, such as a stage change effect or a predetermined effect. A jackpot preview performance that displays a shielding image (both performances performed before the reach performance), etc. may be provided.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (end of cycle variation), there are no or no restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. (adjustability is maintained), but when the production symbol or special symbol stops displaying (the variation production ends) in response to the stop display of the special symbol (the end of the cycle variation), the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 or Restrictions arise or are imposed on light amount adjustment (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume and light intensity are adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance symbols and special symbols have stopped being displayed (the fluctuating performance has ended).

In addition, if the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted or restricted (adjustment becomes impossible) due to the stop display of the performance design or special design, no matter which type of fluctuating performance is executed. Even if there is, a restriction occurs or is imposed on the volume adjustment or light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 at the same timing (adjustment becomes impossible). Therefore, the player is not forced to perform complicated work such as changing the timing of volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 each time a variable performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (end of cycle variation), there are no or no restrictions on volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. (adjustability remains), but when the icon is erased (variation effect ends) in response to the stop display of the special symbol (end of cycle variation), the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the four-way controller 19 Restrictions occur or are subject to restrictions (adjustment becomes impossible, volume value images and light amount value images are erased). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume and the amount of light can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume or light intensity is adjusted, the icon will be erased, that is, the player can be made aware that the variable effect has ended.

In addition, as a restriction regarding the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are not possible, but the volume value image and the light intensity value image are not displayed (not displayed). Alternatively, the volume value image and the light amount value image displayed on the front layer of the effect pattern 70a may be displayed on the rear layer of the effect pattern 70a (if the background image is By doing so, restrictions may be placed on volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19.

In addition, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, instead of returning to a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, the customer waiting state designation command is received. It may be possible to return to a state where the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 at this point, or the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the cross key 19 when the stop time of the production pattern (special pattern) has elapsed. Alternatively, the state may be returned to a state in which volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 can be performed before the stop time of the performance symbols (special symbols) elapses.

Further, the volume value image and the light amount value image may be displayed even if the performance button 17 or cross key 19 is not operated during the period from when the customer is waiting until the customer waiting demonstration performance is started. In this case, a predetermined period of time (for example, it may be 15 seconds, which is the same time as the remaining time of the BGM, or 10 seconds, which is shorter than the remaining time of the BGM) has elapsed since the customer was in a waiting state. It is preferable to display the volume value image and the light amount value image later.

(Specific example of the operation status of the pending icon before and after the icon change effect)
A specific example of the operating state of the pending icon before and after the icon change effect will be described using FIG. 152. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the effect mode is A, but since the effect modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), a variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in a state where the first pending number is "2", and the first pending number "2" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area SB. Further, two pending icons in the normal display mode are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and these three icons are synchronized. A performance movement (swaying movement) is performed.

In this state, when the hold icon change performance (first change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the hold icon displayed on the second display part of the first hold icon display area 70B is started, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), character A is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and an opportunity effect for throwing a heart HE is performed, and the character A is in a second posture facing right on the second display section of the first pending icon display area 70B. A heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal mode.

Then, when the heart HE that covered the hold icon HI is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was in the second right-facing position, changes to the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue), which has a different shape, and The rotating motion (acting motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over the operating state of the pending icon HI (here, the second posture facing right).

Note that there are multiple hold icons for the first special display mode (round blue), the second special display mode (round red), and the third special display mode (round rainbow color). This display mode is common to all production modes, but regardless of the display mode, the production motion (rotation motion) from the first posture to the second posture and back to the first posture is 2.5 times per cycle. This is repeated every second (a cycle different from the icon presentation operation in the normal display mode).

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable effect ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode is in the second attitude rotated 90 degrees to the right.

After that, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first pending number display area SA starts displaying "1" as shown in FIG. 152(e). Then, the variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and the two pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. (decreased display). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the shift display of the pending icons is completed and one becomes the icon TI.

Then, when the pending icon change performance (second change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the pending icon HI displayed on the first display part of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, FIG. ), character A is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and an opportunity effect for throwing a heart HE is performed, and the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right is displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B. The heart hits the hold icon HI in the first special display mode.

Furthermore, when the heart HE that obscures the hold icon HI is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 152(g). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the first special display mode, which was in the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right, changes to the hold icon in the second special display mode (round red) with the same shape. The rotation operation is continued by taking over the operation state of the previous hold icon HI (second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right).

Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after character A was erased, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable effect ends. At this time, the hold icon HI in the second special display mode is in the first attitude (initial attitude), which is rotated 360 degrees and returned to the 0 degree position.

In addition, when changing from the hold icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color), which has a different shape, the operating state of the hold icon before the change is The rotating motion (direction motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, if the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) changes to the hold icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) with the same shape, the behavior of the hold icon before the change It takes over the state and starts rotating motion (direction motion).

In addition, here we have explained the hold icon change performance in the character A action change pattern, but the hold icon change performance in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns is also similar to the hold icon change performance in the normal display mode (hexagonal white). When changing from an icon to a hold icon with a different shape from the first to third special display modes, the rotation movement (direction movement) is performed from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state of the hold icon before the change. Start. On the other hand, there are cases where the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) changes to a second special display mode (round red) or a third special display mode (round rainbow color) with the same shape, or When changing from the display mode (round red) to the third special display mode having the same shape (round rainbow color), the operation state of the pending icon before the change is taken over and a rotation operation (presentation operation) is started.

(Specific example of the operating state of the icon before and after the icon change effect)
A specific example of the operating state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be explained using FIG. 153. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the effect mode is A, but since the effect modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), a variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed in a state where the first pending number is "1", and the first pending number "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area SB. Further, one pending icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that these two icons are synchronized. A performance movement (swaying movement) is performed.

In this state, when the icon change production (first change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. 153(b) , the character A is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and an opportunity effect for throwing a heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the normal display mode, which is in the second posture facing right in the icon display area 70C.

Then, when the heart HE that covered the icon TI is deleted, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153(c). Specifically, the icon TI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was in the second right-facing orientation, changes to the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) with a different shape, and The rotation operation (direction operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over the operating state of the icon TI (here, the second posture facing right).

Note that for the icon in the first special display mode (round blue), the icon in the second special display mode (red round), and the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color), there are multiple The display mode is common to all production modes, but regardless of the display mode, the production motion (rotation motion) from the first posture to the second posture and back to the first posture is 2.5 times per cycle. Repeatedly in seconds.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 153(d). At this time, the icon TI in the first special display mode is in the second attitude rotated 90 degrees to the right.

Thereafter, when the icon change effect (second change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, the screen as shown in FIG. 153(e) Character A is displayed in the lower right corner, and an opportunity effect for throwing a heart HE is performed, and the icon TI in the first special display mode, which is in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right in the icon display area 70C, is displayed. Heart hits.

Then, when the heart HE that covered the icon TI is deleted, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 153(f). Specifically, the icon TI in the first special display mode, which was in the second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right, changes to the icon in the second special display mode (round red) with the same shape. The rotation operation is continued by taking over the previous operation state of the icon TI (second posture rotated 180 degrees to the right).

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased, as shown in FIG. 153(g). At this time, the icon TI in the second special display mode is in the second posture rotated 270 degrees to the right.

In addition, when the icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) changes to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color), which has a different shape, the operating state of the pending icon before the change is changed. The rotating motion (direction motion) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. On the other hand, if the icon in the first special display mode (round blue) changes to the icon in the third special display mode (round rainbow color) with the same shape, the behavior of the icon before the change It takes over the state and starts rotating motion (direction motion).

In addition, although we have explained the icon change performance in the character A action change pattern, the icon change performance in the normal change pattern and the character B to D action change patterns also includes the reserved icon in the normal mode (hexagonal white). Or, when changing from the icon to the icon of the first to third special display mode whose shape is different, the rotation operation is performed from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operation state of the pending icon or the icon before the change. (direction action) starts. On the other hand, when the hold icon in the first special display mode (round blue) or the icon changes to the second special display mode (round red) or the third special display mode (round rainbow color) having the same shape, When changing from the second special display mode (round red) to the third special display mode with the same shape (round rainbow color), the operation state of the pending icon or the icon before the change is inherited and the rotating operation (direction) is performed. operation).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the hold icon in the normal display mode is in the second attitude (changed attitude, second operation state), the first to When changing to a hold icon in the third special display mode, it is possible to cause the changed hold icon to perform a presentation operation (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold icon. Further, when changing the display mode of the hold icon, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, when the hold icon in the first special display mode is in the second attitude (changed attitude, second operation state), second to 3. When changing to the hold icon in the special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the hold icon before the change and perform a performance operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold icon. Further, when changing the display mode of the hold icon, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the hold icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operation state), a third special display having the same shape is displayed. When changing the mode to a pending icon, it is possible to take over the posture of the pending icon before the change and perform a production operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold icon. Further, when changing the display mode of the hold icon, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state), the first to third special icons, which have different shapes, When changing the display mode of the icon, it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a performance operation (motion display) from a first posture (initial posture, first operation state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the first special display mode is in the second attitude (changed attitude, second operation state), second to 3. When changing to the icon in the special display mode, it is possible to take over the posture of the icon before the change and perform a production operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when the icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operation state), a third special display having the same shape is displayed. When changing the aspect of the icon to that icon, it is possible to take over the attitude of the pending icon before the change and perform a production operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the hold icon in the special mode or the icon is already displayed and the hold icon in the normal display mode changes to the hold icon in the special display mode, the hold icon in the special display mode that was already displayed Alternatively, a pending icon that has changed from the same attitude (operation state) as the icon to a new special display mode may start a rotation operation (presentation operation).

In addition, when the pending icon in the first special display mode or the icon is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state) and the shape is changed to the second to third special display modes with the same shape, the change The subsequent pending icon or the icon may be made to perform a performance operation (motion display) from the first posture (initial posture, first motion state).

In addition, when the pending icon in the second special display mode is in the second posture (changing posture, second operation state) and the shape is changed to the third special display mode with the same shape, the pending icon after the change or the corresponding The icon may be made to perform a presentation operation (motion display) from a first posture (initial posture, first motion state).

In addition, when a pending icon or the relevant icon is completely occluded by a heart image and the display mode changes, the presentation operation is not performed from the attitude of the icon before being occluded, but rather from the attitude of the icon before occluded (first If it is a posture, the performance operation may be performed from the second posture, and if the second posture is the first posture, or a second posture which is slightly different.

(Variation example of icon operation state before and after icon change effect)
A modified example of the operating state of the icon before and after the icon change effect will be described using FIG. 154. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case where the performance mode is A, but since the performance modes B to F are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

In this modification, the icon display mode includes a fourth special display mode (round white flashing) that suggests that the icon display mode may change, and a specific effect (SP/ A fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) indicating that SPSP reach effect is to be executed is set. Note that the icons in the fourth special display mode and the fifth special display mode have different information from the icons in the first to third special display modes, which indicate the level of expectation for a jackpot game. This may also be referred to as 2 special display mode.

The icon of the fourth special display mode (circular white blinking) can be displayed when a game ball enters the starting slot, or can change from the icon of the normal mode, but the icon of the first to third special display mode The icons do not change from the display mode or the fifth special display mode, but can change to the first to third special display modes or the fifth special display mode. In addition, the icon of the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) can be changed from the icon of the fourth special display mode, but it does not change from the icon of the normal display mode or the first to third special display modes. , it does not change to the normal display mode or the first to fourth special display modes.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(a), a variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is executed with the first pending number being "1", and the first pending number is "1". "1" is displayed in the display area SA, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area SB. Further, one pending icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the corresponding icon in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that these two icons are synchronized. A performance movement (swaying movement) is performed.

In this state, when the pending icon change performance (first change) based on the character A action change pattern targeting the pending icon displayed on the first display part of the first pending icon display area 70B is started, As shown in b), the character A is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and an opportunity effect for throwing a heart HE is performed, and the character A is in a second posture facing right in the first display section of the first pending icon display area 70B. A heart hits the hold icon HI in the normal display mode.

Then, when the heart HE that covered the hold icon HI is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon HI changes as shown in FIG. 154(c). Specifically, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (hexagonal white), which was in the second posture facing right, changes to the hold icon HI in the fourth special display mode (blinking round white), which has a different shape, and The enlargement/contraction operation (performance operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over the operating state of the pending icon HI (here, the second posture facing right).

Note that the icons for the fourth special display mode (hexagonal white) and the icons for the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolored) are common to multiple production modes, but The presentation operation (enlargement/contraction operation) in which the icon in the special display mode returns from the first posture of the reduced size to the second posture of the enlarged size and returns to the first posture is 1 second per cycle (what is the presentation operation of the icon in the normal display mode? The production movement (up and down movement) in which the icon of the fifth special display mode changes from the first position facing upward, to the second position facing downward, and then returns to the first position, is repeated in different cycles) and takes 1.5 seconds per cycle ( This is repeated at a different cycle from the icon rendering operation in the normal display mode.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since character A was erased, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is erased, and the current variable effect ends, as shown in FIG. 154(d). At this time, the hold icon HI in the fourth special display mode is in the second posture of enlarged size.

After that, when the first reserved number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first reserved number display area SA starts to display "0" as shown in FIG. 154(e). Then, the variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is started, and one pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. (decreased display). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the shift display of the pending icon is completed and the icon becomes TI.

Then, when the icon change effect based on the character A action change pattern targeting the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is started, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and an opportunity effect for throwing the heart HE is performed, and the heart hits the icon TI in the fourth special display mode, which is in the medium-sized second posture in the icon display area 70C.

Thereafter, when the heart HE that covered the icon TI is erased, the display mode of the icon TI changes as shown in FIG. 154(g). Specifically, the icon TI in the fourth special display mode (round white flashing), which was in the second posture of medium size, changes to the icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolored) with a different shape. However, the vertical movement (direction movement) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without inheriting the operational state of the icon TI before the change (in this case, the medium-sized second posture).

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since character A was displayed, character A is erased as shown in FIG. 154(h). At this time, the icon TI in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor) is in the second downward posture.

In addition, when changing from the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (circular white blinking) to the hold icon in the fifth special display mode (axe-shaped multicolor), which has a different shape, the operating state of the hold icon before the change is changed. The vertical movement (direction movement) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over. In addition, when changing from the icon in the normal display mode (hexagonal white) to the icon in the fourth special display mode (blinking round white), which has a different shape, the posture (operation state) of the icon before the change is changed. The enlargement/contraction operation (direction operation) is started from the first posture (initial posture) without taking over.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, when the pending icon in the normal display mode is in the second attitude (changed attitude, second operation state), the fourth special display mode (the fourth special display mode) having a different shape is displayed. In the case of changing the hold icon to the hold icon in the first special display mode, the changed hold icon can be made to perform a presentation operation (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold icon. Further, when changing the display mode of the hold icon, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, when the icon in the normal display mode is in the second attitude (changed attitude, second operation state), the fourth special display mode (the first special display mode) has a different shape. In the case of changing the icon to the icon in the display mode), it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a performance operation (motion display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, when the hold icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state), the shape is different. When changing to the hold icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), it is possible to make the changed hold icon perform a performance operation (action display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold icon. Further, when changing the display mode of the hold icon, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 154, when the icon in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is in the second posture (changed posture, second operation state), the shape is different. When changing the icon to the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), it is possible to cause the changed icon to perform a production operation (motion display) from the first posture (initial posture, first operation state). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the icon. Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the icon, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when the hold icon or the icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) is already displayed, the hold icon of the normal mode or the icon is displayed in the fourth special display mode (first special display mode). When changing to the hold icon or the icon, the hold icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) that was already displayed or the same posture (operating state) as the icon changes to the new fourth special display mode. The hold icon that has changed to (first special display mode) or the icon may start an enlargement/contraction operation (actual performance operation).

In addition, in a state where the pending icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon concerned is already displayed, the pending icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode) or the icon concerned is displayed in the fifth special display mode (first special display mode). When changing to the hold icon of the special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon, the hold icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) that was already displayed or the same posture as the icon ( The hold icon that has newly changed from the operating state) to the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) or the icon may start an up-and-down motion (presentation motion).

In addition, the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode) does not change only from the icon of the fourth special display mode (first special display mode), but the icon of the normal display mode or the first to second special display mode. The icon of the special display mode may be allowed to change to the icon of the fifth special display mode (second special display mode), and may not change from the icon of the third special display mode (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the firing permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to fire the game ball. By transmitting a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control is started, the game balls may be fired after the game becomes ready for play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, so the ball lending control board 120 installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1 It is possible to pay out game balls based on a payout request from a ball lending machine (ball lending), but game balls based on a payout request from a ball lending machine after the game progress control has started and the game is ready for play. It may also be possible to pay out (lending balls).

In addition, in this embodiment, since backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) stores the unpaid data. Although no data on the number of balls to be put out remains, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the unpaid ball number data remains. It may also be possible to pay out game balls based on this.

Further, in this embodiment, the main information display 59 is provided outside the gaming area 5a, but the main information display 59 may be provided inside the gaming area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, prize balls (prize value) are awarded based on the establishment of award conditions (the winning of game balls in the winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening), but the The balls may be managed as data, and prize ball data may be added (added to ball data).

Further, in this embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effects with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during a variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed across the screen at the top and/or bottom of the screen, and the zone image of the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed across the screen. It is preferable to display the zone images on the left and/or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. In this way, the two look-ahead zone performances can be made compatible, and the performance effect can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as a jackpot preview effect, but instead of the blackout effect, a whiteout effect in which the main display device 70 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as the blackout effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution mode of the variable performance is basically the same between the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), but for example, the first stage performance in the normal gaming state Post-stage effects (cases of pre-reach effect and reach effect, cases of normal reach effect and SP reach effect, cases of SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect, case of pre-reach effect and temporary stop of the effect pattern, during reach effect and effect pattern) The first information advantageous to the player (information suggesting jackpot expectation level, information regarding execution of a special game, etc.) is notified during the execution of the subsequent stage performance of the variable performance (e.g. during temporary suspension of 70a). , Second information different from the first information (additional information on songs that can be selected by operating the cross key 19, mission achievement status, etc.) may be notified. In addition, as a variable performance consisting of a first stage performance and a second stage performance in the normal gaming state, there is a case where a common second stage performance is executed after executing the first stage performance, and a case where a common second stage performance is executed after executing a second stage performance different from the first stage performance. A common subsequent performance may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common subsequent performance that is executed when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines execute variable display of special symbols according to the judgment result of judgment information, and also execute variable effects using effect symbols during the execution of variable display of special symbols ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-118109). However, such gaming machines have the problem that there is room for improvement in game performance and the games are not very interesting.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and the performance in the fluctuating performance is executed at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. Variation display of the symbol in a predetermined manner (scroll display after the pre-variation operation (levitation display, reduced display, enlarged display)) is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timings" here refer to the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which cycle fluctuations are started, and the start of frame updating of the image control unit at which fluctuation display of a predetermined mode of production symbols is started. Although the timing does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board during which the cycle fluctuation is started is the same as the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit during which the fluctuating display of the predetermined mode of the production pattern is started. ) may not be included.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. The performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol during the execution of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and after the end of the first cycle fluctuation in the fluctuating display of the special symbol, Variation display (scroll display after pre-variation operation (levitation display, reduced display, enlarged display)) of the production symbol in a predetermined manner in production is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using production symbols and a variation display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, Variation display (update variation) of the special symbols is started at a timing different from the start timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here refers to the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation starts and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the fluctuation display of the special symbol starts. Although they do not match, the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board during which cycle fluctuations are started is not included within the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit during which fluctuation display of special symbols is started. It may be something.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is displayed in a stopped state, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using production symbols and a variation display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) during execution of the variation display of the special symbol, After the first display change is started, the variable display (update variation) of the special symbol is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , a hold display according to the hold memory stored in the storage means (hold icon and hold number on the main display device 70, LED hold display on the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84) It is possible to cause the pending display to decrease in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, and to start displaying the decreasing pending display at a timing different from a start timing of the cycle fluctuation. . By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timing" here refers to the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation starts, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the display of the pending display starts decreasing. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt (4ms) of the main control board that starts the cycle variation is not included in the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit that starts the reduction display of the pending display. It may be.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , Hold display (display of the hold icon HI and hold number on the main display device 70, hold on the sub-first hold display 83 and sub-second hold display 84) according to the hold memory stored in the storage means display), and the pending display may be decreased in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, and the decreasing display of the pending display may be started after the first display change in the cycle variation is started. It has become. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to additionally display a hold display (hold icon HI) in response to an increase in the hold memory, and to shift and display the hold display to decrease (change to the icon TI) in accordance with a decrease in the hold memory. The shift display of the pending display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here refers to the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation starts, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the shift display of the pending display starts. Although they do not match, the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board during which the cycle variation is started is not included within the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit during which the shift display of the pending display is started. It may be something.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to additionally display a hold display (hold icon HI) in response to an increase in the hold memory, and to shift and display the hold display to decrease (change to the icon TI) in accordance with a decrease in the hold memory. After the first cycle variation in the special symbol variation display ends, the shift display of the pending display ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to additionally display a hold display (hold icon HI) in accordance with an increase in the hold memory, and to shift and display the hold display as a corresponding display (the icon TI) in accordance with a decrease in the hold memory. The shift display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here refers to the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation starts, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the shift display of the pending display starts. Although it does not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board during which the cycle fluctuation is started is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit during which the shift display of the pending display is started. It may be.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , additionally displaying a pending display (holding icon HI) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and shifting and displaying the pending display as a corresponding display (the icon TI) in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible, and the shift display ends after the first display change in the cycle variation ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and is capable of producing a predetermined game sound (fluctuating BGM, fluctuation start sound) while performing the fluctuating display. , temporary stop sound, etc.), and the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timings" here refer to the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation starts, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the audible output of the predetermined game sound starts. However, the timer interrupt period (4ms) of the main control board during which the cycle fluctuation is started is within the frame update period (33ms) of the image control unit during which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is started. It may not be included in the

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and audibly outputs performance BGM (fluctuation BGM) during execution of the fluctuating performance. is possible, and the audible output of the effect BGM is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here refers to the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation starts, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the audible output of the production BGM starts. Although they do not match, the main control board's timer interrupt period (4 ms) during which cycle fluctuations begin is not included within the image control unit's frame update period (33 ms) during which the audible output of the production BGM begins. It may be something.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is displayed in a stopped state, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and performs a production operation (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling, (scene change, etc.), and the production operation of the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation (when the display of the variation standby screen starts after the power is turned on). There is. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here refers to the start timing of a timer interrupt of the main control board at which cycle fluctuations are started, and the start timing of frame update of the image control unit at which a background image production operation is started. Although they do not match, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board during which cycle fluctuations are started is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit during which the background image rendering operation is started. It may be something.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is displayed in a stopped state, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, and performs a production operation (horizontal scrolling, horizontal scrolling, (scene change, etc.), and the performance operation of the background image is performed before the start of the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol (when the display of the variation standby screen starts after the power is turned on). ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol during execution of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and causes the performance symbol to change into a predetermined manner at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle variation. (stop display, temporary stop display). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timings" as used herein mean that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is ended and the start timing of frame update of the image control unit at which the production pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner. Although they do not match, the main control board's timer interrupt period (4 ms) during which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control unit during which the production design is displayed in a predetermined manner. It may be something.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance by a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and before the last cycle variation in the fluctuating display of the special symbol ends, The production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using production symbols and a variation display of a special symbol (fourth symbol) while the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, The special symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing different from the end timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation is ended does not match the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even if the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board during which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included in the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control section during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. good.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to perform a performance operation (shaking motion, rotation motion) on a reservation display (holding icon HI) corresponding to the reservation memory stored in the storage means during execution of the fluctuation performance, and to perform a performance operation (shaking motion, rotation motion) while the fluctuation performance is being executed, and the fluctuation of the special symbol Even after the end of the last cycle variation in the display, the effecting operation of the suspended display continues to be performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the judgment information for which the judgment has been performed, and to display the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last display in the variable display of the special symbol. The disappearing display of the corresponding display ends at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that "different timing" here means that the start timing of the timer interrupt of the main control board at which the cycle fluctuation ends and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit at which the disappearing display of the corresponding display ends. Although they do not match, the main control board's timer interrupt period (4 ms) during which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is not included within the image control unit's frame update period (33 ms) during which the disappearance display of the corresponding display is terminated. It may be something.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. means, a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a reserved memory, and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the judgment, the variable display means , the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using the performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. , it is possible to display a corresponding display (the icon TI) corresponding to the judgment information on which the judgment has been performed, and to display the corresponding display disappear at a predetermined timing, and the last display in the variable display of the special symbol. After the cycle variation of , the disappearing display of the corresponding display ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and is capable of producing a predetermined game sound (fluctuating BGM, fluctuation start sound) while performing the fluctuating display. , a temporary stop sound, etc.), and the audible output of the predetermined game sound that started before the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol can be output as the end of the cycle variation. It is possible to end at a different timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "different timings" here are the start timing of the main control board's timer interrupt when the cycle fluctuation ends, and the start timing of the frame update of the image control unit when the audible output of the predetermined game sound ends. However, the timer interrupt period (4 ms) of the main control board during which the cycle fluctuation is terminated is within the frame update period (33 ms) of the image control section during which the audible output of the predetermined game sound is terminated. It may be something that is not included in the

◆A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is displayed in a stopped state, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and is capable of emitting a predetermined game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) during the execution of the fluctuating performance. The audible output of the predetermined game sound started before the last cycle variation in the special symbol variation display can be terminated before the cycle variation ends. It is possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is stopped and displayed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance based on the performance symbols while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and audibly outputs a predetermined game sound (fluctuating BGM) during the execution of the fluctuating performance. The predetermined game sound can continue to be audibly output even after the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbols ends (during stop display). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, the variable display means performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and then displaying the special symbol. is displayed in a stopped state, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and the performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed, and a background image displayed in the background of the performance symbol is displayed during the execution of the fluctuating display. It is possible to perform a presentation operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.), and the presentation operation of the background image continues even after the last cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol has ended (while the display is stopped). It is now being carried out. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
In conventional gaming machines, in addition to executing variable display of special symbols according to the judgment result of judgment information, there were also machines that executed variable effects using effect symbols while executing the variable display of special symbols (for example, 2018-118109). However, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in game performance and the game lacked interest.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. Pre-stop action effects (for example, display where the character shakes its head, reduced display → normal display, rotating display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and after the pre-stop action effect, the above-mentioned effects. A stop display that stops the symbols (for example, a completely stopped state), and a winning effect that notifies that the special game will be executed before the execution of the stop display (for example, a frame lighting device 10 , lighting device for the board 74, rainbow emission of the performance button light emitting LED 17c, output of a success sound, display of a success image, vibration of the performance button 17, jackpot notification mode operation of the movable performance device, etc.), and it is possible to perform the winning confirmation performance. is characterized in that it ends at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, for example, a predetermined timing during a period in which the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped).
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using performance symbols (for example, the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance symbol is a first performance symbol (for example, , a performance symbol 70a), and a second performance symbol (for example, special symbol TZ) different from the first performance symbol, and includes a specific variable performance (for example, a jackpot) based on the determination result of executing the special game. In the variable performance pattern that can be executed at the time of determination), the first performance pattern is a pre-stop motion performance that operates in a predetermined manner (for example, a display in which the character shakes its head, a reduction → normal display, a rotation display, a bound display, a rotation display). (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.), then executes a stop display (for example, a completely stopped state), and the second effect symbol stops without performing the pre-stop motion effect. In the special game that is executed after the display (for example, completely stopped mode) and the fluctuating effect ends, the second effect symbol is not displayed and the symbol corresponding to the first effect symbol ( For example, it is characterized by displaying only the numerical part in the effect pattern 70a).
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance pattern is a first performance pattern (for example, , a performance symbol 70a), and a second performance symbol (for example, special symbol TZ) that is different from the first performance symbol, and includes a specific variable performance (for example, a jackpot) based on the determination result to execute the special game. (variable performance pattern executable at the time of determination), the first performance pattern is changed to the first performance pattern by performing a pre-stop motion performance (for example, a symbol promotion performance, a revival performance) that operates in a predetermined manner. The mode (for example, the combination of production symbols 70a is "444", for example, the combination of production symbols 70a is "454") is changed to the second mode (for example, the combination of production symbols 70a is "777"), and the second mode is changed. It is possible to perform a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) in the first effect pattern of the mode, and the second effect pattern can be displayed in the second mode without performing the pre-stop motion effect. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a stop display (for example, a completely stopped mode) with a second effect pattern corresponding to the first effect pattern.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◇A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. Pre-stop action effects (for example, display where the character shakes its head, reduced display → normal display, rotating display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and after the pre-stop action effect, the above-mentioned effects. A stop display that stops the symbol (for example, a state in which it is completely stopped), and a fluctuating icon (for example, the icon TI) corresponding to the fluctuating performance that is being executed can be displayed, and the fluctuating The medium icon is in a state of change that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed by a first display mode (for example, a white icon) and a second display mode (for example, a blue icon) that is different from the first display mode. If an icon suggestion effect (for example, an icon change effect) is executable and the display is performed in the first display mode, a predetermined disappearance effect (for example, the icon disappearance effect) is performed when the stop display is performed. is performed to hide the fluctuating icon, and when the display is performed in the second display mode, when the stop display is performed, the predetermined disappearing effect is performed to hide the fluctuating icon. It is characterized by doing.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance pattern is a first performance pattern (for example, , a performance pattern 70a), and a second performance pattern (for example, a special design TZ) different from the first performance pattern, and the first performance pattern is a pre-stop motion performance (for example, , character shaking its head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounding display, rotating (small) display, bounding (small) display, etc.), and then displaying a stopped display (for example, completely stopped). The second performance symbol executes a stop display (for example, completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop motion performance, and displays a fluctuating icon (for example, , the icon TI), and the fluctuating icon can display a predetermined extinction performance ( For example, the icon disappears without performing the icon disappearance effect, but when the stop display of the first effect symbol is performed in a variable effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the predetermined disappear effect It is characterized by the fact that it becomes hidden after doing so.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance pattern is a first performance pattern (for example, , a performance pattern 70a), and a second performance pattern (for example, a special design TZ) different from the first performance pattern, and the first performance pattern is a pre-stop motion performance (for example, , character shaking its head, reduction → normal display, rotating display, bounding display, rotating (small) display, bounding (small) display, etc.), and then displaying a stopped display (for example, completely stopped). The second performance symbol executes a stop display (for example, completely stopped state) without performing the pre-stop motion performance, and displays a fluctuating icon (for example, , the icon TI), and the fluctuating icon can display a predetermined disappearance performance ( For example, the icon disappears without performing the icon disappearance effect, but when the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a variable effect based on the determination result that the special game is not executed, the predetermined disappear effect It is characterized by the fact that it becomes hidden after doing so.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. Includes a pre-stop action presentation (for example, a temporary stop of the presentation pattern 70a in a deciding presentation) and a stop display that stops the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation (for example, a completely stopped state). , the effect pattern can perform the variable effect in a first form (for example, a effect pattern 70a with only a number part) and a second form different from the first form (for example, a effect pattern 70a with a character). Yes, in a first variable effect (for example, a losing SPSP reach variable effect) based on a determination result that the special game is not executed, the pre-stop motion effect is performed in the first mode and the stop display is performed in the second mode. However, in a second variable performance (for example, jackpot SPSP reach variable performance) based on the determination result of executing the special game, the pre-stop motion performance and the stop display are performed in the first mode. do.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. The performance includes a pre-stop action presentation (for example, a temporary stop of the presentation pattern 70a) and a stop display for stopping the performance pattern after the pre-stop action presentation (for example, a completely stopped state). The symbol is capable of performing the variable production in a first mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with only a number part) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a production pattern 70a with a character), and In a first variable performance based on a determination result that the special game is not executed (for example, a lose/normal reach variable performance), the pre-stop motion performance and the stop display are performed in the second mode, but if the special game is not executed. In a second variable performance based on the determination result (for example, a losing SPSP reach variable performance), the pre-stop action performance (for example, a temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a (in a deciding performance)) is performed in the first mode, and the second The present invention is characterized in that the stop display is performed in a certain manner.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. Pre-stop action effects (for example, display where the character shakes its head, reduced display → normal display, rotating display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and after the pre-stop action effect, the above-mentioned effects. It is possible to display a predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image in FIG. 119) that displays the movement during execution of the fluctuation effect, including a stop display in which the symbol is stopped (for example, a state in which it is completely stopped). In the case where it is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) that makes the predetermined background image difficult to view, and the predetermined background image is made to be visible again in response to the end of the specific effect, The predetermined background image (for example, the normal background image that was displayed at timing T2 in FIG. 119) at the time when the specific effect ends without being made visible is For example, the normal background image corresponding to the updated value at the timing T8 in FIG. 119, or the normal background image developed on the layer N+1 at the timing T8 in FIG. 119) is displayed.
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. figure determination information); and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable performance causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner. Pre-stop action effects (for example, display where the character shakes its head, reduced display → normal display, rotating display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bound (small) display, etc.) and after the pre-stop action effect, the above-mentioned effects. In a specific variable performance based on the determination result to execute the special game, including a stop display that stops the symbols (for example, a completely stopped state), a specific performance (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) After notifying that the special game will be executed by executing, until the stop display is performed, a related effect related to the specific effect (for example, displaying a lingering image) is executed, and the related effect is executed. During execution, the performance symbols are not displayed in a manner to notify that the special game will be executed (for example, the performance symbol 70a is not displayed at all), and after the related performance is executed, the performance symbols are It is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner to notify that a special game will be executed (for example, the performance symbol 70a is displayed as "777").
Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with performance control means for controlling performances related to games, and a special game is executed in response to an operation of the operation means during a valid period in which a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the operation means is performed. There have been gaming machines that execute suggestive effects that suggest possibilities (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-158774). However, since the validity period is set over a predetermined period of time, the timing of the player's operations also varies, and there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the entertainment of the performance.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the first timing of the start of the cycle variation. At a timing different from the above, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbol (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined display is performed. It is possible to oscillate and display the performance symbols (for example, from T3 to T4 in FIG. 123) in response to the operation of the operation means during an operation valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a fixed performance), The number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the rocking display when the operating means is operated at a first timing in the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 123), and the operation The cycle fluctuation performed during execution of the rocking display when the means is operated at a second timing different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 123). Although the number of times is different, the number of times of the cycle fluctuation from the start of the predetermined operation valid period (for example, T2 in FIG. 123) until the stop display of the production symbol is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 123) is as follows. The present invention is characterized in that the operation is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, production control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 17), a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and a production position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60). B", "C"), and a movable body (e.g., first movable performance device 73), the main control means is configured to play a special game advantageous to the player (e.g., a determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (for example, special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); and a variable display that executes a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the fluctuation display means performs cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, stops completely). The production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a), and is configured to perform a variation production based on a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and to match the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At different timings, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbols (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during a valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the operation When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation validity period, the effect pattern starts from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 124). The number of cycle fluctuations until the stop display is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 124) and the second timing (for example, From the start of the operation of the movable body when operated in case 2 (T3) in FIG. 124 (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 124) until the stop display of the production symbol is performed (for example, case 2 in FIG. 124) Although the number of cycle fluctuations in T6) is different from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) until the stop display of the production symbol is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) The number of cycle fluctuations is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, production control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 17), a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and a production position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60). B", "C"), and a movable body (e.g., first movable performance device 73), the main control means is configured to play a special game advantageous to the player (e.g., a determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (for example, special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); and a variable display that executes a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the fluctuation display means performs cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, stops completely). The production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a), and is configured to perform a variation production based on a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and to match the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At different timings, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbols (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during a valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the operation Return of the movable body to the standby position when the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operational validity period (for example, T3- in Case 1 in FIG. 124) The number of cycle fluctuations from 1) to the stop display of the performance symbol (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 124) is different from the first timing during the predetermined operational validity period of the operating means. From the return of the movable body to the standby position (for example, T3-1 of case 2 in FIG. 124) when operated at the second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 124), the stop display of the production pattern Although the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the predetermined operation validity period (for example, T2 in FIG. 124) until the operation is performed (for example, T6 in case 2 in FIG. 124) is different, the stop display of the effect pattern The number of cycle fluctuations until the cycle is performed (for example, T6 in FIG. 124) is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, production control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 17), a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60), and a production position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60). B", "C"), and a movable body (e.g., first movable performance device 73), the main control means is configured to play a special game advantageous to the player (e.g., a determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (for example, special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); and a variable display that executes a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61), and the fluctuation display means performs cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, stops completely). The production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means is capable of executing a variation production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a), and is configured to perform a variation production based on a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and to match the start timing of the cycle variation for the first time. At different timings, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbols (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to operate the movable body in response to the operation of the operating means during a valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a final performance) (for example, the operation of the final performance in FIG. 60), and the operation When the means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 124) in the predetermined operation validity period, the effect pattern starts from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 124). The number of cycle fluctuations until the stop display is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 124) and the second timing (for example, From the start of the operation of the movable body when operated in case 2 (T3) in FIG. 124 (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 124) until the stop display of the production symbol is performed (for example, case 2 in FIG. 124) Although the number of cycle fluctuations in T6) is different, the number of cycle fluctuations is different from the start of the operation of the movable body (for example, T3 in FIG. 124) to the return to the standby position (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 124). The number of cycle fluctuations performed is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. A game that includes a means (for example, the effect control board 130), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the effect button 17), and a vibration means that can generate a predetermined vibration (for example, the button drive device 17b). In the machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). and a variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that performs a variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means performs a cycle as a variable display of the special symbol. After performing the fluctuation a plurality of times, the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, completely stopped state), and the performance control means displays a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. ), the variable display of the effect pattern in the variable effect is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation, and after the start, the effect pattern is stopped. display (for example, completely stopped mode) and vibrate the vibration means in response to the operation of the operation means within a predetermined operation validity period (for example, a validity period of 4 seconds in a fixed performance). (for example, T3 to T3-1 in FIG. 125), and when the operating means is operated at the first timing in the predetermined operation validity period (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 125). The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of vibration of the vibration means (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 125) until the stop display of the effect pattern is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 125), and the number of cycles when the operation means is When the vibration means starts to vibrate when operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 125) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 125) ) until the performance symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, T6 in case 2 in FIG. 125), but the number of cycle fluctuations is different from when the vibration means starts vibrating (for example, at T3 in FIG. 125). The number of cycle fluctuations performed from the time the vibration ends to the end of the vibration (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 125) is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated. .
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a means (for example, the performance control board 130) and a vibration means (for example, the button drive device 17b) that can generate a predetermined vibration, the main control means is configured to play a special game (for example, a special game advantageous to the player). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (for example, special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game), and a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. Fluctuation display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuating display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely displays the special symbol). The production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and starts the cycle variation for the first time. At a timing different from the above timing, a variable display of the performance symbols in the variable production is started, and after the start, a stop display for stopping the performance symbols (for example, a completely stopped mode) is executed, and The vibration means vibrates at a first timing of the fluctuating performance (for example, T7 in FIG. 126, for example, T3 in FIG. 126), and at a second timing of the fluctuating performance that is after the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126). For example, there are cases in which vibration occurs at T3 in FIG. 126 for T7 in FIG. 126, T7 in FIG. 127 for T7 in FIG. 126, and T7 in FIG. 127 for T3 in FIG. and the number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start of vibration at the first timing (for example, T7 in FIG. 126) until the end of vibration (for example, T9-1 in FIG. 126), and the number of vibrations at the second timing. The number of cycle fluctuations performed from the start (for example, T7 in FIG. 127) to the end of vibration (for example, T8-1 in FIG. 127) is different.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, effect control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, effect button 17), and light emitting means that can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, rainbow emission) (for example, In a gaming machine including a frame lighting device 10, a board lighting device 74, and a performance button light emitting LED 17c), the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). A determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines the determination information (for example, special symbol determination information), and a variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) that performs a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination. 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state); The production control means is capable of executing a variable production using a production pattern (for example, production pattern 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and executes the variation production at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle variation. The fluctuating display of the production symbols is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the production symbols (for example, in a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined operation effective period (for example, in the final production) is executed. It is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode in response to the operation of the operation means during the valid period (4 seconds) (for example, T3 in FIG. 128), and the operation means When the operation is performed at the first timing in the validity period (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 128), the stop display of the production pattern starts from the start of light emission in the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 128). The number of cycle fluctuations until the operation is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 128) and the operation means at a second timing different from the first timing in the predetermined operation effective period (for example, in case 1 in FIG. 128). From the start of light emission in the predetermined light emission mode (for example, T3 in case 2 of FIG. 128) until the stop display of the effect pattern is performed (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. 128) ) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations, but the cycle is performed between the start of light emission (for example, T3 in FIG. 128) and the end of light emission (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 128) of the predetermined light emission mode. It is characterized in that the number of fluctuations is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, production control board 130), operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 17), and sound output means (for example, sound output device 9) that can output a specific sound (for example, success sound). ), wherein the main control means determines determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). means (for example, the main CPU 110a), and a variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that performs a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as a fluctuating display of the special symbol, and the performance control means performs a performance in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using a symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, and after the start, In response to the operation of the operating means during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a fixed performance) by executing a stop display that stops the performance symbol (for example, a completely stopped state). It is possible to cause the sound output means to output the specific sound (for example, at T3 in FIG. 129), and the operation means can output the specific sound at the first timing in the predetermined operation validity period (for example, at T3 in Case 1 in FIG. 129). ) The cycle fluctuation from the start of the output of the specific sound (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 129) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, T6 in case 1 in FIG. 129) and the start of the output of the specific sound (for example, when the operating means is operated at a second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 129) different from the first timing in the predetermined operation validity period). , T3 of case 2 in FIG. 129) until the stop display of the production pattern is performed (for example, T6 of case 2 in FIG. 129), the number of cycle fluctuations is different from the start of output of the specific sound ( For example, the number of cycle fluctuations performed between T3 in FIG. 129 and the end of output (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 129) is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated; It is characterized by
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, then stops displaying the special symbol, and controls the performance control. The means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and the means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance in the fluctuating performance at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation. The fluctuating display of the production symbols is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the production symbols (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined operational validity period (for example, the validity period in the fixed production) is executed. 4 seconds) in response to the operation of the operating means (for example, T3 in FIG. 130), and after the notification, a specific image (for example, the switching displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) is announced. image), and the notification starts when the operation means is operated at the first timing (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 130) in the predetermined operation validity period (for example, in the case in FIG. 130). The number of cycle fluctuations from T3) in Case 1 of FIG. is operated at a different second timing (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 2 in FIG. 130) until the specific image is displayed (for example, in FIG. Although the number of cycle fluctuations in case 2 (T3-1) of 130 is different from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. The number of cycle fluctuations in T3-1) of 130 is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the first timing of the start of the cycle variation. At a timing different from the above, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbol (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined display is performed. The result of the determination is notified (for example, T3 in FIG. 130) in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period (for example, the valid period of 4 seconds in the final performance), and after the notification, a specific image (for example, The switching image displayed from T3-1 in FIG. 130) can be displayed, and when the operating means is operated at the first timing in the predetermined operation validity period (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 130), The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the notification (for example, T3 in case 1 in FIG. 130) until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 in case 1 in FIG. 130), and From the start of the notification (for example, T3 in Case 2 in FIG. 130) when the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, T3 in Case 2 in FIG. 130) in a predetermined operation validity period. The number of cycle fluctuations from the start of displaying the specific image (for example, T3-1 in FIG. 130) is different from the number of cycle fluctuations until the specific image is displayed (for example, T3-1 in case 2 in FIG. 130). The number of cycle fluctuations until the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, T6 in FIG. 130) is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines the figure determination information); a variable display means (for example, the special symbol displays 60 and 61) that performs a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination; a variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, the special figure variable pattern in FIG. 9) related to the variable display according to the result of the variable display; The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as a fluctuating display of the special symbol, and the performance control means performs a performance in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using a symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, and after the start, A stop display in which the production symbols are stopped (for example, completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific variation display pattern among the variation display patterns (for example, special symbol variation pattern 04 in FIG. 9, A specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure fluctuation pattern 09), and the specific effect is different from a first specific effect (for example, typhoon reach effect in FIG. 132). It is possible to execute either of the second specific effects (for example, the heavy snow reach shown in FIG. The contents are different), but the number of cycle fluctuations performed until the specific performance is started (for example, from T0 to T5 in FIG. 132) is the same.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means generates judgment information (for example, special game) on whether or not to execute a special game (for example, jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines the figure determination information); a variable display means (for example, the special symbol displays 60 and 61) that performs a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination; a variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, the special figure variable pattern in FIG. 9) related to the variable display according to the result of the variable display; The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after cycle fluctuation is performed a plurality of times as a fluctuating display of the special symbol, and the performance control means performs a performance in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using a symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started at a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, and after the start, A stop display in which the production symbols are stopped (for example, completely stopped mode) is executed, and a specific variation display pattern among the variation display patterns (for example, special symbol variation pattern 04 in FIG. 9, A specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) can be executed in the special figure fluctuation pattern 09), and the specific effect is different from a first specific effect (for example, typhoon reach effect in FIG. 132). It is possible to execute either of the second specific effects (for example, the heavy snow reach shown in FIG. The contents are different), but the number of cycle fluctuations performed after the start of the specific performance (for example, from T5 to T8 in FIG. 132) is the same.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the first timing of the start of the cycle variation. At a timing different from the above, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbol (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined display is performed. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance (for example, a dialogue preview performance) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period (for example, a valid period of 3 seconds in a dialogue preview). and when the operation means is operated at a first timing (for example, T2 in case 1 in FIG. 133) in the predetermined operation validity period, the execution of the suggestion effect starts (for example, at T4 in case 1 in FIG. 133). ) until the stop display of the performance symbol is performed (for example, T8 in case 1 in FIG. 133), the number of cycle fluctuations is different from the first timing in the predetermined operation validity period when the operation means is activated. From the start of execution of the suggestion effect (for example, T4 in case 2 of FIG. 133) when operated at two timings (for example, T2 of case 2 in FIG. 133) until the stop display of the effect pattern is performed (for example, Although the number of cycle fluctuations in case 2 (T8) in FIG. 133 is different, from the start of the predetermined operation effective period (for example, T2 in FIG. 133) until the stop display of the production symbol is performed (for example, The number of cycle fluctuations in T8) in FIG. 133 is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations is the same regardless of when the operating means is operated.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the first timing of the start of the cycle variation. At a timing different from the above, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display for stopping the performance symbols (for example, in a completely stopped state) is executed, and the operation A first operation performance for operating a means (e.g., an operation performance in a speech preview), and a second operation performance for operating the operation means, which is different from the first operation performance (for example, an operation performance for a final performance). and, when the first operation effect is executed, a first suggestion effect that suggests that the first operation effect is to be executed (for example, a fade-in image for dialogue preview in FIG. 134). display), and a second suggestive effect (for example, display of the fade-in image for the decisive effect in FIG. 134) that suggests that the second operation effect is to be executed when the second operation effect is executed. The number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the first suggestion effect (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134) and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the second suggestion effect (for example, T1-1 to T2 in FIG. 134) can be executed. The number of cycle fluctuations performed during T5 to T6) is different.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with means (for example, production control board 130) and operation means (for example, production button 17) that can be operated by a player, the main control means is configured to control special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a), and the first timing of the start of the cycle variation. At a timing different from the above, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is started, and after the start, a stop display that stops the performance symbol (for example, a completely stopped state) is executed, and a predetermined display is performed. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during a valid operation period (for example, a valid period of 4 seconds in a fixed performance). Yes, the suggestion effect is a first one that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed in response to the operation means being operated in a first operation mode (for example, operating the effect button 17 five times). The special operation is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in a suggestive effect (for example, meter pattern 1) and a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, operating the effect button 17 once). a second suggestion effect (for example, meter pattern 2) that suggests the possibility that the game will be executed, and the special game is started from the start of the first suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. The number of times the cycle fluctuation is performed until the possibility of execution is suggested (for example, T5 of meter pattern 1 in FIG. 135) and the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, T2 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135) Although the number of cycle fluctuations performed from to suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed (for example, T5 of meter pattern 2 in FIG. 135) is different, the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion It is characterized in that the number of cycle fluctuations from the start of the performance (for example, T2 in FIG. 135) until the stop display of the performance symbol is performed (for example, T8 in FIG. 135) is the same.
Thereby, the interest of the performance can be improved.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
In conventional gaming machines, various presentation means are provided on the game board surface, and the presentation means are used to improve the interest in the game. As such a performance means, there is one that includes a movable performance means (so-called gimmick) and operates the movable performance means in a predetermined operating mode (so-called performance operation). Moreover, for example, when the movable effect means is powered on, an operation check (so-called initial operation) is performed to operate the movable effect means in the same manner or substantially the same manner as the above-mentioned predetermined operation manner. The operation check is performed when the power is turned on even when the player is playing a game (for example, while a variable display is being displayed) (for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236681 Public bulletin). By the way, when an operation confirmation is executed during a variable display, some players may mistake the operation confirmation for an effect operation, causing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, the effect control board 130), a power supply means (for example, the power supply board 160) that supplies power, a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62), and the effect. a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move to a position (e.g., “B”, “C” in FIG. 60, e.g., “G” in FIG. 62); In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, special figure determination information) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means displays the production symbol (in response to the variable display of the special symbol). For example, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using the performance symbol 70a), and perform performance actions by the movable body (for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 60, for example, in FIG. 62) during execution of the fluctuation display. However, if the power supply is stopped during execution of the fluctuating display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, 59, for example, (initial a) to (initial c) in FIG. 62 can be executed, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the performance motion of the movable body and the execution of the initial motion of the movable body The number of the cycle fluctuations performed during the cycle is different.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, the effect control board 130), a power supply means (for example, the power supply board 160) that supplies power, a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62), and the effect. a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move to a position (e.g., “B”, “C” in FIG. 60, e.g., “G” in FIG. 62); In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, special figure determination information) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means displays the production symbol (in response to the variable display of the special symbol). For example, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using the performance symbol 70a), and perform performance actions by the movable body (for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 60, for example, in FIG. 62) during execution of the fluctuation display. However, if the power supply is stopped during execution of the fluctuating display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, In FIG. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62 can be executed, and in the performance operation of the movable body, the above is performed before the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position. The number of cycle variations is different from the number of cycle variations performed during the initial operation of the movable body until the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, the effect control board 130), a power supply means (for example, the power supply board 160) that supplies power, a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62), and the effect. a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move to a position (e.g., “B”, “C” in FIG. 60, e.g., “G” in FIG. 62); In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, special figure determination information) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). For example, the main CPU 110a) and variable display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61) that execute variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the variable display means The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, in a completely stopped state) after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means displays the production symbol (in response to the variable display of the special symbol). For example, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance using the performance symbol 70a), and perform performance actions by the movable body (for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 60, for example, in FIG. 62) during execution of the fluctuation display. However, if the power supply is stopped during execution of the fluctuating display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, In FIG. 59, for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. 62 can be executed, and in the performance operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the performance position. In the initial operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the performance position is different.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, production control board 130), a power supply means for supplying power (for example, power supply board 160), and a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "D" in FIG. 61, for example, A movable body that can move between the production position (for example, "B", "C" in FIG. 60, "E" in FIG. 61, and "G" in FIG. 62) (for example, a first movable presentation device 73, for example, a second movable presentation device 75, for example, a sub display device 71), the main control means is configured to play special games advantageous to the player (for example, a determining means (e.g., main CPU 110a) that determines determination information (e.g., special symbol determination information) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game); display means (for example, special symbol displays 60, 61), the fluctuation display means performs a cycle fluctuation a plurality of times as a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and then stops displaying the special symbol (for example, completely stops displaying the special symbol). The performance control means is capable of executing a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and during execution of the fluctuating display, While making it possible to perform the performance operations by the movable body (for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 60, for example, (performance a) to (performance c) in FIG. 62), the above-mentioned If the power supply is stopped while the fluctuating display is being executed and then the power is being supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, in FIG. 59, for example, in FIG. (first a) to (first c), for example, (first a) to (first c) in FIG. a second movable body different from the first movable body (for example, a first movable presentation device 73, for example, a sub-display device 71), and the first movable body is configured to display the The number of cycle fluctuations is the same as the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the execution of the initial motion, but the second movable body has the same number of cycle fluctuations as the number of cycle fluctuations performed during the performance motion. , and the number of cycle fluctuations performed during execution of the initial operation are different.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, the main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, the effect control board 130), a power supply means (for example, the power supply board 160) that supplies power, a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62), and the effect. a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move to a position (e.g., “B”, “C” in FIG. 60, e.g., “G” in FIG. 62); In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, special figure determination information) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). For example, a main CPU 110a), a variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that executes variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, the special symbol variation pattern in FIG. 9), and the variable display means selects a plurality of cycle variations as a variable display of the special symbol. After the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, completely stopped state), the performance control means is configured to change the performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. The effect can be executed, and the effect operation by the movable body (for example, (act a) to (act c) in FIG. 62 in FIG. If the power supply is stopped during execution of a fluctuating display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, in FIG. 59, for example, in FIG. (First a) to (First c)) can be executed, and when the power is supplied, a predetermined supply image (for example, "Restoring") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). In the production operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the production position, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the production position in the initial movement of the movable body. The number of cycle fluctuations to be performed is different, and power is supplied at a predetermined timing (for example, T0 in FIG. 137) during execution of the fluctuation display according to a predetermined fluctuation display pattern (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern 01). If the initial operation is performed after the power supply is stopped (e.g., T1 in FIG. 137), the predetermined power supply has already started when the initial operation is finished (e.g., T9 in FIG. 137). It is characterized in that the display of the image has ended.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to commands from the main control means. means (for example, the effect control board 130), a power supply means (for example, the power supply board 160) that supplies power, a standby position (for example, "A" in FIG. 60, for example, "F" in FIG. 62), and the effect. a movable body (e.g., first movable presentation device 73, e.g., sub-display device 71) that can move to a position (e.g., “B”, “C” in FIG. 60, e.g., “G” in FIG. 62); In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a determination means (for example, special figure determination information) for determining determination information (for example, special figure determination information) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). For example, a main CPU 110a), a variable display means (for example, special symbol display devices 60, 61) that executes variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, the special symbol variation pattern in FIG. 9), and the variable display means selects a plurality of cycle variations as a variable display of the special symbol. After the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state (for example, completely stopped state), the performance control means is configured to change the performance symbol (for example, the performance symbol 70a) in response to the fluctuating display of the special symbol. The effect can be executed, and the effect operation by the movable body (for example, (act a) to (act c) in FIG. 62 in FIG. If the power supply is stopped during execution of a fluctuating display and then power is supplied, the initial operation by the movable body (for example, in FIG. 59, for example, in FIG. (First a) to (First c)) can be executed, and when the power is supplied, a predetermined supply image (for example, "Restoring") can be displayed on the display means (for example, the main display device 70). In the production operation of the movable body, the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the production position, and the number of cycle fluctuations performed when the movable body is in the production position in the initial movement of the movable body. The number of cycle fluctuations that are displayed is different from the number of times the cycle fluctuation is performed, and at a predetermined timing (for example, If the power supply is stopped at T0 in FIG. 138 and then the power is supplied (for example, T1 in FIG. 138) to execute the initial operation, when the initial operation is finished (for example, T7 in FIG. 138) The apparatus is characterized in that the predetermined supply image is still displayed.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine equipped with a movable presentation means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines are designed to display a special symbol in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination information, and output a production sound from a sound output section while the special symbol is in a variable display. There is. Furthermore, there have been games in which the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined setting value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, such gaming machines have the problem that there is room for improvement in game performance and the games are not very interesting.

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a performance control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting performance sound according to the progress of the performance, and the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by winning a prize in a starting slot; a variable display means for performing a variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means stops displaying the special symbol after performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation section that can be operated by the player, and the predetermined sound ( Variable BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) can be audibly output, and when the cycle variation is started from a customer waiting state in which the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, the volume value is set. However, when the audible output of the predetermined sound is started in response to the start of the cycle variation, there are restrictions regarding the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, and the volume value image). (changed to the rear layer of the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the start of the variable performance.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine including a production control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting production sounds according to the progress of the production, the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize in a starting slot; a variable display means for performing a variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means stops displaying the special symbol after performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means , the volume value of the performance sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the volume value of the performance sound can be set to a predetermined volume value, and the fluctuation display of the performance symbol and the special symbol It is possible to execute a variation effect that displays a variation display, and when the cycle variation is started from a customer waiting state, there are no restrictions on the setting of the volume value, but the special symbol may be varied in accordance with the start of the cycle variation. When the display starts, restrictions are placed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to a layer behind the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the start of the variable performance.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine including a production control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting production sounds according to the progress of the production, the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize in a starting slot; The fluctuation display means includes a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of the special symbol, and a storage means for storing determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, and the fluctuation display means displays a cycle fluctuation as a fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special symbol is stopped and displayed after the special symbol is displayed a plurality of times, and the performance control means is capable of setting the volume value of the performance sound to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of an operation unit that can be operated by the player; In response to an increase in the pending memory, the pending information (holding icon, numeric pending, pending LED) is displayed in an increased manner (additional display, increased number, etc.), and in response to a decrease in the pending memory, the pending information is displayed to be decreased (shifted). When the cycle variation starts from the customer waiting state, the setting of the volume value is not restricted; When this is performed, restrictions are placed on the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, changing the volume value image to a layer behind the production pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize the decrease in the number of pending games.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine including a production control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting production sounds according to the progress of the production, the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize in a starting slot; a variable display means for performing a variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means stops displaying the special symbol after performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the predetermined sound ( Variable BGM, sound effects, etc.) can be audibly output, and when the cycle variation is started from a customer waiting state where the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, there are no restrictions on the setting of the volume value. , when the audible output of the predetermined sound is started in response to the start of the cycle fluctuation, restrictions are imposed on the setting of the volume value (regulation of the volume value setting, deletion of the volume value image, change of the volume value image to the production pattern). (changed to the backward layer, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of starting the audible output of the predetermined sound.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine including a production control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting production sounds according to the progress of the production, the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize in a starting slot; a variable display means for performing a variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means stops displaying the special symbol after performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the variable display of the effect pattern is performed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special pattern. When the variable display of the effect pattern is stopped in response to the stop of the cycle variation, there are restrictions regarding the setting of the volume value (restrictions on the setting of the volume value, erasure of the volume value image). , the volume value image is changed to the layer behind the effect pattern, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance symbols and special symbols have stopped being displayed (the fluctuating performance has ended).

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In a gaming machine including a production control board 130) and a sound output unit (sound output device 9) for outputting production sounds according to the progress of the production, the main control means is configured to control the performance when an acquisition condition is satisfied ( a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize in a starting slot; a variable display means for performing a variable display of the special symbol, the variable display means stops displaying the special symbol after performing a cycle variation a plurality of times as a variable display of the special symbol, and the performance control means , the volume value of the effect sound can be set to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of the operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the execution display (the icon, etc.) is performed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. can be displayed, and when the execution display is erased in response to the stop of the cycle fluctuation, restrictions regarding the setting of the volume value (restricting the setting of the volume value, erasing the volume value image, displaying the volume value image) (changed to the layer behind the design, etc.). Therefore, the period during which the player can adjust the volume can be secured as long as possible, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even if the volume is adjusted, the execution display (the icon) will disappear, that is, it will be possible for the player to recognize that the variable performance has ended.

(Contents 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are machines that display a special symbol in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination information, and also execute a variable effect and output a production sound while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-043025). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the progress of the performance is stagnant, and there is a problem in that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display of a performance symbol is performed in response to the execution of the fluctuating display, and it is possible to output a performance sound (fluctuating BGM such as normal BGM, sound effects, etc.) during execution of the fluctuating performance. In the variable performance, if the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the performance symbol is temporarily stopped (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the performance symbol If the temporary stop period and the output period of the production sound are extended, and the production sound is output to the end of the sound data while the temporary stop period of the production symbol is extended, the fluctuating display of the special symbol is not executed. Even in a state where there is no effect, the effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display of a performance symbol and a fluctuating display of a special symbol are performed in response to the execution of a fluctuating display of the special symbol, and it is possible to output a performance sound (fluctuating BGM) while the fluctuating display of the special symbol is being executed. If the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the special symbol changes. If the period and the output period of the production sound are extended, and the production sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not executed, The effect sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the effect sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from deteriorating during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which a variable display of performance symbols is displayed correspondingly while the variable display is being executed, and a specific sound (zone BGM, jackpot preview sound, etc. ), and the stop condition is not satisfied at the predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally) ), if the temporary stop period of the performance symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol, the special symbol Even when the variable display is not being executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which a variable display of a production symbol and a variable display of a special symbol are performed in response to the execution of a variable display of the special symbol, and a specification that makes it possible to expect execution of the special game while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. It is possible to output sounds (zone BGM, jackpot announcement sound, etc.), and the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (stop command, next start command, customer waiting state designation command) cannot be received normally), the variation period of the special symbol and the output period of the specific sound are extended, and if the specific sound is output to the end of the sound data during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol, the Even in a state where the variable display of special symbols is not executed, the specific sound is output from the beginning of the sound data, and the output period of the specific sound is extended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by satisfying an acquisition condition (winning a prize in a starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbol in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the fluctuating display, and while the fluctuating performance is being executed, a predetermined notification performance (confirmation performance, etc.) based on the result of the determination can be performed, and the fluctuation If the stop condition is not met at a predetermined timing when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the performance (the stop command, the next start command, or the customer waiting state designation command cannot be received normally), the performance pattern is temporarily stopped. Although the period is extended and the predetermined notification performance is not started during the extension of the temporary suspension period of the performance pattern, the predetermined notification performance that was started before the extension of the temporary suspension period of the performance pattern is It can be executed continuously even during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by satisfying an acquisition condition (winning a prize in a starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbol in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable performance in which a variable display of a production symbol and a variable display of a special symbol are performed in response to the execution of a variable display of the special symbol, and a predetermined notification based on the result of the determination is made during execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a performance (determined performance, etc.), and the stop condition is not met at the predetermined timing when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (when the stop command, next start command, or customer waiting state designation command is successfully received) If the variation period of the special symbol is not possible), the variation period of the special symbol is extended, and the predetermined notification performance is not started during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol, but it is started before the variation period of the special symbol is extended. The predetermined notification performance can be performed even during the extension of the variation period of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing during the extension of the special symbol variation period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination information, and a variable effect is also executed. Additionally, a pending display corresponding to judgment information indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display has not been executed is displayed, and an execution display is displayed in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2018-043025). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the games are not very interesting.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means is capable of displaying a number of pending displays (such as pending icons) according to the pending memory, and displays production symbols in response to execution of the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance that displays a fluctuating display, and it is possible to perform an action display (rotation, swinging) of the pending display while the fluctuating performance is being executed, and it is possible to disable the pending display while the fluctuating performance is being executed. When it is possible to execute a specific production to be displayed (start effect production, mode change production SP reach production, eye catch production, etc.) and display the suspended display in accordance with the end of the specific production, a predetermined operating state is required. It is possible to display the motion from the initial posture (the initial posture, the posture in which the motion display would have continued even during the specific performance). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the hold display (hold icon), and it also makes it less likely that players will feel uncomfortable when redisplaying the hold display, improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the production control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display of a performance symbol is performed, and it is possible to perform an operation display (rotation, swinging) of the execution display while the fluctuating performance is being executed, and the execution is possible during execution of the fluctuating performance. When it is possible to execute a specific performance that hides the display (mode change performance, SPSP development performance, decision success performance, eye-catching performance, etc.), and when the execution display is displayed in response to the end of the specific performance, a predetermined It is possible to display the motion from the motion state (initial posture, the posture in which the motion display would have continued even during the specific performance). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the execution display (the relevant icon), and it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when redisplaying the execution display, improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a number of pending displays (such as pending icons) according to the pending memory, and the pending display in which the variable display of the special symbol has started. can be displayed as an execution display (the relevant icon, etc.), and it is possible to execute a variable display in which a variable display of the effect design is performed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the suspended display can be performed while the variable display is being executed. A specific performance (mode change performance, SPSP development performance, SPSP reach performance, successful decision performance, eye-catching performance, etc.) can be executed, and when displaying the pending display and the execution display in response to the end of the specific performance, the predetermined operating state (initial posture, during specific performance, etc.) can be executed. It is now possible to display the motion from the position in which the motion display would have continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when redisplaying the hold display (hold icon), and it also makes it less likely that players will feel uncomfortable when redisplaying the hold display, improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. The production control means includes a storage means for storing, and a preliminary judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the production control means displays a number of holding displays (holding icons, etc.) according to the holding memory. It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the hold display to a special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the preliminary determination. It is possible to perform a variable display in which a variable display of the effect design is performed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and to change the suspended display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state during execution of the variable display. It is possible to perform an action display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the state (changing posture), and when the suspended display in the normal mode is in the second state, the display is changed to the special mode, It is possible to display the suspended display changed to the special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold display (hold icon). Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the hold display, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by satisfying an acquisition condition (winning a prize in a starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. and a storage means for storing, and the performance control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution display is different from the normal mode (white). It is possible to perform a change effect that changes to different special modes (flashing white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute an action display (rotation, swing) that repeatedly changes the execution display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state (changed posture) during execution of the fluctuation performance. , when changing to the special mode when the execution display in the normal mode is in the second state, the execution display changed to the special mode is displayed in operation from the first state. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). In addition, when changing the display mode of the execution display, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. and a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and the effect control means displays a number of hold displays (hold icons, etc.) according to the hold memory. It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the hold display to a special mode (blinking white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.) different from the normal mode (white) based on the result of the preliminary determination. It is possible to execute a variable display in which a variable display of the effect design is performed in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and to change the suspended display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state during execution of the variable display. It is possible to perform motion display (rotation, rocking) that repeatedly changes the state (changing posture), and the special mode includes a first special mode (white blinking, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, etc.). rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and when changing to the second special mode when the hold display of the first special mode is in the second state, the display that has changed to the second special mode It is possible to display the pending display from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the hold display (hold icon). Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the hold display, it is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, the performance control means is capable of displaying an execution display (the icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution display is different from the normal mode (white). It is possible to perform a change effect that changes to different special modes (flashing white, blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and a variable effect that displays a variable display of the effect pattern in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute an action display (rotation, swing) that repeatedly changes the execution display between a first state (initial posture) and a second state (changed posture) during execution of the variation effect. , the special mode includes a first special mode (blinking white, etc.) and a second special mode (blue, red, rainbow color, ax shape, etc.), and the execution display of the first special mode is the first special mode. When changing to the second special mode when in the second state, it is possible to display the execution display changed to the second special mode from the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden when changing the display mode of the execution display (the icon). Further, when changing the display mode of the execution display, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
Here, conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling performances according to commands from the main control means. In such a gaming machine, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination information, and a variable effect is also executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not performed, the customer waiting performance is executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-043025). However, in such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the performance when the variable performance is started during the execution of the customer waiting performance, and there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a variable performance in which the display means performs a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols and a variable display of a plurality of special symbols, and in the variable effect, a starting motion (a rising movement) is performed on the effect pattern. , enlarging/reducing, etc.) and then displaying the effect pattern in a variable manner, and it is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state. , the fluctuating production starts with the plurality of production symbols and the plurality of special symbols having the same display result, and ends with the plurality of production symbols and the plurality of special symbols having the same display result; When the variable performance is started during execution of the customer waiting performance, the specific image is faded out, and the plurality of performance symbols and the plurality of special symbols are made visible while the specific image is fading out. However, the time until the plurality of performance symbols are variably displayed is longer than the time until the plurality of special symbols are variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. In response to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the display means performs a variable display of a performance symbol and a variable display of a special symbol, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol starts an operation (such as floating, scaling, etc.). It is possible to perform a variably displaying of the effect pattern after performing the above, and it is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (a customer waiting demonstration image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, and When the variable effect is started during execution of the effect, the specific image can be faded out, the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of the fade out of the specific image, and the effect pattern is , after the end of the fade-out of the specific image, variable display (scrolling, updating of symbols) is started. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started due to the special symbol while confirming the stop number of the previous variable presentation. Moreover, the performance effect at the start of fluctuation can be improved by the performance symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means additionally displays a pending display (such as a pending icon) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and decreases the pending display in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to perform a variable performance in which the display means performs a variable display of the effect design and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the above-mentioned It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on a display means, and when the variable effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed, it is possible to fade out the specific image. The special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, and the reduced display of the suspended display is ended after the end of the fade-out of the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of special symbols has started, and also to accurately recognize that the number of pending memories has decreased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means additionally displays a pending display (such as a pending icon) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and decreases the pending display in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to perform a variable performance in which the display means performs a variable display of the effect design and a variable display of the special symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the above-mentioned It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on a display means, and when the variable effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed, it is possible to fade out the specific image. Yes, the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the end of the fade-out of the specific image, and the suspended display is visibly displayed during the fade-out of the specific image, and the decreasing display ends after the end of the fade-out. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display of special symbols has started, and also to accurately recognize that the number of pending memories has decreased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means additionally displays a pending display (such as a pending icon) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and decreases the pending display in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to perform a variable display in which a display means displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol is given a starting motion (rising, floating, etc.). It is possible to variably display the performance pattern after performing enlargement/contraction etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, When the variable effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed, the specific image can be faded out, and the pending display starts decreasing display before the end of the fade out of the specific image, and the The variable display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) of the effect pattern is started after the end of the fade-out of the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game); a variable display means for performing a variable display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination; and a holding memory for determining information on which the determination has not yet been performed. storage means for storing, and the production control means additionally displays a pending display (such as a pending icon) in response to an increase in the pending memory, and decreases the pending display in accordance with a decrease in the pending memory. It is possible to perform a variable display in which a display means displays a variable display of the effect symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol is given a starting motion (rising, floating, etc.). It is possible to variably display the performance pattern after performing enlargement/contraction etc.), and it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during the customer waiting state, When the fluctuating effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed, the specific image can be faded out, and the pending display is terminated after the specific image fades out, and the display is stopped. Variable display (scrolling, updating of symbols) of the symbols is started after the reduction display of the pending display ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to display an execution display (the relevant icon, etc.) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the display means displays a variable display of the performance symbol in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. In the fluctuating performance, the performance pattern can be displayed in a variable manner after the performance pattern performs a starting action (elevating, scaling, etc.), and during the customer waiting state, a specific image (customer waiting demo) can be displayed on the display means. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect that displays a customer waiting effect (image), and when the variable effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed, it is possible to fade out the specific image, and the execution display is The display is completed after the end of the fade-out of the image, and the variable display (scrolling, updating of the pattern) of the effect pattern is started after the display of the execution display is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the number of pending memories has decreased before the performance symbols start changing display, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by satisfying an acquisition condition (winning a prize in a starting slot). A determination means for determining whether to execute a game (jackpot game), and a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of a special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the fluctuation display means is configured to perform a fluctuation display of a special symbol. A variable performance in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a cycle variation is performed a plurality of times as a variable display, and the performance control means displays a variable display of the performance symbol on the display means in response to execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state, and the variable effect is started while the customer waiting effect is being executed. In this case, the specific image can be faded out, and the display change in the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times before the specific image finishes fading out. Therefore, it is possible to end the customer waiting demonstration performance in a natural flow while making the player aware that the variable display of the special symbols has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a variable display in which a display means displays a variable display in response to the execution of the variable display, and a customer waiting effect in which a specific image (customer waiting demo image) is displayed on the display means during a customer waiting state. and when the variable effect is started during execution of the customer waiting effect, the specific image is faded out and the effect pattern is displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out. ing. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration performance can be ended in a natural flow, and the variable performance can be started without delay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance according to commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with an effect control board 130), the main control means executes a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning in the starting slot). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game (jackpot game), and a variable display means for performing a variable display of special symbols according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the special symbols in accordance with the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display of performance symbols is displayed on the display means in response to the execution of the fluctuating display, and a preview performance (starting effect performance) that makes the user expect the execution of the special game in response to the start of the fluctuating performance. , mode change effect), and a customer waiting effect that displays a specific image (customer waiting demonstration image) on the display means while in a customer waiting state, and the said change while executing the customer waiting effect. When the performance is started, the specific image is faded out, the performance pattern is displayed so as to be visible during the fade-out, and after the performance pattern becomes visible, the visibility of the performance pattern is restricted. The preview performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that a specific preview effect has started due to the start of the variable effect while also confirming the stop roll of the previous variable effect, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel). The variable display of the special symbols may be performed in the order in which game balls enter the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small winning game is not executed because there is no small winning as a result of the jackpot judgment, but for example, a jackpot judgment is made when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45. Now, no matter which setting value is used, a small hit will be determined with the same first probability (for example, 1/300), and when determining a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, which setting will be used? A small hit may be determined with the same second probability (for example, 1/7) even if the winning number is a value. In this case, a specific area is provided inside the first variable winning part 49, and when a game ball that enters the first big winning opening 50 passes through the specific area during a small winning game, a so-called jackpot game is executed. +2 types of gaming machines may also be used.

In addition, in the case of a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine, after the jackpot game, it shall be shifted to the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot game (via the small winning game) based on the winning in the first starting opening 45. ) is executed, the game shall be shifted to the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a ratio of 1:1, and a jackpot game (including via a small winning game) based on winning in the second starting opening 47. If this is executed, it is preferable to shift to the time-saving gaming state with 100% probability. In this case, if the time saving game state is entered after the end of the jackpot game based on winning in the first starting opening 45, the number of time saving games is set to 1, and the jackpot game based on winning in the second starting opening 47 is started. When transitioning to the time saving gaming state after the end, it is preferable to set the number of time saving times to 5 times and 10 times at a ratio of 1:1.

In addition, in the case of a so-called 1 type + 2 type gaming machine, if a small win is determined in the look-ahead judgment (preliminary judgment) during the normal gaming state, the final icon display mode in the icon change performance is the final icon display mode of the jackpot game. The rainbow icon that confirms the execution will not be determined, and if a small win is determined in the look-ahead determination (prior determination) during the time-saving game state, the rainbow icon will be determined as the final icon display mode in the icon change performance. You may also do so.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line (meeting the awarding conditions) during a game using medals (gaming media), a predetermined amount of The present invention can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award prize medals (prize medal data) to players. Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 First big winning hole 56 Second big winning hole 70 Main display device 71 Sub display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a command from the main control means,
The main control means is
determination means for determining determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A variable display means for displaying a special symbol in a variable manner according to the result of the determination;
storage means for storing judgment information on which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory;
The fluctuation display means is
As a variation display of the special symbol, cycle variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed;
The performance control means is
It is possible to display a number of pending displays according to the pending memory,
In response to the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to perform a variable performance using a performance symbol,
It is possible to execute an operation display in which the hold display is operated periodically during execution of the fluctuating effect,
The pending display is
A hold display that displays an operation in a first cycle, and a hold display that displays an operation in a second cycle different from the first cycle,
The performance control means is
During execution of the fluctuating effect in which a hold display for displaying an action is displayed in the first cycle and during execution of the variable effect in which a hold display for displaying an action is displayed in the second cycle , the hold display It is possible to execute a specific reach effect that is executed with the
When redisplaying the pending display in response to the end of the specific reach effect, it is possible to display the operation from a predetermined operating state,
It is possible to cause the suspended display to be displayed in operation from the predetermined operating state to the predetermined operating state by the time the fluctuating effect ends;
By displaying the pending display in a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the special game will be executed,
After the first cycle variation in the variation display of the special symbol is started, the reduction display of the pending display is started, and the reduction display of the pending display is started at a timing later than the end timing of the first cycle variation. A game machine characterized in that the game machine ends.